Home

NetPointPro Family System Manual

1. Descriptor Netronics NB 1G1 FPGA Contained In 4 Class module Parent Relative Position 1 Name FPGA Hardware Revision empty Firmware Revision to be read in runtime Software Revision empty Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 240 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 Attribute Value Serial Number empty Manufacturer Name empty Model Name empty Field Replaceable Unit not replaceable Indicator CPLD Table12 16 CPLD Attribute Value Inventory Index 7 Descriptor Netronics NB 1G1 CPLD Contained In 4 Class module Parent Relative Position 2 Name CPLD Hardware Revision empty Firmware Revision to be read in runtime Software Revision empty Serial Number empty Manufacturer Name Netronics Model Name empty Field Replaceable Unit not replaceable Indicator SFP Table 12 17 SFP Attribute Value Inventory Index 7 Descriptor Netronics NB 1G1 SFP Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 241 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 Attribute Value Contained In 4 Class module Parent Relative Position 3 Name SFP Hardware Revision to be read in runtime Firmware Revision empty Software Revision empty Serial Number empty Manufacturer Name to be read in runtime Model Name empty Field Replaceable Unit replace
2. Delete IP COS IP COS Value Figure 7 2 Classifier COS Setup Classifier EVC Settings Use the following command to configure classifier evc Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual Performing Advanced Configuration Chapter 7 set classifier evc lt classifier id 1 248 interface host eth0 eth1 eth2 gt vid lt list 0 4094 gt pcp lt list 0 7 gt ip cos lt dscp cos mpls exp lt list of 0 7 gt dont care gt precedence lt 1 8 gt eve lt 1 31 gt Classifier EVC settings for priority based on PCP pBits on EthO and Eth1 classifier evc configuring set classifier evc 1 interface eth0 precedence 1 vid 0 4094 pcp ip cos dont care evc 1 set classifier evc 2 interface eth0 precedence vid 0 4094 pcp ip cos dont care evc 2 set classifier evc 3 interface eth0 precedence vid 0 4094 pcp ip cos dont care evc 3 set classifier evc 4 interface eth0 precedence vid 0 4094 pcp ip cos dont care evc 4 set classifier evc 5 interface eth0 precedence vid 0 4094 pcp ip cos dont care evc 5 set classifier evc 6 interface eth0 precedence vid 0 4094 pcp ip cos dont care evc 6 set classifier evc 7 interface eth0 precedence vid 0 4094 pcp ip cos dont care evc 7 set classifier evc 8 interface eth0 precedence vid 0 4094 pcp ip cos dont care evc 8 QoS 192 168 0 1 Inte
3. Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 288 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 PEP Virtual Port Table Attributes Table 12 46 PEP Virtual Port Table Attributes Attribute CLI Description SNMP Object ID Value Access Default Attribute Name Bridge Port bridge The bridge port for the PEP ieee8021Brid s1 N A N A port Virtual Port entry geBasePort The Bridge Port specified 1 3 111 2 80 in the command must be 2 1 1 2 1 1 4 an internal port PEP that 1 2 belongs to the corresponding C component PEP S VID s vid The 12 bit S VID that is ieee8021PbEdge 1 4094 N A N A associated with the PEP Port SVid 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 5 1 3 1 1 PEP C PVID cpvid The 12 bit C VID that will be ieee8021PbEdge 1 4094 RC N A used for untagged frames Port received at the PEP PVID The VID must be defined in the 1 3 111 2 802 1 VLAN Table for the port s C 1 5 1 3 1 2 component Table 12 44 PEP Default User An integer range from 0 7 to ieee8021PbEdge 0 7 RC None Priority prio be used for untagged frames Port received at the Provider Edge DefaultUserPriori Port ty 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 5 1 3 1 3 PEP Acceptable Frame The frame types that will be ieee8021PbEdge All Admit all RC All Types admit accepted upon receipt at the Port untagged and PEP AcceptableFrame priority tagged Types frames 1 3 111 2 802 1 Untagged 1 5 1 3 1 4 Admit untagged frames only Tagged Admit tagged frame
4. Figure 8 5 RF Statistics History Screen Tab For a description of the radio statistics refer to Table 12 22 To clear the statistic counters click Clear on the Current tab Viewing a Statistics Summary Using the Web EMS You can display a summary of the ODU s radio statistics in graph or table format using the Web EMS To display a summary of the ODU s radio statistics click Radio on the Web EMS Main screen and click the Statistics Summary section Statistics Summary Graph Table Start Min RSSI Max RSSI Min CINR Max CINR Min Modulation Max Modulation Thu Mar 17 09 52 42 38 j4 18 japsk 4 10 5 japsk 4 1 0 5 3 Thu Mar 17 09 37 IE 38 39 18 japsk 2 2 0 5 gpsk 410 5 Thu Mar 17 09 22 78 37 10 18 lapsk 140 5 qpsk4 10 5 Figure 8 6 Web EMS Statistics Summary Table Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 141 Monitoring the System Chapter 8 Statistics Summary Graph Table Statistics Summary Graph 28 214 ee ere ee RR RR ee a ee ee ae SEE 74 CINR dB 04 304 RSSI dBm 09 24 00 09 26 00 09 28 00 09 30 00 09 32 00 09 34 00 09 36 00 09 38 00 09 40 00 09 42 00 09 44 00 09 48 00 09 48 00 09 50 00 09 52 00 Time Max CINR RSSI Min RSSI Max RSSI CINR Min CINR Figure 8 7 Web EMS Statistics Summary Graph Viewing Radio Statistics
5. 6 Proceed with antenna alignment and ODU setup as described in section 02 Aligning the Antenna Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 26 Installing the NetBeam System 4 Chapter 2 3 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR MOUNTING KIT Step 1 Bolt 5 16 x1 3 8 UNC Spring Washer 5 16 Flat Washer 5 16 6PL DETAIL A SCALE 1 1 5 D Antenna Base Lock Elevation Adjustment Bolt 5 16 Notes Center the Azimuth Lock Bolts in slot 4 PL Use tightening torque of 4 Nm on Central Bolts 2 PL Tool required 1 2 open end or deep socket wrench Use grease in marked recomended places Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual Azimuth Lock Bolts 4 PL Holder Bracket 2 PL Grease Surface Around the Slot from Both Sides Hex Nut 5 16 UNC Spring Wahser 5 16 Flat Washer 5 16 4PL Notes Roughly aim the Mounting Kit Pin perpendicular to Dish direction Use tightening torque of 9 Nm on Nut of Mounting Lock Bolt 4 PL Tool required 1 2 open end or deep socket wrench Use grease in marked recomended places RD43101200C D Mounting Lock Bolt 5 16 x6 5 UNC 4PL Hex Nut 5 16 UNC Spring Wahser 5 16 Flat Washer 5 16 2PL Elevation Lock Bolt 5 16 x2 UNC 2PL Joint Lock Bolt Hex Head Screw 5 16 x5 8 UNC 27 Joint Lock Bolt must be fastened only when the Dish Antenna Base is in O deg Position Notes At any time keep levation Adjustment
6. 58 57 56 55 48 min rssi 76 76 76 76 76 max rssi 33 24 10 38 37 min cinr 15 128 128 10 max cinr 18 128 128 18 18 min max modulalation modulation qpsk 1 4 0 5 qpsk 4 1 O qpsk 1 4 0 5 qpsk 1 4 0 qpsk 1 4 0 5 qpsk 1 4 0 qpsk 2 2 0 5 qpsk 4 1 0 qpsk 1 4 0 5 qpsk 4 1 0 using the Web EMS click Bridge on the WEB EMS Main screen and click the Statistics uo Ui uo QU valid unknown unknown unknown unknown unknown section Statistics Current History i m Drop PKs ElapsedTime 13 jethO jo jo 0 0000 00 58 16 4 14 jethO Jo jo 0 0000 00 58 16 jeth1 jo 2454 J0 0000 00 58 20 11 eth1 Jo I0 0 0000 00 58 16 12 jeth1 jo LU 0 0000 00 58 16 13 eth1 jo I0 jo 0000 00 58 16 14 jeth1 jo jo 0000 00 58 16 jeth2 10 471 0 10000 00 58 20 v Figure 8 8 Current VLAN Statistics Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual Clear 143 Monitoring the System Chapter 8 Viewing Queue Statistics You can use the Web EMS or CLI to display statistics for outgoing queues and incoming queues Viewing Outgoing Queue Statistics Use the following command to display statistics for outgoing queues show out queue eth0 ethl eth2 rf all 1 8 all statistics Counters of all outgoing queues appear as follows Default gt gt show out queue ethl all statistics
7. For instructions how to configure a link using the Web EMS refer to Performing Basic Configuration Using the Web EMS on page 38 For instructions on performing advanced configuration such as network configuration synchronization OAM and other advanced configuration tasks refer to Performing Advanced Configuration on page 87 This chapter includes the following topics Note Establishing a CLI Session with the ODU Saving Configuration Changes and Resetting the System Using the CLI Configuring and Displaying Basic System Information Using the CLI Configuring System IP Addresses Using the CLI Configuring Radio Parameters Using the CLI Configuring Ethernet Interfaces Using the CLI Default VLAN Setting Before you perform basic configuration on the ODU you must ensure that the ODU is set to either Adaptive or Static mode The RF LED color indicator on a network ready ODU is green Refer to Step 2 in Performing Initial System Setup on page 36 Netronics NetPoint Pro Family System Manual 52 Performing Basic Configuration Using the CLI Chapter 4 Establishing a CLI Session with the ODU 1 Run a standard SSH client You can use a common open source SSH client program such as PuTTY available for download from the web 2 Enter the ODU s default IP address 192 168 0 1 the default Mask is 255 255 255 0 and open the connection 3 Login with the following criteria User admin Password admin When a successful c
8. CLI gt set bridge c4 vlan ethertype 0x8111 Set done bridge c4 CLI gt show bridge all vlan ethertype bridge s1 vlan ethertype 0x88a8 bridge cl vlan ethertype 0x8100 bridge c2 vlan ethertype 0x8100 bridge c3 vlan ethertype 0x8100 bridge c4 vlan ethertype Ox8111 bridge c5 vlan ethertype 0x8100 bridge c6 vlan ethertype 0x8100 FDB Address Table The FDB Address table contains information about unicast entries for which the device has forwarding and or filtering information This information is used by the transparent bridging function when determining how to propagate a received frame Use the following command to create and modify entries in the FDB Address table set fdb table s1 lt fdb id list gt lt mac addr gt port lt bridge port gt If the FDB Address table entry does not already exist the set db table command creates it and assigns the attributes specified Upon creation in the event that an attribute is not explicitly specified the entry is created with the default value for that attribute If the entry already exists then the set db table command replaces the attributes that are currently defined for the entry with those specified in the command Note that the set db table command fails if its port already exists in the FDB with self as the assigned status Use the following command to display FDB Address table entries show fdb table s1 all lt fdb id list gt all lt mac addr gt
9. If the IP entry already exists the set ip command replaces the attributes that are currently defined for the entry with the values specified in the command Up to four IP addresses can be specified on the command line Aset ip command fails if the route specified is not within the subnet that has been defined by mask m If you change the default IP address your connection to the ODU is lost To re establish a connection launch an Internet browser and connect using the new IP Note address To display all of the currently configured IP addresses and their attributes use the show ip command For example NetBeam 1G NetBeam M7 Systems Local Site show ip ip 1 ip addr 192 168 0 11 ip 1 prefix len 24 ip 1 vlan 0 For example NetBeam 2G Systems Local Site show ip ip 1 ip addr static 192 168 0 11 ip 1 prefix len 24 ip 1 vlan 0 ip 1 default gateway 192 168 0 254 To delete IP entries usethe clear ip command clear ip index To create and modify an IP Route and Default Gateway usethe set route command set route lt idx gt dest lt ip address gt prefix len 0 32 next hop lt ip address gt idx number 1 to 10 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 55 Performing Basic Configuration Using the CLI Chapter 4 dest ip address in the form X X X X where X is a decimal number from 0 to 255 for example 10 0 15 74 next hop ip address in the form X X X X where X is a decimal num
10. Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 8 a ssEEEE 177 Performing System Administration Chapter 9 Displaying Scripts To display scripts using the Web EMS 1 In the Web EMS Main screen click Advanced Setup The Advanced Setup screen is displayed 2 Click the Scripts section of the Advanced Setup screen Scripts A erp none txt cfm clear all settings txt erp clear settings bxt Run Figure 9 21 Web EMS Advanced Setup Screen Scripts Section 3 Click Add The Add VLAN window is displayed Running Scripts 1 Click the Scripts section of the Advanced Setup screen 2 Highlight the script and select Run The ODU will run the specified script Adding Scripts You can write scripts in a text file and then copy them to the system The script must consist of valid CLI commands To include comments in the script type at the beginning of the line The following is an example of a command line script Demo Script This script sets the ODU to static mode saves the configuration and resets the system set rf mode static qpsk 4 1 0 5 copy running configuration startup configuration reset system To add the script text file to the system use an FTP SFTP or TFTP server to transfer the file to the scripts directory under flash 1ash scripts The following example transfers the script D txt to the system Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 178 Performing
11. RC tx idle Transmit LTM Status Itm tx status A Boolean flag set to True by the Bridge Port to indicate that another LTM may be transmitted Reset to False by the MEP Linktrace Initiator State Machine Setting the status to True tx pending initiates LTM sending Only one message is sent after which the value automatically changes to False tx idle Note that if the Number of LTM to Transmit is zero the status immediately turns to False tx idle 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 1 1 36 dotlagCfmMep TransmitLtmStatus tx pending tx idle RC tx idle Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 257 Using the NetBeam CLI Fault Notification Generator State fng state MEP MAC Address mac Highest Priority Defect high defect MEP Defects defects CCM Sequence Errors ccm seq errors CCM Transmit Counter ccm tx LBM Transmit Result Ibm tx result Table 12 29 Read Only MEP Attributes Attribute CLI Description SNMP Object ID Syntax Attribute Name The current state of the MEP Fault Notification Generator state machine See 802 1ag clauses 12 14 7 1 3 f and 20 35 MAC address of the MEP The highest priority defect that has been present since the MEPs Fault notification Generator State Machine was last in the reset state A vector of Boolean error conditions from IEEE 802 1ag Table 20 1 any of which may be true A MEP can detect and repo
12. SNMP V3 Users A User Auth Protocol Privacy Protocol Engine ID Local yairt no jno 0x80001f18880409605b9 yes yair2 md5 no 0x80001f888045960b9 yes yair3 md5 des 0x80001f8880409605b9 yes yair4 md5 jdes 0x8000118880459605b9 yes yair5 sha no 0x80001f888045960b9 yes Add Figure 9 29 Web EMS System Screen SNMP Users Section Tacacs Radius RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service and TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System are AAA mechanisms Authentication Identification of requester profile username password and privilege level on a per request basis Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 191 Performing System Administration Chapter 9 Authorization Permission denial of access to a subset of commands subject to authentication success failure The mechanisms of Authorization and authentication are independent of each other Accounting Reporting of information on requesters identities number of access attempts per requester start and stop times executed commands etc This version implements user authentication The NetBeam is a Network Access Server NAS for requesters AAA client passing requester information e g username password etc e The AAA Server is responsible for receiving the authentication requests e Communication between the NetBeam 1G and the AAA Server are permitted by shared secrets e Supporting user authentication wit
13. The interval used to determine the value for CINR expressed in milliseconds Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual Configurable RF Attributes Bu he 50000 80000 74000 adaptive static alignment 243 SNMP Object ID rfNumOfChannels 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 2 1 1 2 rfOperationalFrequen cy 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 2 1 1 4 rfRole 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 2 1 1 5 rfModeSelector 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 2 1 1 6 When static mode is specified additional sub parameters are used to define additional relevant operating characteristics as shown in Table 12 20 128 127 0 2000 rfCinrLow 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 2 1 1 13 rfCinrInterval 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 2 1 1 15 Using the NetBeam CLI Attribute CLI Attribute Name RSSI Interval rssi interval RX Link ID rx link id TX Link ID tx link id Transmit Asymmetry tx asymmetry Lowest Modulation Description The interval used to determine the value for RSSI expressed in milliseconds The RF receive link ID The RF transmit link ID SNMP Object ID rfRssilnterval 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 2 1 1 16 rfRxLinkld 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 2 1 1 22 rfTxLinkld 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 2 1 1 23 Percentage of the TX part in the airframe Chapter 12 50tx 50rx Varies Varies integer CLI syntax is 10tx 90rx 25tx 75rx 50tx 50rx 75tx 25rx 90tx 10rx Dropping below the Lowest Mode causes RF link fail
14. When using the show and clear commands the keyword a11 may be substituted for an indexed numerical range In this context all means the entire object range For example vlan allisidentical to vlan 1 4094 Multi Dimensional Objects with Indexes The CLI supports multi dimensional objects with numerical indexes If they appear then their indexes or lists of ranges of indexes are placed one after another and are separated by spaces The generic syntax is as follows object idx1 lt idx2 gt idx3 More specifically object 2 9 23 25 means the collection of double indexed objects 2 23 2 24 2 25 9 23 9 24 9 25 For show and clear commands you can use the word all instead of either index For example object 2 9 all Or object all 23 25 0r object all all Viewing the CLI Command History The NetBeam CLI maintains a history of the 100 most recent commands This is especially useful when recalling long complex or repetitive entries To recall commands from the history buffer you can press the following keys Table 12 6 Viewing CLI Command History Key press Result Up Arrow Recall commands in the history buffer beginning with the most recent command Press the key repeatedly to recall successively older commands Down Arrow Return to more recent commands in the history buffer after recalling one or more commands with the Up Arrow key Press the key repeatedly to recall success
15. Clear all statistics and logs Done C Done Configuration file saved and stored C Done Done Additional Info Remarks I amp C Details I amp C Date Installation team Commissioning team Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 67 NetBeam Networking Configuration This chapter presents the NetBeam bridge management model and describes the initial procedures for configuring the NetBeam network including e Provider Bridge e NetBeam Bridging Model e Configuring VLANs e Single Component Bridge Model e Configuring Bridge Ports e Configuring Provider Bridge and Advanced VLAN Settings Provider Bridge The IEEE 802 1ad Provider Bridge commonly known as QinQ or Provider Bridge extends the IEEE 802 1Q standard by providing for a second stack of VLANs in a bridged network The general purpose of Provider Bridge is to enable frames from multiple customers to be forwarded or tunneled through another topology provider network using service VLANs or S VLANs The provider bridge which may consist of multiple devices in the service provider domain looks like a simple bridge port to the customer s traffic and maintains the customer s VLANs Customer VLANs referred to as C VLANs by the IEEE 802 1ad specification are not used to make any forwarding decisions inside the provider network where customer frames get assigned to service VLANs S VLANs Inside the provider cl
16. Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 133 Performing Advanced Configuration Chapter 7 Right Master Right Master set ring 3 action acw ms Set done ring 3 Right Master show log Aug 4 21 43 18 sw cad local Manual switch at 200 CW unblocked ACW blocked Right Master set ring 3 action clear Set done ring 3 Right Master show log Aug 4 21 43 18 sw cad local Manual switch at 200 CW unblocked ACW blocked Aug 4 21 44 36 sw cad ERP 200is ready Role acw rpl ERP Timers Different timers are used to determine the time of fault reports and switching in order to assure only necessary switching for permanent failures Table 7 4 ERP Timers Hold off Timer for ensuring stability of failure before triggering action to avoid reporting a fault in case of intermittent failure 0 10000 mSec in 100mSec steps Guard Timer for protecting device against old R APS messages 10 2000 mSec in 10mSec steps Wait to Block Timer for delaying switching triggered by administrative command FS MS 5000 7000 mSec in 100mSec steps Wait to Timer for delaying revertive operation Restore 1 12 minutes ERP Configuration Example The following example illustrates an ERP configuration Left Master show ring Right Slave 72 show ring ring 1 ring id sd ring 1 ring id a ring 1 type ring ring 1 type ring Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 134 ring ring ring ring ring ring ring ring ring ring ring ring ring
17. all info port status Use the following command to delete FDB Address table entries and clear their associated Statistics Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 85 NetBeam Networking Configuration Chapter 6 clear fdb table sl all lt fdb id list gt all lt mac addr gt all Note that the delete fdb table command fails if its port exists in the FDB with se1 as the assigned status Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 86 Performing Advanced Configuration Configuring Quality of Service Quality of Service QoS mechanisms enable service providers to offer different classes of service for different types of traffic or customers QoS mechanisms are especially important in wireless links with adaptive capabilities because changing link conditions may require the system to drop some traffic according to a predetermined priority and scheduling scheme NetBeam has eight priority queues per interface Queues are accessed by Strict Priority or Weighted Fair Queuing WFQ and Shaper mechanisms QoS functions e Classifier COS and EVC e Metering CIR EIR CBS EBS e Ingress QOS Marking Green Yellow Red e Scheduler Strict Priority WFQ SP Shaper WFQ Shaper Netronics NetPoint Pro Family System Manual 87 Performing Advanced Configuration Chapter 7 QoS 192 168 0 1 Lx Figure 7 1 QoS Main Screen QoS Classification The NetBeam QoS Engine classifies the incom
18. ifConnectorPresent 1 3 6 1 2 1 31 1 1 1 17 ifAlias 1 3 6 1 2 1 31 1 1 1 18 294 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 Forwarding Data Base FDB Object Attributes Table 12 49 FDB Object Attributes Attribute CLI Description SNMP Object ID Value Acce Default Attribute ss Name Bridge The component identifier is ieee8021QbridgeFdb s1 forced N A s1 Component ID used to distinguish between Componentld the multiple virtual bridge 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 2 1 instances within a PBB In the 2 1 1 1 current product version the ids anindex to value of this object is equal to ieee8021QbridgeFdb s1 Table 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 2 1 2 1 FDB ID fdb id The identity of this Forwarding ieee8021QbridgeFdb 1 64 N A 1 Database The system Id maintains 64 permanent 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 2 1 instances of the FDB object 2 1 1 2 It is an index to ieee8021QbridgeFdb Table 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 2 1 2 1 Aging Time The timeout period in seconds ieee8021QbridgeFdb 10 1000000 RW 172800 aging for aging out dynamically AgingTime learned forwarding 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 2 1 information 2 1 1 5 It belongs to ieee8021QbridgeFdb Table 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 2 1 2 1 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 295 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 Attribute CLI Description SNMP Object ID Value Acce Default Attribute ss Name Learned Entry The total number of ieee8021Qbr
19. mac RC mac Type purposes of LTM transmission 1 1 40 mepid Itm dst type either the unicast destination dot1agCfmMepTransmi MAC address of the target MEP or tLtmTargetlsMepld the MEPID of the target MEP LTM Transmit The TTL field indicates the 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 0 250 RC 64 TTL Itm tx ttl number of hops remaining tothe 1 1 41 LTM Decremented by one by dotlagCfmMep each Linktrace Responder that TransmitLtmTtl handles the LTM The value returned in the LTR is one less than that received in the LTM If the LTM TTL is O or 1 the LTM is not forwarded to the next hop and if 0 no LTR is generated Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 256 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 Attribute CLI Attribute Name Description SNMP Object ID Syntax Access Default Transmit LBM Status Ibm tx status A Boolean flag set to True by the Bridge Port to indicate that another LBM may be transmitted Reset to False by the MEP Loopback Initiator State Machine Setting the status to True tx pending initiates LBM sending The number of LBM sent is defined by the Number of LBM to Transmit After transmitting the specified number of LBM the value automatically changes to False tx idle Note that if the Number of LBM to Transmit is zero the status immediately turns to False tx idle 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 1 1 26 dotlagCfmMep TransmitLbm Status tx pending tx idle
20. of the All Weather shell into the appropriate port Tighten the connector outlet portion securely by hand Do not use a wrench 2 Insert the RJ45 or SFP connector into the port 3 Screw the cable inlet portion 6 of the All Weather shell onto the secured top portion taking care not to twist the connecting cable 4 Tighten the bottom portion securely by hand The rubber gasket insert 8 tightens to create a moisture proof seal Do not use a wrench 5 Secure the network connection cable into place using a cable tie Ensure that there is sufficient play in the cabling to allow movement of the ODU during final alignment Aligning the Antenna The ODU antenna must be aligned on both local and remote ODUs You must first perform coarse alignment on each ODU followed by fine alignment Accurate alignment of the ODU is critical for achieving the strongest possible receive signal To perform antenna alignment the ODU must be in Alignment mode The ODU has three modes of operation e Alignment Carrier Wave transmission Used for antenna alignment e Adaptive Operational mode used with adaptive bandwidth code and modulation Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 33 Installing the NetBeam System Chapter 2 e Static Operational mode used with a fixed modulation profile ODUs are shipped from the factory in Adaptive mode Setting the ODU to Alignment Mode Switch the NetBeam ODUs to Alignment mode by inserting t
21. 00L010102130 28144 n e o somo 424060 a x00101010221 23993784 o snno nne a 2 2000 01 01 01 02 10 2990750 o 9 eow enous lj 2000010101020 29197532 o o o 63590 6128796 7 M 2000010101 0050 29450320 o o o 6eMAMO aes 1 200001 0161 02 40 27000548 g e o snowo 5810400 s MW 300001010101 0 307500 L o O so 4645500 i7 2000 01 0101 02 20 280974 LI o o 650 4099516 u M 000101010106 10091216 n o o nue 214404 Figure 9 20 History File Transfer Output Command Line Scripts 6006060000000060000000000000006000000000 Chapter 9 Query Results MG SOFT MO Come Piles icona SNA Eston Renge raters 162 168 1131 pot 181 transport PUOP Local wide 192108422 pon 40027 mensport POOR Pratocoi version SONA Y ayst pTena 0 tiraticks 0 days 098 26cm 00t OAA 20090 dAdmirSratus int doen integer copyStatsHistory 13 octet string 192 168 1 15 31 39 32 2E 31 36 octet string 123456 31 32 33 34 35 36 hex octet string noam 6 6F 61 6D hex lileSessionLocalParams octet string mo eth etho 6D 6F 3D 22 65 7 fileSessionRemotePath 1 octet string ETHOS zip 45 54 48 30 53 2E 7A 9097 SNMPv Last successful poll at 18 08 2013 14 32 50 wSNMPv 259 F 3 o o ns dm X0 X06 eps1405 Gp 1405 6 o o ET a X0 X0 epu1405 epx1405 s e o E am X6 Mo apu 1405 qasos 2 L amne am xo X6 p 1405 qp i1405 1 e o amo am Xo X0 ep1405 en 1405 4 o o am am 20 X0 epici405 ap 1405 a
22. C 49 131 F characteristic e Ingress Protection Rating IP67 Dimensions e 245cmx22 5cmx5 cm e 245cmx22 5 cm x7 cm e ODU Antenna 31cm Dia x Depth 31 e ODU Antenna 31cm Dia x Depth 31 cm x 13 cm x 11 cm cm pe e ODU antenna 31 cm 3 5 kg e ODU antenna 31 cm 4 kg Hx Wx D Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 17 Introduction to NetBeam System Chapter 1 Functional Description The NetBeam ODU consists of four main building blocks Antenna RFIC Baseband modem and Network processor CLK1 CLK2 E FLASH SDRAM Memory controller Peripherals Upconverter Modem amp Packet SYL PLL vco RXITX Proc RS m Switch Downconverter Control processor Ethernet MAC Packet Forwarding Ethernet MAC CLKI Network Processor RF Contoller se Baseband ASIC Figure 1 5 NetBeam M7 Functional Block Diagram Memory controller PLL VCO Peripherals Ethernet MAC 4 PLL VCO AS SFP i Ry Packet Forwarding Ethernet MAC 1 Downconverter Network Processor Modem amp Packet RF Controller Baseband ASIC Figure 1 6 NetBeam 2G Functional Block Diagram e RFIC Netronics integrated Silicon Germanium SiGe transceiver operating at 71 76 81 86 Ghz Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 18 Introduction to NetBeam System Chapter 1 e Modem B
23. ICMP echo request packets to the target host and waiting for an ICMP response In the process it measures the time from transmission to reception round trip time and records any packet loss The results of the test are printed in the form of a statistical summary of the response packets received including the minimum maximum and the mean round trip times You can run the ping command with various command line switches to enable special operational modes Example options include specifying the packet size used and automatic repeated operation for sending a specified count Ping Commands Ping Short ping five packets Ping t sending pings continuously until there is a command to stop it Ping l packet length 0 5000 gt Ping c number of packets to send 1 32000 CLI gt ping 192 168 0 15 PING 192 168 0 15 192 168 0 15 56 84 bytes of data 64 bytes from 192 168 0 15 icmp seq 1 ttl1 128 time 2 77 ms 64 bytes from 192 168 0 15 icmp seq 2 tt1 128 time 1 01 ms 64 bytes from 192 168 0 15 icmp seq 3 tt1 128 time 1 07 ms 64 bytes from 192 168 0 15 icmp seq 4 tt1 128 time 1 07 ms 64 bytes from 192 168 0 15 icmp seq 5 tt1 128 time 1 04 ms 192 168 0 15 ping statistics 5 packets transmitted 5 received 0 packet loss time 4000ms rtt min avg max mdev 1 019 1 398 2 776 0 689 ms O O OOO CLI gt ping ping c lt num packets 1 32000 gt t 1 lt packet length 0 5000 gt lt host gt
24. MEPID An integer that is unique for all 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 1 1 integer RC the MEPs in the same MA that 1 identifies a specific MA End Point dotlagCfmMepldentifier An entry cannot be created if a corresponding MEPID does not exist LTR SN Transaction identifier sequence 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 2 1 Integer N A number returned by a previous 1 dotiagCfmLtrSeq transmit linktrace message Number command indicating which LTM s response is going to be returned LTR Received TTL TTL field value for a returned LTR 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 2 1 0 250 RO rx ttl 3 dot1agCfmLtrTtl LTR Forwarded Indicates if an LTM was 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 2 1 forwarded RO Indicator forwarded by the responding MP 4 dotlagCfmLtrForwarded not Itr forward as returned in the FwdYes flag of forwarded the flags field LTR Relay Possible values the Relay action 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 2 1 hit fdb RO Indicator relay field can take 8 dotlagCfmLtrRelay mpdb action LTR Chassis ID This object specifies the format of 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 2 1 chassis comp RO Subtype the Chassis ID returned in the 9 dot1agCfmLtrChassisld if alias chassis id Sender ID TLV of the LTR if any Subtype port comp subtype mac net addr if name LTR Chassis ID The Chassis ID returned in the 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 2 1 Format in RO chassis id Sender ID TLV of the LTR if any 10 dot1agCfmLtrChassisld accordance The fo
25. Peer MEP Failed The time SysUpTime at 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 3 1 3 ddd hh mm ss RO OK Time which the peer MEP state dotlagCfmMepDbRMep wherein ddd failed ok time machine last entered either FailedOkTime decimal integer the Failed or OK state representing days it may include arbitrary number of digits hh two digit decimal integer representing hours of day 0 23 mm two digit decimal integer representing minutes of hour 0 59 ss two digit decimal integer representing seconds of minute 0 59 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 263 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 Attribute CLI Description SNMP Object ID Syntax Access Attribute Name Peer MEP MAC The MAC address of the 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 3 1 4 MAC address in RO Address mac remote MEP dotlagCfmMepDbMac the form NN Address NN NN NN NN NN where N is a hexadecimal number for example 00 AF DD 1E 2D A3 Remote Defect State of the RDI bit in the 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 3 1 5 on off RO Indication rdi last received CCM On dot1agCfmMepDbRdi corresponds to True Peer Port Status An enumerated value of the 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 3 1 6 none RO port status Port status TLV received in dotlagCfmMepDbPortStatusTlv blocked up the last CCM from the remote MEP or the default value psNoPortStateTLV indicating either no CCM has been received or that no port status TLV was recei
26. Status Displays the operational status of the port up or down Auto Negotiation Determines whether or not auto negotiation is enabled enabled or disabled disabled The default value is enabled Ethernet Type When Auto Negotiation is disabled select the port s speed manually in this field 10 100 1000 HF FD When using the SFP physical port set this field to 1000xfd The default value for the Electrical RJ45 ports is 1000fd 1000 Full Duplex negotiation Ethernet Actual Type Displays the port s actual speed duplex after Auto negotiation and Ethernet Speed Duplex in case Auto neg disabled ae must be identical on the ODU port and the end equipment port Loopback Mode Interface screen only Options are Disabled Internal Internal mac swap External and External mac swap Loopback Timeout Interface screen only The loopback timeout in seconds in case of Eth or Radio link failure port shutdown Alarm Propagation Interface screen only Used to define system behavior o Backward Eth port down in case radio link down or Eth port down at the remote o Forward notification is sent to the remote in case Eth port link down o Both Directions Eth port down in case of both radio and Eth link down on the port 2 Click Apply Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual Alarm Supression suppress mask alarm on port alarm will not be active 49 Perfor
27. indicates that no blocked vid Reply Egress TLV was returned in the LTM LTR Egress MAC MAC address returned in the 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 2 1 MAC Address RO Address egr mac ingress MAC address field If the 18 NN NN NN dotliagCfmLtringress object dotlagCfmLtrEgressMac NN NN NN contains the value ergNoTlv 0 where Nisa then the contents of this object hexadecimal are meaningless number for example 00 AF DD 1E 2D A3 the rest hexadecimal string LTR Egress Port ID Format of the Egress Port ID If 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 2 1 if alias RO Subtype the dotlagCfmLtrEgress object 19 port comp egr port id contains the value ergNoTlv 0 dotlagCfmLtrEgressPortldS mac net subtype then the contents of this object ubtype addr if are meaningless name agent circuit id local LTR Ingress Port ID Egress Port ID The format of this 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 2 1 Format in RO egr port id object is determined by the value 20 accordance of the dotlagCfmLtrEgressPortld with LTR dot1agCfmLltrEgressPortldSubtyp Chassis ID e object If the Subtype A dotliagCfmLtrEgress object hexadecimal contains the value ergNoTlv 0 string is used then the contents of this object if no format is are meaningless known LTR Terminal MEP A boolean value stating whether 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 2 1 on off RO Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 268 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapt
28. interface qid tx drop elapsed time ethl 1 1321 3 0001 02 15 09 eth1 2 1543 1 0001 02 15 09 eth1 3 1435 0 0001 02 15 09 eth1 4 2345 0 0001 02 15 09 eth1 5 4563 0 0001 02 15 09 eth1 6 4563 0 0001 02 15 09 eth1 7 6547 9 0001 02 15 09 eth1 8 1256 0 0001 02 15 09 Out Queue Statistics A Interface Elapsed Time ethO 0 408 0 0000 00 30 3 etho 1 0 0 0000 00 30 35 eth0 2 0 0 0000 00 30 35 eth 3 0 0 0000 00 30 35 etho 4 0 0 0000 00 30 35 etho 5 0 0 0000 00 30 35 etho 6 0 0 0000 00 30 35 etho 7 1 0 0000 00 30 35 eth1 0 408 0 0000 00 30 35 eth1 1 0 0 0000 00 30 35 eth1 2 0 0 0000 00 30 35 eth1 3 0 0 0000 00 30 35 eth1 4 0 0 0000 00 30 35 eth1 5 0 0 0000 00 30 35 eth1 6 0 0 0000 00 30 35 Figure 8 9 Ingress COS Setup Note that for r there are only four queues Therefore only numbers from 1 to 4 or all are valid for the second ID If all is specified only four queues are displayed Use the following command to clear the outgoing queue statistics Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 144 Monitoring the System Chapter 8 clear out queue eth0 ethl eth2 rf all 1 8 all statistics Table 8 1 Outgoing Queue Statistics wwe oeren Sm Interface Name ethO eth1 eth2 rf all Tx Frame Counter The counter of the per Q tx 0 264 transmitted frames Drop Frame Counter The counter of the per Q drop 0 264 dro
29. or 64 256bits hexadecimal digits Encryption Encryption static key Static Key 92E3C28020570998E74B41 CO6A58BB40 Auth String Figure 9 1 Encryption Screen Working with Configuration Files The NetBeam system supports the use of stored network configurations Generally a stored configuration is automatically loaded on system startup or following a system reset Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 151 Performing System Administration Chapter 9 Saving Configurations A stored configuration is created by saving the currently active running configuration as the default configuration The running configuration NetBeam is not automatically saved in non volatile RAM If a system reset occurs before a particular configuration is saved the NetBeam Note performs a startup using the current stored configuration or if none exists the factory default configuration To save the running configuration use the following CLI command or click Save Configuration on the Web EMS main screen Default gt gt copy running configuration startup configuration running configuration copied to startup configuration Viewing Configurations You can display either the running or the default NetBeam network configuration with the following command Default gt copy running configuration display Default gt copy startup configuration display Restoring the Default Configuration In order to restore th
30. ring ring ring ring ring ring ring ring ring ring ring ring ring ring ring HH HHHHHGHH Ha BGB HB Dp p HB HB HB H H H HH BH PPP Performing Advanced Configuration fdb id role cw port acw port raps md level raps svid raps cvid version revertive hold off timer guard timer wtb timer wtr timer cw status data acw status data cw status raps acw status raps state last state time idle percent protect percent ms percent fs percent pending percent cw node id cw bpr acw node id acw bpr 1 none ethi ethO 7 none 100 v2 yes 0 500 5500 1 unblocked unblocked unblocked unblocked idle 2011 07 05 97 731606 1 249336 0 000000 0 000000 1 019058 00 00 00 0 00 24 a4 0 ring ring ring ring ring ring ring ring ring ring ring ring ring ring ring ring ring ring ring ring ring ring ring ring ring ring ring ring HH HHHHHGH HH BG PPP PP PPP H H H BH H H PPP fdb id role cw port acw port raps md level raps svid raps cvid version revertive hold off time guard timer wtb timer wtr timer cw status data acw status data cw status raps acw status raps state last state time idle percent protect percent ms percent fs percent pending percent cw node id cw bpr acw node id acw bpr The following example illustrates how to configure ERP on a ring Left Slave ring configuring Chapter 7 1 acw rpl ethO ethl 7 none 100 v2 yes 0 5
31. set classifier cos 1 interface host eth2 precedence 1 vid 0 4094 pcp 0 7 ip cos dont care cos 7 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual Performing Advanced Configuration Chapter 7 Classifier Cos settings example for priority based on PCP pBits on Eth1 EthO with management priority for traffic from ports Host Eth2 f classifier cos configuring set classifier cos 1 interface host eth2 precedence 1 vid 0 4094 pcp 0 7 ip cos dont care cos 7 set classifier cos 2 interface eth0 ethl precedence 1 vid 0 4094 pcp 0 ip cos dont care cos 0 set classifier cos 3 interface eth0 ethl precedence 1 vid 0 4094 pcp 1 ip cos dont care cos 1 set classifier cos 4 interface eth0 ethl precedence 1 vid 0 4094 pcp 2 ip cos dont care cos 2 set classifier cos 5 interface eth0 ethl precedence 1 vid 0 4094 pcp 3 ip cos dont care cos 3 set classifier cos 6 interface eth0 ethl precedence 1 vid 0 4094 pcp 4 ip cos dont care cos 4 set classifier cos 7 interface eth0 ethl precedence 1 vid 0 4094 pcp 5 ip cos dont care cos 5 set classifier cos 8 interface eth0 ethl precedence 1 vid 0 4094 pcp 6 ip cos dont care cos 6 set classifier cos 9 interface eth0 ethl precedence 1 vid 0 4094 pcp 7 ip cos dont care cos 7 AO QoS 192 168 0 1 3 Interface Precedense IP COS host eth0 eth1 e dont care host eth0 eth1 e dont care host eth0 eth1 e dont care host ethO eth1 e dont care host ethO eth 1 e dont care
32. untag cep lt value gt untag pep lt value gt lt component id gt c1 c2 c3 c4 c5 c6 s1 lt bridge port list gt list host ethO eth1 eth2 eth3 eth4 lt cvid gt novlan undef integer 1 4094 e cvlan reg An element of the C VID registration table that contains the mapping between a C VID and the S VID which carries the service and determines the handling of untagged frames at the PEP and CEP e Untagged CEP A flag indicating if a C VID should be carried untagged at the Customer Edge Port Yes means untagged e Untagged PEP A flag indicating if a C VID should be carried untagged at the Provider Edge Port Yes means untagged Configuring Bridge Ports Configuring Bridge Ports Using the Web EMS To configure ports using the Web EMS 1 In the Web EMS Main screen click Bridge The Bridge screen is displayed Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 77 NetBeam Networking Configuration Chapter 6 2 Click the Bridge Ports section of the Bridge Ports screen Default Prio Admit Ingress Filt 1 0 all disabled 1 0 all disabled 1 0 all disabled 1 0 all disabled 1 0 all disabled 1 0 all disabled 1 0 all disabled 1 0 all disabled vj Figure 6 7 Web EMS Bridge Screen Bridge Ports Section 3 To edit a port and change its PVID click Edit The Change Port window is displayed crag ot mm PVID Default
33. 1 Double click the filesessionRemotePath row 2 Enter the following settings e Remote SNMP Agent The IP address of the ODU connected to the MIB Browser e OID to set x x x x x 1 as the next object in table e Value to set The file name where the stats are collected to 3 Click OK E Multiple Variable Bindings 192 168 1 131 filesessioncommand 1 2J m x CO EGH S29 Set 7 192 168 1 131 Er Log eG filesessionCommand 1 integer copyStatsHistory 13 fileSessionServer 1 octet string 192 168 1 15 31 39 32 2E 31 36 fileSessionPassword 1 octet string 123456 31 32 33 34 35 36 hex fileSessionUser 1 octet string noam 6E 6F 61 6D hex fileSessionLocalParams 1 octet string mo eth ethO 6D 6F 3D 22 65 7 fileSessionRemotePath 1 octet string ETHOS zip 45 54 48 30 53 2E 7A fileSessionRowStatus 1 integer createAndGo 4 a Select fileSessionServer 1 0x Remote SNMP Agent Ea 192 168 1 131 AB Cancel OID to Set 0007 WSNM 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 18 1 5 1 J a B Value to Set 192 168 1 15 2 Syntax nteger32 Timeticks Counter64 Ulnteger32 IP address Opaque C Counter32 OID Nsapaddr C Gauge32 Octets Bits OOO SNMPv Figure 9 17 filesessionRemotePath Settings Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 175 Performing System Administration Chapter 9 To enter fileSessionRowStatus settings 1 Double click the fileS
34. 1 e P Address Static 192 168 0 17 e Prefix Length 24 e VLAN O ODU config Static Route screen e Index 1 e Destination 0 0 0 0 e Prefix Length 0 e Next Hop 192 168 0 254 Configuring Radio Parameters Using the Web EMS You can configure radio parameters in the Radio section of the Quick Configuration screen or by clicking Radio on the Web EMS Main screen and going to the Radio section of the Radio screen To configure radio parameters using the Web EMS 1 Onthe Web EMS Main screen click Radio 2 Onthe Radio screen enter the appropriate information in the following fields Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 44 Performing Basic Configuration Using the Web EMS Radio Frequency MHz Channel Width MHz Role Role Status Transmit Asymmetry Tx Link ID Rx Link ID Tx Power dBm Tx Mute Tx Mute Timeout sec Oper Status Tx State Rx State 74375 500 auto slave 50be 50rc lo 5 disable 60 up normal normal Mode Alignment Status Modulation Sub Channels Repetitions FEC Rate Loopback Loopback Timeout sec Long Range Mode RSSI dBm CINR dB Chapter 3 A adaptive X inactive disabled x 60 false v 37 21 Figure 3 8 Web EMS System Screen Radio Section NetBeam 1G NetBeam M7 Radio Oper Sta
35. 1 1 1 lbm tx num 10 set cfm mep 1 1 1 lbm tx status tx pending Enter the following commands on the customer level set cfm mep 2 2 lbm dst type mepid set cfm mep 2 2 lbm dst mepid 2 set cfm mep 2 2 lbm tx num 10 set cfm mep 2 2 lbm tx status tx pending To view the loopback reply you must first verify the number for Ibr in order You can then transmit the loopback packets using the following command set cfm mep 1 1 1 lbm tx status tx pending Re check the number for Ibr in order to verify that all packets were received show cfm mep cfm mep 1 1 1 interface ethO cfm mep 1 1 1 dir down cfm mep 1 1 1 vlan none cfm mep 1 1 1 admin state active cfm mep 1 1 1 cci enabled cfm mep 1 1 1 msg prio 0 cfm mep 1 1 1 low defect mac rem err xcon cfm mep 1 1 1 alarm time 250 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 113 Performing Advanced Configuration cfm mep 1 1 1 reset time cfm mep 1 1 1 lbm dst mac cfm mep 1 1 1 lbm dst mepid cfm mep 1 1 1 lbm dst type cfm mep 1 1 1 lbm tx num cfm mep 1 1 1 lbm tx data len cfm mep 1 1 1 lbm tx prio cfm mep 1 1 1 lbm tx drop cfm mep 1 1 1 ltm dst mac cfm mep 1 1 1 ltm dst mepid cfm mep 1 1 1 ltm dst type cfm mep 1 1 1 ltm tx ttl cfm mep 1 1 1 lbm tx status cfm mep 1 1 1 ltm tx status cfm mep 1 1 1 fng state cfm mep 1 1 1 mac cfm mep 1 1 1 high defect cfm mep 1 1 1 defects cfm mep 1 1 1 ccm seq errors cfm mep 1 1 1 ccm tx cfm mep 1 1 1 lbm tx r
36. 1 2 02 03 2011 14 59 32 demo txt 2 1035 23 02 2011 09 35 11 finallog 3 6122 24 02 2011 11 06 32 rf ini 4 8 12 02 2011 21 20 43 rftype cfg 5 5613 02 03 2011 08 51 19 startup configuration txt 6 566 02 03 2011 08 51 19 startup debug configuration txt 7 5688 02 03 2011 16 51 45 scripts clear statistics 8 2121 25 02 2011 08 50 24 scripts qos dscp 9 2117 24 02 2011 21 07 14 scripts qos pcp 10 2078 13 03 2011 09 42 39 scripts qos vid 11 5688 02 03 2011 16 51 45 scripts clear statistics 12 373 21 03 2011 17 29 05 scripts system info History File Transfer Data is transferred between the Manager and Network elements through a FTP SFTP or TFTP server This server is controlled by an SNMP mechanism which covers a group of commands using a FTP SFTP or TFTP protocol to affect the transfer and SNMP to activate and monitor the transfer Some data files such as scripts and logs are stored on the Ne internal database Other data types are stored in temporary files generated from statistics history gathering requests and are sent with a remote name specified by the Manager At this point the temporary file is deleted from the system This feature is supported on NetBeam 2G system only SNMP Request Process The SNMP Request begins with the manager who sends the request containing all the parameters needed to start an FTP SFTP or TFTP session to the NE Network Element The NE then checks the data in the request and sends a SNMP response and pre
37. 15 31 39 32 2E 31 36 fileSessionPassword 1 octet string 123456 31 32 33 34 35 36 hex fileSessionUser 1 octet string noam 6E 6F 61 6D hex fileSessionLocalParams 1 octet string mo eth ethO 6D 6F 3D 22 65 7 fileSessionRemotePath 1 octet string ETHOS zip 45 54 48 30 53 2E 7A fileSessionRowStatus 1 integer createAndGo 4 Select fileSessionPassword 1 Remote SNMP Agent 192 168 1 131 JR OID to Set 0097 ws 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 18 1 7 1 i95 value to Set 123456 4 Syntax Integer32 Timeticks Counter64 Ulnteger32 IP address Opaque Counter32 OID Nsapaddr Gauge32 Octets Bits O00 SNMPv Figure 9 12 filesessionCommand Settings Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 170 Performing System Administration Chapter 9 To enter fileSessionServer settings 1 Double click the fileSessionServer row 2 Enter the following settings e Remote SNMP Agent The IP address of the ODU connected to the MIB Browser e OID to set x x X X x 1 as the next object in table e Value to set The IP address of the FTP SFTP or TFTP server 3 Click OK b Multiple Variable Bindings 192 168 1 131 fileSessionCommand 1 O X CO PBALRO o Set 192 168 1 131 Ja fr Log ce Mme om ewe fileSessionCommand 1 copyStatsHistory 13 fileSessionServer 1 octet string 192 168
38. 290 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 Attribute CLI Description SNMP Object ID Attribute Name Relay S VID The translated S VID delivered ieee8021PbVid relay svid received over the EISS from a TranslationRelayVid CNP or PNP 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 5 The VID must be defined in the 1 1 1 2 VLAN Table Table 12 44 and the Bridge Port specified in the command must belong to the S component Because VID translation is bidirectional two entries cannot use the same Relay S VID for the same port Figure 12 3 shows the bidirectional relationships for Relay S VID XLAT Entry Port PN Local S VID X Relay S VID Y SVID Y A SVID X eS XLAT of e Port Pn s SVID Y 2 SMID X E Outgoing Traffic Incoming Traffic Figure 12 3 Bidirectional Definitions of S VID Translation Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 291 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 SNMP ifTable Attributes Table 12 48 SNMP ifTable Attributes Attribute CLI Attribute Name i a MTU Size MAC Address Administrative Status Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual Description A text string containing information about the interface This string should include the name of the manufacturer the product name and the version of the interface hardware software The type of interface Additional values for ifType are assigned by the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority IANA through updating the
39. 71 76 GHz 71 76 81 86 GHz MEM QPSK QAM16 QAM64 QPSK QAM16 Schemes ABCM QPSK QAM16 QAM64 Up to 1000Mbps System throughput 700Mbps Up to 1000Mbps half duplex half duplex full duplex Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 16 Introduction to NetBeam System Chapter 1 4xGE 2xCopper 2xFiber ports Traffic Interfaces 2 x GE combo copper and fiber ports IxCopper 3xFiber ports Integrated 1ft 26cm 42dBi antenna gain Integrated 1ft 31cm 43dBi antenna gain External 2ft 65cm 50dBi antenna gain Integrated 1ft 31cm 43dBi antenna gain External 2ft 65cm 50dBi antenna gain Power specifications PoE IEEE 802 3at Wide voltage interface 22 60VDC VLAN VLAN stacking QinQ IEEE 802 1ad Provider Bridge IEEE 802 1d Transparent Bridging Carrier Ethernet MAC learning inside Link state propagation Jumbo frames Traffic management 802 1p DSCP amp MPLS EXP Scheduler Shaping Policing Synchronous e 1588 TC Synchronous Ethernet ITU T G 8261 8262 8264 Synchronization Ethernet ITU T G 8261 8262 826 4 MEF compliant MEF services compliant MEF 9 14 and 21 complaint 1 AES 128 bit and 256 bit e Eth OAM IEEE802 1ag Y 1731 e Eth OAM IEEE802 1ag Y 1731 IEEE802 3ah IEEE802 3ah G 8032 ERPS e G 8032 ERPS e Out of band Inband management Embedded WEB GUI SNMPv2 3 e ETSI EN 302 217 4 CE marked EMC safety Environmental Advanced L2 features e Operating Temperature 45 55
40. CCM that 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 RO CCM last xcon ccm triggered an DefErrorCCM fault 8 1 7 1 1 16 dotlagCfmMepXc onCcmLastFailure Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 Peer MEP Object Attributes Table 12 31 Peer MEP Attributes Attribute CLI Description SNMP Object ID Syntax Attribute Name Access MD Index Value to be used as the index of dotlagCfmMdIndex Integer the MA table entries for the MD 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 5 2 1 1 when the management entity wants to create a new entry in that table An entry cannot be created if a corresponding MD Index does not exist N A MA Index Index of the MA table dotlagCfmMalndex dotlagCfmMdMaNextIndex 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 6 1 1 1 which needs to be inspected to find an available index for row creation An entry cannot be created if a corresponding MA Index does not exist N A Peer MEPID Integer identifying a specific Peer dotlagCfmMaMepListidentifier 1 8191 MA End Point 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 6 3 1 1 N A Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 261 Using the NetBeam CLI Peer MEP Database Attributes Table 12 32 Peer MEP Database Attributes Chapter 12 Attribute CLI Attribute Name Description SNMP Object ID Syntax Access MD Index Value to be used as the index of the MA table entries for the MD when the management entity wants to cre
41. CoS 5 8 60 4 60 WFQ CoS 4 6 57 1 5 60 WFQ CoS 3 4 38 1 6 60 WFQ CoS 2 2 19 0 7 60 WFQ CoS 1 1 9 5 8 60 BE CoS 0 0 0 Total 480 In this example the introduced load exceeds the radio link rate 480 gt 320 Mbps The two highest queues Strict Priority 6 and 7 take precedence over WFQ queues The remaining bandwidth 320 60 60 200 Mbps is split among the weighted queues 1 5 The lowest queue Best Effort 0 gets no bandwidth The following is an example of WFQ configuration Scheduler mode configuration set scheduler mode wfq egress qos configuring set set set set set egress qos egress qos egress qos egress qos egress qos Egress QoS ose BION ale Teo ethO 1 eth0 eth0 eth0 eth0 0 AUN Weight ejeieieieiss lelereisio eje Figure 7 8 WFQ Shaper Setup CIR Mode strict priority strict priority strict priority strict priority strict priority sstrict priority strict priority strict priority jstrict priority Strict priority strictprionity sstrict priority strict priority sstrict priority strict priority Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual color drop blind color drop blind color drop blind color drop blind color drop blind Color Drop blind blind blind bling blind blind blind blind blind blind bling blind blind blind aware Edit weight weight weight weight weight OorrND F cir cir cir
42. ID Egress Set Untagged Set History disable Figure 6 5 Add VLAN Window 4 Configure the following VLAN attributes for the required components VID C VLAN Identifier This can be any number from 1 to 4094 which identifies a particular C VLAN or the special value undef which identifies configuration relevant for all VLANs that are not explicitly defined in the VLAN table To edit an existing VLAN enter the VID of the VLAN you want to edit FDB ID Enter 1 For S VLANs in Provider Bridge configuration up to 64 FDBs are available for different S VLANs Egress Set A frame which belongs to a VLAN identified by vid can enter the bridge through any port but can only leave through the ports that are included in the egress set Host management EthO radio Eth1 ODU port 1 Eth2 ODU port 2 Untagged Set A subset of the egress set If a port is a member of the untagged set and a frame leaves the bridge through this port the C Tag is removed untagged To leave the VLAN tagged when transmitted on all ports in the egress set enter none History If you want the ODU to collect statistics for this VLAN select enable Otherwise select disable 5 Click Apply to close the Add VLAN window 6 Click Apply to implement the changes and close the Bridge screen Configuring VLANs Using the CLI Creating and Modifying VLANs VLAN definitions are stored i
43. ID Syntax Attribute Name Component The bridge component ieee8021Cfm compone N A within the system to which Ma nt the information in this Componentld comp id dot1agCfmMaCompEntry 1 3 111 2 802 list applies The component 1 1 8 1 6 4 1 1 must be defined in the Bridge component table Table 12 38 MD Index Value to be used as the index dotlagCfmMdlInde Integer N A of the MA table entries for the x MD when the management 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 entity wants to create a new 8 1 5 2 1 1 entry in that table Entering the MD Index for a Component MA enables use of the common command structure MA Index Index of the MA table dotlagCfmMalnde N A dot1agcfmMdMaNextIndex X which needs to be inspected to 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 find an available index for row 8 1 6 1 1 1 creation An MA Index entry cannot be deleted if it is used as the key in MA MEP Received CCM Presentation Peer MEP Create or LTR DB Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 250 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 Attribute CLI Description SNMP Object ID Syntax Attribute Name Service Selector vlan MHF Creation mhf creation MHF ID Permission mhf permission Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual Service Selector identifier to which the MP is attached or O if none The type of the Service Selector is defined by the value of ieee8021CfmMaCompPrimaryS electorType In the current implementation the type is always VLAN ID Thus t
44. Integer N A MA Index Index of the MA table dot1agcfmMdMaNextIndex which needs to be inspected to find an available index for row creation An MA Index entry cannot be deleted if it is used as the key in MA MEP Received CCM Presentation Peer MEP Create or LTR DB dotlagCfmMalndex 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 6 1 1 1 N A MEPID An integer that is unique for all the MEPs in the same MA that identifies a specific MA End Point Adding an entry with a specific MEPID creates associated entries in the Peer MEP DB Similarly deleting a specific MEPID entry causes deletion of association entries in the Peer MEP DB 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 1 1 1 dotlagCfmMep Identifier integer RC Interface interface The index of the interface either of a Bridge Port or an aggregated IEEE 802 1 link within a Bridge Port to which the MEP is attached The component associated with the MEP interface must exist in the Component MA Table In addition only one MEP can be defined for the same combination of Interface Direction and 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 1 1 2 dotlagCfmMeplf Index fethO eth1 eth2 host RC eth1 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 252 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 Attribute CLI Attribute Name Description SNMP Object ID Syntax Access Default Primary VLAN Direction dir The direction in which the MEP
45. Manual 255 backup 1 11 11 disable none 200 active 2 2 disable none 255 active 11 11 disable none 100 down 15 14 enable none 126 Performing Advanced Configuration Chapter 7 Figure 7 24 illustrates a SyncE scenario in which there is a holdover situation due to line failure Because of the line failure the local NetBeam does not receive timing information from PRC The local NetBeam therefore switches to holdover mode maintains the timing information it received previously over Eth1 and distributes this information with its own ql ql 11 The remote NetBeam receives and is locked on its EthO source and distributes timing information from this source to its interfaces DNU Do Not use ql 15 is returned to the source in order to prevent timing loops NetBeam 1G Local NetBeam 1G Remote PRC Sync Module i holdover E GPS Cesium qi 11 e host GrandMaster PRC PRC ETH1 PHY holdover qii ETHORE DNU qi 15 holdover ETH2 PHY qii Figure 7 24 Typical SyncE Scenario Holdover Due to Line Failure The configuration for this scenario is Local NetBeam Default gt show ref clock ref clock host prio 255 ref clock host status active ref clock host ql actual 11 ref clock host ql config 11 ref clock host ql mode disable ref clock host ssm cvid none ref clock eth2 prio 200 ref clock eth2 status down ref clock eth2 ql actual 15 ref clock eth2 ql config 2 ref clock
46. NN NN NN NN NN NN addr used by this bridge when eBridgeAddress string were it must be referred toin 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 NN is a hexadecimal number for example 00 AF DD 1E 2D A3 a unique fashion It is 2 1 1 1 1 2 the address of the Host interface interface 1 The MAC base address is the same as the address of the Host interface 1 Component The number of ports ieee8021BridgeBas Integer RO Always 2 for C Number of Ports controlled by this eNumPorts 32 bit components num ports bridging entity 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 Always 4 for S 2 1 1 1 1 3 components This attribute is used as the index key to ieee8021BridgeBaseTable 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 2 1 1 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 279 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 Bridging Port Object Attributes Table 12 39 Bridging Port Object Attributes Attribute CLI Description SNMP Object ID Value Access Default Attribute Name Component ID The component ieee8021BridgeBaseP comp id N A N A identifier is used to ort list distinguish between Componentld Se mmi esa 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 2 1 bridge instances 1 4 1 1 within a PB Component identifiers must be defined in the Bridge Component table Table 12 38 Bridge Base Port The number of the port ieee8021BridgeBasePort host ethO eth1 N A N A for which this entry 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 2 1 1 4 eth2 s1 c2 c3 contains bridge 1 2 c4 managem
47. The Software Download window closes and the software is downloaded to the standby flash bank of the ODU 6 Once the software has been downloaded click Run SW in the Software screen The downloaded software version is activated Upgrading the ODU Software Using the CLI You can use the show sw command to display the active and standby software versions Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 156 Performing System Administration Chapter 9 NB2G1 gt show sw Flash Bank Version Running Scheduled to run startup config 1 5 0 0 9912 2013 08 27 12 06 30 no no exists 2 5 0 0 9931 2013 09 01 10 09 52 yes no exists NB2G1 gt The software version is followed by the creation date and time of the version The first digit of the version number represents the major version number the second digit represents the minor version number the third digit represents the SVN revision and the fourth digit represents the version build number To upgrade the software 1 Use the command copy sw lt from url gt to copy a specified software version to the ODU where rom url represents the URL of the FTP SFTP or TFTP server from which you are downloading the new software version The software version image is copied from the specified URL to the standby flash bank of the ODU Use the following command to automatically upgrade the software when a more recent version becomes available run sw immediate next rst lt accept timeout
48. Using the CLI Usethe show rf statistics command to display radio statistics using the CLI Statistics are gathered for 96 intervals of 15 minutes total 24 hours recording the minimum and maximum values per interval Local Site show rf statistics rf in octets 32535265564 rf in idle octets 29775780985 rf in good octets 9370230 rf in errored octets 0 rf out octets 30552267600 rf out idle octets 30531707551 rf in pkts 129957 rf in good pkts 129452 rf in errored pkts 0 rf in lost pkts 0 rf out pkts 231519 rf min cinr 13 rf max cinr 18 rf min rssi 56 rf max rssi 33 rf min modulation rf max modulation rf elapsed time qpsk 2 2 0 5 qpsk 4 1 0 5 0000 00 45 51 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 142 Monitoring the System Chapter 8 To clear the statistic counters using the CLI use the clear rf statistics command Viewing Radio Statistics Summary Using the CLI Usethe show rf statistics summary command to display a summary of radio statistics using the CLI Statistics are gathered for 96 intervals of 15 minutes total 24 hours recording the minimum and maximum values per interval Local Site show rf statistics summary 0 95 start 2011 2011 2011 2011 2011 A W N HP Oo Viewing VLAN Statistics You can display VLAN statistics using the Web EMS or the CLI To display VLAN statistics 03 03 03 03 03 17 17 17 17 17 10 22 10 07 09 52 09 37 09 22
49. Verification and Testing seen nnne nnne nnne 62 Physical Installation Verification sees 62 RF Link TeSt ETT 63 lnk Errors TeSt zie ceci terr a E beo deo e o Ee PER Eee Ue uS 63 Ethernet Services Test isi eecasesedeiesiei aiaiai EE 63 Management Verification eese eese tn nennen inen tn nnne ens na sinn sta nana 63 Recording ODU Configuration esses serene ntn ntn tnnt intente an 63 NetBeam Commissioning and Acceptance Form esses 64 Chapter 6 NetBeam Networking Configuration Provider Bagean ttr e p a NEUTER ISI AEA 68 NetBeam Bridging Modlel esses eene nente nnne nennt nnne sns nnne 69 Configuring VLANS etdr i aie eee de eaea E a RR HERE Fc DR Ret E ERE ER SUR eR R eld 70 Transparent Bridge Modle esses eese eene ennt nnne nnne nnn nennen 70 Configuring VLANs Using the Web EMS essere nennen 71 Configuring VLANs Using the CL sees seien enne nnns 72 Single Component Bridge Model esses ener nnne nnne 74 Model Implementation sess EER 74 VLAN Configuration ii unite ber HERE ee TE DE ERE ERE REEL REe 75 Configuring Bridge POrts ccceccsscscsssescessssscsssscsessssaecoessscseseeeecsseesesaaaeseeeeeecesseeseesaeeass 77 Configuring Bridge Ports Using the Web EMS sese 77 Configuring Bridge Ports Using the CLl cccsssssssss
50. all interfaces e The remote NetBeam receives timing information and is locked on PRC via EthO RF e DNU Do Not Use ql 15 is returned to the source in order to prevent timing loops NetBeam 1G Local NetBeam 1G Remote PRC qi 2 Sync Module GPS Cesium gt host qi 11 GrandMaster ETHO RF DNU ql 15 SyncE PRC qI 2 Figure 7 22 Typical SyncE Scenario The configuration for this scenario is Local NetBeam Default gt show ref clock ref clock host prio 255 ref clock host status backup 1 ref clock host ql actual 11 ref clock host ql config 11 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 124 Performing Advanced Configuration ref clock host ql mode ref clock host ssm cvid ref clock ethl prio ref clock eth1 status ref clock ethl ql actual ref clock ethl ql config ref clock eth1 ql mode ref clock ethl ssm cvid Remote NetBeam Default gt show ref clock ref clock host prio ref clock host status ref clock host ql actual ref clock host ql config ref clock host ql mode ref clock host ssm cvid ref clock eth0 prio ref clock eth0 status ref clock eth0 ql actual ref clock eth0 ql config ref clock eth0 ql mode ref clock eth0 ssm cvid Chapter 7 disable none 200 active 2 2 disable none 255 backup 1 11 11 disable none 100 active 2 14 enable none Figure 7 23 illustrates a SyncE scenario in which there is a holdover situation due to radio failure The local
51. are required by the designated government and regulatory agencies for purposes of safety and compliance General Do not install or operate this System in the presence of flammable gases or fumes Operating any electrical instrument in such an environment is a safety hazard European Commission This product has been designed to comply with CE markings in accordance with the requirements of European Directive 1995 5 EC This product has been designed to comply with the requirements of European Directives This equipment must be permanently earthed for protection and functional purposes To make a protective earth connection use the grounding point located on the System ODU using a minimum amount of 16AWG grounding cable or according to local electrical code This apparatus is intended to be accessible only to authorized personnel Failure to prevent access by unauthorized personnel will invalidate any approval given to this apparatus This product is in full compliance with the following standards e RF EN 302 217 3 1 3 1 EMC EN 301 489 4 Safety IEC 60950 Operation EN 300 019 1 4 Class 4 1E e Storage EN 300 019 1 1 Class 1 2 Transportation EN 300 019 1 2 Class 2 2 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 4 About this Document This document is the Installation and User Manual for the NetBeam family 71 76 81 86 GHz Wireless Link This includes the following e TDD family 71 76 Ghz 1G1 and 1G2 up to 1 Gbps M7
52. between the multiple virtual bridge instances within a PBB In the current product version the value of this object is equal to s1 The identity of this Forwarding Database The system maintains 64 permanent instances of the FDB Address Table object ieee8021QbridgeFdb Componentld 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 It is an index to ieee8021QbridgeTpFd b Table 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 4 1 2 2 and also to ieee8021QbridgeFdb Table 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 2 1 2 1 ieee8021QBridgeFdbl d 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 It is an index to ieee8021QbridgeTpFd b Table 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 4 1 2 2 and also to ieee8021QbridgeFdb Table 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 2 1 2 1 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual ae Bast osi s1 forced s1 297 Using the NetBeam CLI Attribute CLI Attribute Name FDB MAC Address addr FDB Port port Address Entry Status status Description The unicast MAC address for which the device has forwarding and or filtering information The bridge port from which the MAC address has been learned The status of this FDB Address Table entry SNMP Object ID ieee8021QbridgeTpFd b Address 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 4 1 2 2 1 1 It is an index to ieee8021QbridgeTpFd b Table 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 4 1 2 2 ieee8021QbridgeTpFd b Port 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 4 1 2 2 1 2 It belongs to ieee8021QbridgeTpFd b Table 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 4 1 2 2 ieee8021Qbridge
53. bolts on one ODU torque of 8 nM being very careful not to move the ODU while tightening Tightening the Azimuth adjustment lock bolts will tilt the ODU so realign the elevation again for optimum position Once the optimum position has been achieved for the ODU pair tighten the elevation adjustment lock bolts on the ODU torque of 8 nM being very careful not to move the ODU when tightening Netronics NetPoint Pro Family System Manual 35 Installing the NetBeam System Chapter 2 14 Repeat steps 11 through 13 for the second ODU 15 Use the DVM to verify that the received signal strength has not changed on either the local or the remote ODU after final tightening of the brackets Antenna alignment is now complete Figure 2 7 shows the NetBeam 1G1 after it has been completely installed Figure 2 7 Installed NetBeam 1G1 Unit Performing Initial System Setup m S amp S The instructions in this section refer to Figure 2 1 eae Note Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 36 Installing the NetBeam System Chapter 2 1 Disconnect the DVM from the ODU by removing the probes from the AUX port Figure 2 3 2 Reboot both ODUs by gently pressing the ODU Reset button G9 This returns the ODU to Adaptive mode Following this action and after the ODU has finished rebooting the RF LED color indicator on both ODUs turns green indicating that the radio link is Up 3 Carefully re insert and tighten the AUX
54. command sh i show system show bridge show bridge port show eth show vlan common show vlan show fdb show fdb table show ip show rf show arp show cvlan reg show pep vp show svid xlat show cfm md show crm ma show cfm mep show cfm cocm show cfm peer mep db Default sh i lnvalid input This error occurs when the command entered includes an attribute value that is outside of the range allowed To assist you the CLI returns the entered command with a question mark added immediately following the erroneous parameter as well as the entire command syntax For example Default set vlan cl 5000 egress 1 3 Invalid input set vlan cl 5000 egress 1 3 set vlan lt comp id list gt lt vid list gt fdb id lt fdbid gt egress lt bridge ports gt untagged lt bridge ports gt where lt bridge ports gt are port names or none fdbid in range 1 64 and relevant for s vlans only Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 224 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 General Execution Errors This error occurs when the command entered has correct syntax but cannot be executed for some reason Such error messages are often application or object dependent Viewing the NetBeam Statistics History The NetBeam CLI enables you to view standard operational and performance statistics for various objects in the system View the statistics history using the show command show lt object gt lt comp id gt statistics
55. configuration both C VLAN tagged and untagged traffic is forwarded transparently no VLAN configuration is required In addition to the default Transparent Bridge feature you can choose to create VLANs and block specific VLANs Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 75 NetBeam Networking Configuration Chapter 6 Default Configuration VLAN configuration is available for the S Component only only S VLANs can be created The VLANs use the C VLANs Registration to Map the C VLANs on S VLANs Two configuration lines are used for the S bridge component e VLAN 1 forwarding rule for untagged traffic no S VLAN e VLAN Undef forwarding rule for any S VLAN tagged traffic vlan configuring set vlan sl 1 egress host ethO ethl eth2 eth3 eth4 untagged host ethO ethl eth2 eth3 eth4 history disable set vlan sl undef egress host ethO ethl eth2 eth3 eth4 untagged none history disable In this configuration when the Network Type is set to Customer NNI default configuration 1 All C VLAN tagged packets are carried transparently between all ports 2 All untagged packets are tagged internally with C VLAN ID 1 based on the port s PVID and carried transparently between all ports the VLAN ID 1 is removed on egress 3 All S VLAN tagged packets with type 88a8 are not recognized by the Customer NNI port they are therefore tagged internally with C VLAN ID 1 based on the port s PVID and carried transparently between all ports
56. device The system maintains 64 permanent instances of the FDB object Use the following command to create and modify FDB entries set fdb sl lt fdb id list gt aging lt aging time gt Use the following command to display FDB entries show fdb sl lt fdb id list gt aging full table counter num of dynamic Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 83 NetBeam Networking Configuration Chapter 6 Configurable Eth type IEEE 802 1ad Provider Bridges a k a Q in Q defines the S VLAN protocol type as 0x88A8 and lists additional EtherType field values for S VLAN 0x8100 0x9100 and 0x9200 to support backwards compatibility Any Eth type within the range of 0x700 0xFFFF is supported except for 0x800 0x806 0x8809 Ox88CC and 0x8902 By default e CVID 0x8100 SVID 0x88A8 0x9200 Default CVian EtherType 0x8 CVI AN Renistratinn Figure 6 4 Web EMS Eihertype Configuration The Bridge Common option allows you to configure default CVlan EtherType when handling S Vlan frames Bridge Common Default CVIan EtherType 0x8100 Figure 6 5 Web EMS Bridge Common EtherType configuration using the CLI CLI gt set bridge c4 vlan ethertype hex number 0x700 0xFFFF except 0x800 0x806 0x8809 0x88CC 0x8902 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 84 NetBeam Networking Configuration Chapter 6 Example of setting C4 with Eth Type of 0x8111
57. e Time e Temperature e Voltage and indication about power source DC or PoE Configuring System IP Addresses Using the Web EMS You can change and add system IP addresses in the IP section of the Quick Configuration screen or by clicking System on the Web EMS Main screen and clicking the IP section of the System screen The NetBeam ODU supports up to four IP addresses that can be on different subnets and associated with different VLANs On NetBeam 2G IP addresses may also be acquired by DHCP configurable by CLI only You can assign a static route to each IP address Default IP Gateway is defined as a static route By default one IP address is defined IP 1 e P Address 192 168 0 1 e P Prefix Length 24 equivalent to Mask 255 255 255 0 e VLAN 0 not defined meaning the IP is not associated with specific VLAN IP Address Prefix Length 1 static 192 168 1 141 23 jo Add Figure 3 5 IP Section of Quick Configuration and System Screen To add or change an IP address 1 Click Add The Add IP window opens Add IP lim m1 Prefix Length VLAN Figure 3 6 Add IP Window Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 42 Performing Basic Configuration Using the Web EMS Chapter 3 2 In the Index field select the index of the IP you want to add or change 3 Ifa single IP is used and you wish to change it Select 1 gt Ifyou change the defaul
58. e o Er am 200 No epk1405 ACCE 1 e o am ns 30 xO gpk 405 qouk 1405 2 e o 128 AM 20 X0 ep1405 mses Li o s an X6 0 ep 1405 Gp 3405 e o a2 A2 xo X0 ep 1a05 agi 1405 3 o o 0 am Xo X6 epi1405 Gp 1405 5 o o 23 am 30 X0 qp1405 ep 1405 5 o o a anm 30 X0 gpk 405 CALLE E L o a2 2128 200 X0 qp 1405 ep 1405 7 o o 1s 032 30 X aieas Gp ia05 4 o o 2 aus X60 X6 qpski 40s Qpii0s 5 L o ne 128 X6 0 qpi1405 epic 1405 g ns 8 NO X6 apitos eph 1405 2 e o amo am Xo X0 sp1405 qp 1405 a o am am X6 X0 eph 1405 99 1405 5 e o am us x0 mw qpski 40s ap 1405 a o o a us 30 xO opk1405 LLLE a o 128 ns 200 X0 opsk1405 ark 1405 7 m am X06 X0 qp1405 qp 1405 3 o o 28 us 200 XO apu 1405 api 1405 e o amo am xo Xo qprki 40s api 1405 7 e o am am a0 XO epi 1405 ap iaos o Amo am 30 X0 spik1405 ahos 4 o o a am X0 X0 qpu1405 qp 1405 6 o Dred a2 30 X0 opk1405 apk1405 7 e o ns a 0 X0 epsk1405 A1405 6 e o 328 ns M6 xo garsos ep 1405s s e o s am x6 X06 gaans saas 20 o a3 im Xo X6 ap1405 qp 1405 n e o am am xo X0 epi1405 aphiaos 6 L o am um XO 0 apitos ope 405 e 0000000000000000000000000000050000000 NetBeam supports the use of pre composed multiple line command scripts A script is simply a list of CLI commands saved in a text file that runs locally on the ODU Script output is displayed on a script output screen and can be copied and saved
59. eth2 ql mode disable ref clock eth2 ssm cvid none Remote NetBeam Default gt show ref clock ref clock host prio 255 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 127 Performing Advanced Configuration ref clock host status ref clock host ql actual ref clock host ql config ref clock host ql mode ref clock host ssm cvid ref clock ethO0 prio ref clock ethO status ref clock eth0 ql actual ref clock ethO0 ql config ref clock eth0 ql mode ref clock eth0 ssm cvid Chapter 7 backup 1 11 11 disable none 100 active 11 14 enable none Electrical 10 100 1000 Ports Setting for SyncE For Electrical 10 100 1000 ports RJ45 clock can be set set eth ethl clock auto slave synce Determines the clock flow direction relevant only when carrying Sync E over 1000BaseT When using fibers SFP SFPs clock is carried independantely and the clock configuration is not available The ports default is Auto clock direction determined by the auto neg protocol The relevant Ethernet standards define that two RJ45 ports connected between them MUST be configured to one of the automatic modes auto or synce or should be configured manually one to master and second to slave When using SyncE over RJ45 the Ethernet port s Clock must be set manually as per one of the following options 1 Option 1 Clock synce In this configuration the clock direction is selected automatically by the SyncE SSMs 2 Option 2
60. example transfers the script DemoScript txt to the system Default gt copy ftp srv admin 192 168 0 100 DemoScript txt flash scripts DemoScript txt Finished You cannot display script content directly from the CLI To view the content of a script transfer the script to the server and view it with a text editor Default copy flash scripts DemoScript txt ftp srv admin8192 168 0 100 DemoScript txt finished Use the delete command to delete scripts from flash scripts Default del flash scripts DemoScript txt Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 180 Performing System Administration Chapter 9 Macro Scripts This feature allows you to create chunks of CLI command sequences variables generic to a particular device This feature is supported on NetBeam 2G systems only The following two methods define CLI variables e You can use the SET CLI command to define and use variables anywhere until the command is deleted e You can also pass parameters to the CLI script An existing run script script name command is extended with additional optional parameters run script lt script name gt lt parameters list gt Each parameter should be specified as follows lt variable name gt lt variable value gt for example run script my script management vlan 5 You should define such a variable as part of the script run command and use it until the script ends It shadows variables with the same name defined previousl
61. footprint or to expand your enterprise network e NetBeam operates in the licensed E band 71 76 81 86Ghz wireless spectrum with significantly lower licensing fees and simpler and quicker licensing registration processes for rapid service deployment e 1 Gbps throughput delivers enough capacity to support voice video and high speed data services e NetBeam s advanced Carrier Ethernet capabilities enable differentiated QoS maintaining diverse SLAs for multiple services and customers e NetBeam s all outdoor unit eliminates the need for a dedicated indoor cabinet and enables rapid roll out with minimal site preparation e NetBeam s zero footprint and flexible installation options enable deployment in any urban business or residential environment e NetBeam s low power consumption enables the use of standard PoE supplies connecting the radio with a single cable for both power and data NetBeam B NetBeam ual Node E Z EL eR bt NetBeam C p e Internet C qon SS Fiber Transport Distribution Network Data Server s Voice Aggregation Node Business Services F Switch Figure 1 3 Wireless Backhaul for Business Services and Enterprise Connectivity Netronics NetPoint Pro Family System Manual 14 Introduction to NetBeam System Chapter 1 Main Features Netronics NetBeam wireless backhaul radio link operates in the new E band spectrum which provides clear technological and economic ad
62. for stepping down in modulation profile Adaptive mode CINR High Upper threshold for stepping up in modulation profile Adaptive mode Backoff Internal setting controlling the OFDM Tx power backoff uH S amp S Modulation parameters are optimized configuration Do not alter them Spee Note Configuring Ethernet Interfaces Using the CLI The NetBeam system has four Ethernet interfaces Host Management interface EthO Radio interface Eth1 ODU interface port 1 Eth2 ODU interface port 2 Eth3 ODU interface port3 NetBeam 2G only Eth4 ODU interface port4 NetBeam 2G only You can change the default values of the ODU interfaces and display the port status of a specific interface ae The Eth object is always followed by one or more name strings that correspond to ports or devices to be acted upon Note In the commands below this string is represented as eth list Configuring Interface Parameters Usethe set eth command followed by the name of the interface Eth1 or Eth2 to change the default values of an Ethernet interface set eth lt eth list gt admin up down alias lt string gt eth type lt eth type set gt auto neg enabled disabled loopback mode disabled external internal loopback timeout lt integer gt Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 59 Performing Basic Configuration Using the CLI Chapter 4 alarm propagat
63. gt all desc cont in class rel pos name hw rev fw rev sw rev serial mfg name model name fru last change info Upgrading the License Key You can order the following NetBeam software licenses capacity steps and feature availability depends on the platform e Data rate Capacity e Layer 2 networking capabilities OAM Resiliency e Synchronization Synchronous Ethernet ITU T G 8261 e Encryption Upgrading a license requires loading using FTP SFTP or TFTP a license key that is generated by Netronics based on your NetBeam serial number Default gt copy license ftp lt ftp_user gt lt ftp_password gt lt FTP server IP address gt lt license_ file name gt Finished e How to activate the licenses keys set license oam status enable set license data rate status 1000 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 160 Performing System Administration Chapter 9 set license synce status enable set license encryption status enable set license resiliency status enable Then save the configuration and then copy running configuration startup configuration Once you have loaded the license file to the ODU you can activate the license To view the available licenses according to the loaded license file Permission and the current configuration Status default gt show license license oam status enable license oam permission enable license synce status enable license syn
64. is facing on the Bridge Port Only one MEP can be defined for the same combination of Interface Direction and Primary VLAN 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 1 1 3 dot1agCfmMep Direction up down RC down Primary VLAN vlan An integer indicating the Primary VID of the MEP A value of 0 indicates that either the Primary VID is that of the MEP s MA or that the MEP s MA is not associated with any VID The associated VLAN must be defined in the VLAN Table Table 12 44 In addition only one MEP can be defined for the same combination of Interface Direction and Primary VLAN 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 1 1 4 dotlagCfmMep PrimaryVid 0 4094 RC Administrative State admin state The administrative state of the MEP True active indicates that the MEP is to function normally False inactive indicates that the MEP is to cease functioning 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 1 1 5 dot1agCfmMep Active active inactive RC Inactive CCI cci If set to True the MEP will generate CCM messages 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 1 1 7 dotlagCfmMepCciEna bled enabled disabled RC disabled Message Priority msg prio The priority value for CCMs and LTMs transmitted by the MEP The default value is the highest priority value allowed passing through the Bridge Port for any of the MEP VIDs The Management Entity can obtain the default value for this variable from the pri
65. its current operational state If the current state was entered prior to the last reinitialization of the local network management subsystem then this object contains a zero value The textual name of the ifName ASCII interface 1 3 6 1 2 1 31 1 1 1 1 representation of the VLAN ID State Trap Indicates whether ifLinkDownTrap RW only Disabled 2 linkUp linkDown traps Enable a single should be generated for this 1 3 6 1 2 1 31 1 1 1 14 value is interface allowed High Speed An estimate of the ifHighSpeed 1000 Indication interface s current 1 3 6 1 2 1 31 1 1 1 15 bandwidth in units of 1 000 000 bits per second Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 293 Using the NetBeam CLI Attribute CLI Attribute Name Description Promiscuous Mode This object has a value of False 2 if this interface only accepts packets frames that are addressed to this station This object has a value of True 1 when the station accepts all packets frames transmitted on the media Connector This object has the value True 1 if the interface sub layer has a physical connector Otherwise this object has the value False 2 This object is an alias name for the interface as specified by a network manager and provides a non volatile handle for the interface Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual Chapter 12 SNMP Object ID Value Zero length string ifPromiscuousMode 1 3 6 1 2 1 31 1 1 1 16
66. length string Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual Chapter 12 SNMP Object ID SNMP Syntax CLI Syntax integer32 integer 1 2147483647 entPhysicalParentRel Pos 1 3 6 1 2 1 47 1 1 1 1 6 character string entPhysicalName 1 3 6 1 2 1 47 1 1 1 1 7 character string 232 Attribute CLI Attribute Name Physical Hardware Revision hw rev Physical Firmware Revision fw rev Using the NetBeam CLI Description The vendor specific hardware revision string for the physical entity The preferred value is the hardware revision identifier actually printed on the component itself if present Note that if revision information is stored internally in a non printable e g binary format then the agent must convert such information to a printable format in an implementation specific manner If no specific hardware revision string is associated with the physical component or if this information is unknown to the agent then this object will contain a zero length string The vendor specific firmware revision string for the physical entity Note that if revision information is stored internally in a non printable e g binary format then the agent must convert such information to a printable format in an implementation specific manner If no specific firmware revision string is associated with the physical component or if this information is unknown to the age
67. mac addr EthO far 152 default xl a Figure 9 26 Web EMS LLDP Window LLDP configuration using CLI The following is an example of the remote answer of the LLDP remote EthO Over the Radio CLI gt set lldp ethO admin rx tx Set done lldp ethO0 CLI gt show lldp remote lldp remote eth0 0 chassis id 192 168 1 152 lldp remote ethO 0 chassis id subtype network addr lldp remote ethO 0 port id 00 24 a4 00 b8 74 lldp remote ethO 0 port id subtype mac addr lldp remote eth0 0 port descr EthO lldp remote eth0 0 sys name far 152 lldp remote eth0 0 sys descr NB1G1 CLI gt DHCP The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP is a computer networking protocol used by devices DHCP clients to obtain configuration information for operation in an Internet Protocol network This protocol reduces system administration workload allowing networks to add devices with little or no manual intervention Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 187 Performing System Administration Chapter 9 DHCP is built on a client server model where designated DHCP server hosts allocate network addresses and deliver configuration parameters to dynamically configured hosts Client refers to a host requesting initialization parameters from a DHCP server The following is an example of setting STATIC IP amp DGW Via CLI and Web CLI gt set ip 1 ip addr 192 168 1 151 prefix len 23 vlan 0 Set done ip 1 CLI gt set rout
68. not compatible since the combination effectively leads to discarding all frames on the port ieee8021QbridgePortIngre SS Filtering 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 2 1 4 5 3 Enabled Disabled RW Disable d Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 282 Using the NetBeam CLI Outgoing Queue Object Attributes Chapter 12 Table 12 40 Outgoing Queue Attributes Attribute CLI Description SNMP Object Syntax Access Attribute Name ID Interface Name Interface name ethO eth1 eth2 N A rf all Queue ID Queue ID Range from 1 to 8 N A Tx Frame Counter The counter of the per Q transmitted tx 0 264 RO frames Drop Frame Counter The counter of the per Q dropped drop 0 264 RO frames Incoming Queue Object Attributes Table 12 41 Incoming Queue Attributes Attribute CLI Description Syntax Access Attribute Name Interface Name Interface name rf currently only one but may be N A extended in the future Queue ID Queue ID Range from 1 to 4 N A Good Frame Counter The counter of the per Q received good 0 264 RO good frames Erroneous Frame The counter of the per Q received error 0 264 RO Counter erroneous frames Lost Frame Counter The counter of the per Q lost rx lost 0 264 RO frames Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 283 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 IP Object Attributes Table 12 42 IP A
69. old MAC addresses is deleted CLI Example Example Set SVID 5 associate to FDB ID 5 its Egress are ports Eth3 EthO0 set vlan s1 5 fdb id 5 egress eth0 eth3 untagged none history disable Set FDB Quota with size of 2 MAC s set fdb quota 1 size 2 Set classifer EVC for ports Eth3 EthO for any VID with PCP7 set classifier evc 1 interface eth0 eth3 precedence 1 vid 1 4094 pcP 7 ip cos dont care packet type all evc 1 Associate EVC 1 with Quota 1 set fdb evc quota 1 evc 1 quota 1 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 182 Performing System Administration Chapter 9 NB2G1 gt set bridge common out of quota drop Set done bridge common NB2G1 NB2G1 gt show bridge common bridge common def cvlan etype 0x8100 bridge common out of quota drop NB2G1 NB2G1 gt show fdb table all all learned component id fdb id mac addr bridge port status quota sl 1 0 de 1 08 6c 8 ethl learned 0 sl 5 00 1 16 37 1le 15 ethO learned 0 sl 5 00 24 a4 01 4a b5 ethO learned O0 NB2G1 Configuring NTP The Network Time Protocol NTP is a protocol for synchronizing the clocks of network elements over packet switched variable latency data networks NTP provides a connectionless service UDP in the Transport Layer The NetBeam has an embeded NTP client It can synchronize the host clock to any NTP server in the LAN Internet to deliver accurate and reliable time Primary and secondary servers can be defined NTP Configuration Us
70. parameter if missing then until the latest entry File format CSV is formatted with the following fields Table 9 5 CSV File Format Statistic Type Available Fields time in octets in idle octets in good octets in errored Octets out octets out idle octets in pkts in good pkts in errored pkts in lost pkts out pkts min cinr max cinr min rssi max rssi min modulation max modulation time in octets in ucast pkts in discards in errors out Octets out ucast pkts out errors in mcast pkts in bcast pkts out mcast pkts out bcast pkts out discards in no rule discards time port in pkts out pkts drop pkts The time field is equal to the interval start time that is displayed by the appropriate CLI show statistics commands Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 169 Performing System Administration Chapter 9 Enter Settings for Multiple Variable Bindings To enter fileSessionCommand settings 1 Double click the filesessionCommand row 2 Enterthe following settings e Remote SNMP Agent The IP address of the ODU connected to the MIB Browser e OID to set x x x x x 1 as the next object in table e Value to set The table number is 13 3 Click OK n Multiple Variable Bindings 192 168 1 131 fieSessionCommand 1 zax Qos5suc o Set 192 168 1 131 ja amp r Log ec filesessioncommand 1 integer copyStatsHistory 13 fileSessionServer 1 octet string 192 168 1
71. port names e g host ethO eth1 eth2 c1 c2 c3 c4 c4 s1 Any combination of the names can be included in the list For details refer to Designating Named Objects on page 2199 eth list A comma separated list of external port names e g host ethO eth1 eth2 Any combination of the names can be included in the list For details refer to Designating Named Objects on page 2199 ext bridge port list A comma separated list of external port names e g host ethO eth1 eth2 Any combination of the names can be included in the list For details refer to Designating Named Objects on page 2199 lt vid list gt A list of ranges of VIDs from 1 to 4094 The notation covers comma separated lists of the numbers within the specified range as well a range of numbers separated by a hyphen e g 5 25 For details refer to Designating Indexed Objects on page 2211 lt fdb id list gt lt comp id gt A list of ranges of FIDs from 1 to 64 The notation covers comma separated lists of the numbers within the specified range as well as a range of numbers separated by a hyphen e g 5 25 For details refer to Designating Indexed Objects on page 2211 A single component ID one of c1 c2 c3 c4 c4 s1 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 Convention Meaning bridge port A single port name one of host ethO eth1 eth2 c1 c2 c3
72. port protective seal using the 13mm open wrench The NetBeam link can now pass traffic and management between the ports and over the radio link Further configuration can be performed using the Web EMS or the CLI m S amp S To perform configuration and monitoring you must connect your laptop or PC to maaana one of the two Ethernet ports on the ODU Note Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 37 Performing Basic Configuration Using the Web EMS This chapter describes how to perform basic configuration tasks using the Web EMS e For instructions how to configure a link using the CLI refer to Performing Basic Configuration using the CLI on page 53 e For instructions on performing advanced configuration such as network configuration synchronization OAM and other advanced configuration tasks refer to Performing Advanced Configuration on page 87 This chapter includes the following topics e Connecting to the ODU Using the Web EMS e Saving Configuration Changes and Resetting the System Using the Web EMS e Quick Configuration e Configuring and Displaying Basic System Information Using the Web EMS e Configuring System IP Addresses Using the Web EMS e Configuring Radio Parameters Using the Web EMS e Viewing Modulation Profiles Using the Web EMS e Configuring Ethernet Interfaces Using the Web EMS e Configuring SNMP Settings e Default VLAN Setting Netronics NetPoint Pro Family System Manual 38 Performing Basic C
73. received Host 8 86 98 61 4a 8d CHost8 8698G14a8d gt offered 192 168 0 73 DHCP discover for 8 86 98 1 4a 8d gt from interface 192 168 1 254 received Host 86 86 98 61 4a 8d CHost8 8698G14a8d gt offered 192 168 0 ES tftp starting TFTP alias is mapped to C Program Files x86 gt OpenTFTPServer permitted clients all server port range all max blksize 65464 default blksize 512 default timeout 3 file read allowed Yes file create allowed No file overwrite allowed No thread pool size 1 detecting Interfaces Listening On 192 168 42 88 69 Listening On 127 6 0 1 69 Network changed re detecting Interfaces detecting Interfaces Listening On 192 168 42 88 69 Listening On 192 168 0 222 69 Listening On 16 2 6 1 69 Listening On 192 168 1 254 69 L i i A L a 4 Q 92 168 6 73 46428 C Program Files x86 OpenTFTPServer zero_tauch txt Blocks Served lient 192 168 73 55339 C Program Files x86 gt OpenTFTPServer nbeam uimage 5 9931 27216 Blocks Served Figure 10 1 Configuration File Location on the TFTP Server 6 The ODU output appears as follows the system name has been changed and the software version has been upgraded NetBeam SiteA gt show ip ip 1 ip addr dhcp 192 168 0 73 ip 1 prefix len 23 ip 1 vlan 0 ip 1 default gateway 192 168 0 1 NetBeam SiteA show sw Flash Bank Version Running Scheduled to run startup config Netronics NetBeam Family System M
74. status tx pending show cfm mep 1 1 1 ltr cfm mep cfm mep cfm mep cfm mep cfm mep cfm mep cfm mep cfm mep cfm mep cfm mep cfm mep cfm mep cfm mep cfm mep PRPPRPHPHP PPP PRP RP PP PRPPRPHPHPHPHPHPRPHP RP PP PRPPRPHPHPHPHPHP RPP RP PP Oooooooooooooooo Ooooooooooooooo rx ttl ltr forward relay action chassis id subtype mng addr domain ingr action ingr mac ingr port id subtype egr action egr mac egr port id subtype trm mep last egr id next egr id Enter the following on the customer level set cfm mep 2 2 1 ltm dst type mepid set cfm mep 2 2 1 ltm dst mepid 2 set cfm mep 2 2 1 ltm tx status tx pending show cfm mep 2 2 1 ltr cfm mep cfm mep cfm mep cfm mep cfm mep cfm mep cfm mep cfm mep NN NM NY NN DN Nx NN NM N NN DN Nx PRPRPRPRPRPP PB oOooooooooc oooooooo rx ttl ltr forward relay action chassis id subtype mng addr domain ingr action ingr mac ingr port id subtype Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 63 unknown hit unknown unknown ok 00 24 a4 00 07 a9 unknown none 00 00 00 00 00 00 unknown unknown 00 00 00 24 a4 00 07 59 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 63 unknown fdb unknown unknown ok 00 24 a4 00 07 59 unknown 116 Performing Advanced Configuration cfm mep cfm mep cfm mep cfm mep cfm mep cfm mep cfm mep cfm mep cfm mep cfm mep cfm mep cfm mep cfm mep cfm mep cfm mep cfm mep cfm mep cfm mep cfm mep cfm mep cfm mep cfm m
75. system location undefined system voltage 55 dc system temperature 39 system date 2012 12 01 system time 15 08 06 system cli timeout 15 system auth mode local system auth shared secret none system loop permission enabled Configuring System IP Addresses Using the CLI The NetBeam ODU supports up to four IP addresses that can be on different subnets and associated with different VLANs You can assign a static route to each IP address The Default IP Gateway is defined as a static route By default one IP address is defined IP 1 e P Address 192 168 0 1 e P network Prefix 24 Mask 255 255 255 0 e VLAN 0 not defined By default no route is defined Use the set ip command to change or add an IP address The command must be followed by the index number of the IP address you want to add or change Use the index number 1 to change the default IP address For example set ip lt ip index gt lt value gt ip addr lt value gt prefix len lt value gt vlan lt ip index gt integer 1 4 Local Site set ip 1 ip addr 192 168 0 11 prefix len 24 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 54 Performing Basic Configuration Using the CLI Chapter 4 If the IP entry does not already exist the set ip command creates it and assigns the attributes specified If the interface address or the default router address is not explicitly specified the entry is created with the default value that has been defined for the VLAN
76. t ping until stopped by ctrl c CLI gt ping Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 193 Performing System Administration Chapter 9 Traceroute Supported Only in CLI Traceroute is a tool that races the route that packets of data take from the device that a command originated from to the remote host Like Ping it can indicate if a remote host is reachable but it gives a significantly more detailed report This feature is supported on NetBeam 2G systems only Traceroute CLI Commands The command tracert displays the three traceroute options h lt maximum hops 1 255 gt w timeout sec 1 86400 gt host The set tracert command enables you to select one of the above options The following is an example of performing a traceroute NB2G1 Left tracert 192 168 0 222 traceroute to 192 168 0 222 192 168 0 222 30 hops max 46 byte packets 1 212 29 198 122 212 29 198 122 1 492 ms 0 710 ms 1 034 ms 2 kx 3 4 5 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 194 Zero Touch This chapter describes the Zero Touch feature and includes the following topics e Zero Touch Feature e Zero Touch Predefinitions e Zero Touch System Process e Configure Zero Touch in the CLI Configure Zero Touch in the WEB EMS Zero Touch Feature Zero Touch enables you to quickly and easily commission the link and complete the startup configuration process The process begins with the remote and automatic configuratio
77. the SW version 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 227 Using the NetBeam CLI Attribute CLI Attribute Name Description System Up Time up time The length of time that has passed since the network management portion of the system was last re initialized System Contact contact A text string identifying the contact person responsible for this managed node together with information on how to contact this person Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual SNMP Object ID sysUpTime 13 612 13 3 sysContact 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 4 Chapter 12 ddd hh mmiss where ddd decimal integer representing days it can be an arbitrary number of digits hh two digit decimal integer representing the hours of a day 0 23 mmztwo digit decimal integer representing minutes of an hour 0 59 ss two digit decimal integer representing seconds of a minute 0 59 Up to 256 characters sysContact undefined If no contact information exists the value returns a zero length string 228 Attribute CLI Attribute Name System Name name System Location location Input Voltage voltage Enclosure Temperature temperature System Date and Time date time Using the NetBeam CLI Description A name assigned by the administrator to this managed node Generally by convention this is the node s fully qualified domain name This value is also used as the system prompt strin
78. the loopback and return to status none default gt reset link oam loopback eth0 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 119 Performing Advanced Configuration Chapter 7 default gt show link oam loopback eth0 link oam loopback eth0 status none link oam loopback eth0 peer request process Configuring Synchronous Ethernet SyncE SyncE Overview The NetBeam provides Synchronous Ethernet SyncE capabilities receiving a synchronized Ethernet link and providing a synchronized Ethernet link on the other end of the wireless link within the required masks SyncE is a link by link distribution scheme that uses the Ethernet physical layer to accurately distribute clock frequency ITU T standard G 8261 defines various aspects of SyncE such as the acceptable limits of jitter and wander as well as the minimum requirements for synchronization of network elements With SyncE the receive clock is extracted from the Ethernet Rx by the clock unit and used for transmission on all interfaces propagating the clock in the path Every SyncE Network Element contains an internal clock called the Ethernet Equipment Clock EEC The EEC locks on the Rx clock and distributes it for transmission on all interfaces attenuating jitter and wander and maintaining clock in holdover If the Rx clock fails the local unit switches to holdover and regenerates the clock accurately until the failure is corrected NetBeam 1G ODU SyncE PRC qi 2 GrandMa
79. to the directory used for file transfers For example on UNIX file servers FTP paths start in the home directory associated with the username The following example specifies the file named mill config on the server named enterprise netronics networks com The device uses the username liberty and the password secret to access this server via FTP Since there is currently no DNS the location is specified as IP Address in the dotted notation ftp liberty secret 127 23 46 17 mill config Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 163 Performing System Administration Chapter 9 Specifying Local Files Use the prefix directory filename syntax to specify a file located on the device specified by prefix For example lash backup config specifies the file named backup config in the configs directory of Flash memory Some devices do not support directories Supported Storage Devices Table 9 1 lists and describes the currently supported file storage devices Table 9 1 Supported Support Devices ftp FTP server external server sftp SFTP server external server tftp TFTP server external server flash Local flash memory linux shell var netronics etc eprom RF module ROM No directories The scripts directory resides under flash 1ash scripts File System Commands Command List Table 9 2 lists and describes the file system commands Table 9 2 File System Commands dir device Lists files store
80. transmitted out of the interface The number of broadcast packets transmitted out of the interface Viewing Ethernet Statistics Using the Web EMS To display Ethernet statistics using the Web EMS click the icon of the interface for which you want to view statistics on the EMS Web Main screen Figure 3 12 then click the Statistics section of the Interfaces screen The Statistics section includes the following tabs Current Real time statistics counters since the last time the Ethernet statistic counters were cleared Statistics Current History Elapsed Time 0000 00 31 19 In Octets 96310 Out Octets 257286 In Ucast Packets 641 Out UCast Packets 634 In Mcast Packets 52 Out MCast Packets 0 In Broadcast Packets 196 Out Bcast Packets In Discards Out Discards In Errors Out Errors elreireljrelrelje In No Rule Discards Clear Figure 8 11 Statistics Screen Current Tab History Displays 96 intervals of 15 minutes total 24 hours of the statistics counters To clear the statistic counters click Clear on the Current tab Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 147 Monitoring the System Chapter 8 Viewing Ethernet Statistics Using the CLI To display Ethernet statistics using the CLI use the following command show eth lt eth list gt statistics Viewing Bandwidth Utilization Statistics You can display statistics on radios and Ethernet inter
81. types of objects and lists that are to be specified on the command line For more information on using identifiers in the NetBeam CLI refer to Designating Named Objects on page 219 Table 12 2 Repeatedly Used Identifiers Convention Meaning lt comp id gt A single component ID one of c1 c2 c3 c4 c4 s1 lt bridge port gt A single port name one of host ethO eth1 eth2 c1 c2 c3 c4 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 Convention Meaning c4 s1 fdb id A single FID number from 1 to 64 vid A single VID number from 1 to 4094 lt mac addr gt A MAC address in the form NN NN NN NN NN NN where N is a hexadecimal number e g 00 AF DD 1E 2D A3 lt ip addr gt A standard dotted notation IP address e g 10 0 15 74 lt ip mask gt The IP address mask i e the number of bits that constitute the IP network address prefix comp id list A comma separated list of the component IDs e g c1 c2 c3 c4 c4 s1 Any combination of the component IDs can be included in the list For details refer to Designating Named Objects on page 2199 c comp id list A comma separated list of the C component IDs e g c1 c2 c3 c4 c4 Any combination of the component IDs can be included in the list For details refer to Designating Named Objects on page 2199 lt bridge port list gt A comma separated list of
82. undefined i e any value can be transmitted and the field is ignored by the receiver Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 269 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 Network Object Attributes Ethernet Interface Attributes This section lists configurable Ethernet Interface attributes Table 12 34 and read only Ethernet Interface attributes Table 12 35 separately Attribute CLI Attribute Name Administrative Status admin Table 12 34 Configurable Ethernet Interface Attributes Description SNMP Object ID The desired operational ifAdminStatus state of the interface expressed as an integer There are no restrictions for adding an interface in the Down state to VLAN egress and untagged lists or to 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 7 1 Up operational 2 Down not operational When the set command is used together with the admin attribute the device will report the administrative status of the device immediately after command FDP execution For example Interface eth7 admin set down 1 Enabled 1 2 Disabled Enabled State Trap trap An integer that indicates whether linkUp linkDown traps should be generated for this interface ifLinkDownTrap Enable 1 3 6 1 2 1 31 1 1 1 14 ifAlias 1 3 6 1 2 1 31 1 1 1 18 A text string containing an alias name for the interface as assigned by a network manager This value provides a non volatile handle for the interface 0 len
83. value of this attribute is O arbitrary number of digits hh two digit decimal integer representing the hours of a day 0 23 mm two digit decimal integer representing minutes of an hour 0 59 ss two digit decimal integer representing seconds of a minute 0 59 Name name The name of the interface ifName host ethO 1 3 6 1 2 1 31 1 eth1 eth2 1 1 1 Connector An integer that indicates whether ifConnectorPrese 1 True connector the interface sub layer has a nt Connector physical connector 1 3 6 1 2 1 31 1 is present 1 1 17 2 False True Connector is absent Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 276 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 Attribute CLI Description SNMP Object ID Value Attribute Name Actual Ethernet This object identifier represents ifMauType For possible 1000fd Type eth act the operational type of the MAU 1 3 6 1 2 1 26 2 values refer type as determined by either 1 1 3 to Table 12 The result of the auto negotiation Part of 36 process or ifMauTable 1 3 6 1 2 1 26 2 If auto negotiation is not enabled 1 or is not implemented for this MAU then the value that has been assigned in the eth type attribute is used Table 12 36 Ethernet Type Values Value Description 10hd dot3MauType10BaseTHD 1 3 6 1 2 1 26 4 10 10fd dot3MauType10BaseTFD 1 3 6 1 2 1 26 4 11 100hd dot3MauType100BaseTXHD 1 3 6 1 2 1 26 4 15
84. 00 5500 1 unblocked blocked unblocked blocked idle 2011 06 27 97 658112 1 230652 0 000000 0 000000 1 111240 00 00 00 0 00 24 a4 0 set ring 3 ring id 200 type ring fdb id 1 role none cw port ethl acw port eth0O raps cvid 100 set ring 3 raps md level 7 version v2 revertive yes hold off timer 0 guard timer 500 wtb timer 5500 wtr timer 1 Left Slave Right Master ring configuring set ring 3 ring id 200 type ring fdb id 1 role acw rpl cw port ethO acw port ethl raps cvid 100 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 135 Performing Advanced Configuration Chapter 7 set ring 3 raps md level 7 version v2 revertive yes hold off timer 0 guard timer 500 wtb timer 5500 wtr timer 1 Right Master Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 136 Monitoring the System This chapter explains how to monitor system events status and statistics and includes the following topics Viewing Active Alarms Viewing Alarm History and System Events Events Configuration Masking Viewing Radio Statistics Viewing VLAN Statistics Viewing Queue Statistics Viewing Ethernet Statistics Viewing Bandwidth Utilization Statistics Viewing Active Alarms You can display active alarms using the Web EMS or the CLI For a detailed explanation of NetBeam events and alarms and instructions for how to use them in diagnosing NetBeam system problems refer to NetBeam DiagnosticsNetBeam Diagnostics on page 20
85. 1 Interface QL Actual Chapter 7 QL Congifuration host gl eect gl eect disable 4m tst Delete Figure 7 21 SyncE Setup Screen Basic SyncE Scenario Synching both ends of the radio without SyncE on the line interfaces e The local NetBeam uses it internal clock Host e The remote NetBeam receives timing information and is locked on EthO RF Local NetBeam default config Default gt show ref clock ref clock ref clock ref clock ref clock ref clock ref clock host host host host host host prio status ql actual ql config ql mode ssm cvid Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 255 active ql eecl ql eecl disable none 123 Performing Advanced Configuration Chapter 7 Remote NetBeam set ref clock eth0 prio 100 ql config ql eecl ql mode disable Default gt show ref clock ref clock host prio 255 ref clock host status backup 1 ref clock host ql actual ql eecl ref clock host ql config ql eecl ref clock host ql mode disable ref clock host ssm cvid none ref clock eth0 prio 100 ref clock eth0 status active ref clock eth0 ql actual ql eecl ref clock ethO0 ql config ql eecl ref clock eth0 ql mode disable ref clock eth0 ssm cvid none Typical SyncE Scenario Figure 7 22 illustrates a typical SyncE Scenario in which e The local NetBeam receives timing information on Eth1 from PRC ql 2 and distributes it to
86. 1 To display all active alarms using the Web EMS click Events on the Web EMS Main screen Active alarms appear in the Alarms section of the Events screen including the date and time the alarm occurred Netronics NetPoint Pro Family System Manual 137 Monitoring the System Chapter 8 5 3 a Description link down eth2 Figure 8 1 Events Screen Alarms Section To display all active alarms using the CLI use the show alarms command All active alarms appear including the date and time the alarm occurred 2010 7 10 9 45 21 temperature high 2010 7 10 9 50 13 link down ethO Viewing Alarm History and System Events You can display a log of alarms and system events using the Web EMS or the CLI For a detailed explanation of NetBeam events and alarms and instructions on how to use them in diagnosing NetBeam system problems refer to NetBeam DiagnosticsNetBeam Diagnostics on page201 To display a log of alarms and system events using the Web EMS click Events on the Web EMS Main screen A log of alarms and system events appears in the Logs section of the Events screen including the date and time the alarm or event occurred Time Event 02 01 28 Mar 18 02 01 28 cad link up eth2 02 01 29 Mar 18 02 01 29 cad link down eth2 03 39 40 Mar 18 03 39 40 cad link up eth2 03 39 41 Mar 18 03 39 41 cad link down eth2 21 24 47 Mar 18 21 24 47 cad link up eth1 21 24 48 Mar 18 21 24 48 cad link d
87. 1 15 31 39 32 2I fileSessionPassword 1 octet string 123456 31 32 33 34 35 36 hex fileSessionUser 1 octet string noam 6E 6F 61 6D hex fileSessionLocalParams 1 octet string mo eth ethO 6D 6F 3D 22 65 7 fileSessionRemotePath 1 octet string ETHOS zip 45 54 48 30 53 2E 7A fileSessionRowStatus 1 X integer createAndGol4 Select flleSessionServer 1 Remote SNMP Agent 192468113 JAR OID to Set 5007 wswM L 391413196181151 i9 9 Value to Set 192 168 115 Js Syntax nteger32 Timeticks Counter64 Ulnteger32 IP address Opaque Counter32 OID Nsapaddr C Gauge32 Octets Cc Bits OOO a SNMPv Figure 9 13 fileSessionServer Settings Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 171 Performing System Administration Chapter 9 To enter fileSessionPassword settings Note Only apply these settings if the FTP SFTP or TFTP server is password protected 1 Double click the fileSessionPassword row 2 Enter the following settings e Remote SNMP Agent The IP address of the ODU connected to the MIB Browser e OID to set x x x x x 1 as the next object in table e Value to set The password for the FTP SFTP or TFTP server 3 Click OK 5 Multiple Variable Bindings 192 168 1 131 fileSessionCommand 1 COBAIA o Set 192 168 1 131 tr Log a ame Syntax value fileSessionCommand 1 integer copyStatsHistory 13 fileSessionSe
88. 1 6 feast 21735 MD 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 18 1 10 Figure 9 19 MIB Tree i 1 XX00101010710 28812456 o 6 M0040 630244 g 3 xw00L01010700 28736836 o LI o esse 6230680 4 2000010101060 30846008 e o 6 awo 4606000 LI S 2000 61 01 010680 25995904 L e 6 eum 6240866 2 200001010106 0 25557654 9 o memo 4240960 2 7 290010101060 2873077 o e 6 meno 4244340 7 B 2000 01 61 010610 20418900 LU o snan 5726854 4 2000010101 0000 28452040 e o owo 4240960 1 i0 2000010101550 25966876 o o ens 62408684 LI 1 200001010105 40 28897032 o e o 6160 631580 E 2 2000 010101 05 30 30000106 o o euno 6459300 3 2000 010105 20 22833152 e e o ouso 6248424 A xX 00101014510 28961100 o H o wo 4240960 5 i 30000101019500 20007048 e o Mo 4435230 5 i 2000 01 01 01 08 50 26337164 9 o 6 ses 3683720 a 7 2000 01 0101 08 80 28807940 e oo 6240960 7 i 200001010104 30 31211892 g e o 6762240 602240 a i 2000010101420 25993940 o o 6 sexso 3616630 M 2000010101110 24779820 e o o eu 30960 4 t 0000101010400 29043188 o6 uo 4240960 12 20000101010 50 28800024 e o o ume enose a B 200L0101090140 31075716 9 o o exeo 46080 gt M xX00101010130 28700952 e meme 4240960 a 5 2000 01 010103 20 28908576 o o 9 aww 6240904 a M 2900 01010103 10 27654508 o o sS ouo 950400 7 7 2000 01 01010300 25814456 o o 6090 4240566 M 200101010250 29499006 o osmo 6354960 9 00001016162 0 2800012 o o uomo 4240244 L O 1
89. 1 and M72 700 Mbps o Two active GbE ports o Updated SW version 3 3 e FDD family 71 76 81 86 Ghz 2G1 and 2G2 o Four active Gbe ports o Updated SW version 5 1 0 Audience This document assumes a working knowledge of wireless backhaul platforms and their operating environments This document is intended for use by all persons who are involved in planning installing configuring and using the NetBeam system Conventions The following conventions are used in this document in order to make locating reading and using information easier Special Attention operating stage LJ Informs you of a helpful optional activity that may be performed at the current Provides important and useful information mi z S R Describes an activity or situation that may or will interrupt normal operation of the NetBeam system one of its components or the network e Caution Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 5 Table of Contents Chapter 1 Introduction to the NetBeam System System Applications cccccssssssseceecececeeceesesaaeseeeesceescessesaaeeeeeeeeesusesssesesaaeaeeeeeeeseees 13 Main FeatUre5 eet Seen ttt etn rene Idee e nerve EE RENE ITF A EEE 15 NetBeam Product Family esee eene ennt tn nnns tn nennen na t sn ta tnnt na nnns nnn ann 16 Functional DescriptiOn ueesesese esee nnne enn nnns th nina tetas nasse rag aaa 18 HIN ie e chic 19 Management diet pie e
90. 1 eth3 disable c5 undef 1 eth3 s1 none disable c6 1 1 eth4 s1 eth4 disable c6 undef 1 eth4 s1 none disable Deleting VLANs Use the clear vlan command to delete VLANs and clear their associated statistics Use the following syntax clear vlan lt comp id list gt all lt vid list gt all statistics Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 73 NetBeam Networking Configuration Chapter 6 Displaying VLAN Details Use the show vlan command to display VLANs and their details Use the following syntax show vlan all lt component id gt all lt vids gt info statistics fdb id egress untagged show vlan all lt vids gt info statistics fdb id egress untagged Displaying VLAN Common Properties To display the ODU s VLAN configuration use the following command show vlan common lt comp id list gt all info version max vid max num curr num This command displays general information about VLAN bridges that are active in the network Single Component Bridge Model This model is only applicable to version 5 of the NetBeam 2G Model Implementation You can configure the ETH managed object to one of the following port types network types to support both C VLANs and S VLANs transmission and to maintain backwards compatibility Customer UNI CEP Customer Edge Port C VLANs port as per old Multi Component Bridge Mode configuration In such configur
91. 100fd dot3MauType100BaseTXFD 1 3 6 1 2 1 26 4 16 1000hd dot3MauType1000BaseTHD 1 3 6 1 2 1 26 4 29 1000fd dot3MauType1000BaseTFD 1 3 6 1 2 1 26 4 30 1000sxhd dot3MauType1000BaseXHD 1 3 6 1 2 1 26 4 21 1000sxfd dot3MauType1000BaseXFD 1 3 6 1 2 1 26 4 22 1000lxhd dot3MauType1000BaseXHD 1 3 6 1 2 1 26 4 21 1000lxfd dot3MauType1000BaseXFD 1 3 6 1 2 1 26 4 22 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 277 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 Ethernet Statistic Descriptions Table 12 37 Ethernet Statistics Attribute Description SNMP Object ID CLI Attribute Name Incoming Octets in The total number of octets received on the iflnOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 10 octets interface including framing characters Incoming Unicast Packets The number of unicast packets received on iflnUcastPkts in ucast pkts the interface 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 11 Discarded Incoming The number of packets which were chosen to iflnDiscards Packets in discards be discarded due to RX FIFO full 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 13 Erroneous Incoming The number of received erred packets iflnErrors 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 14 Packets in errors Outgoing Octets out The total number of octets transmitted out of ifOutOctets octets the interface including framing characters 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 16 Outgoing Unicast Packets The number of unicast packets transmitted ifOutUcastPkts out ucast pkts out of the interface 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 17 Discarded Outgoing The number of outbound
92. 11 2 802 1 1 4 1 4 6 1 1 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 286 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 Attribute CLI Description CLI Object ID Access Default Attribute Name Per VLAN Outgoing The number of valid frames jieee8021QbridgeTpVlanPort RO n a Packets out pkts transmitted by this port to its segment Out from the local forwarding process for Frames this VLAN 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 4 1 4 6 1 2 This object includes bridge management frames originated by this device that are classified as belonging to this VLAN e g MMRP but not MVRP or STP Possible values are 0 264 Per VLAN Dropped The number of valid frames received ieee8021QbridgeTpVlanPortl RO n a Packets drop pkts by this port from its segment that n were classified as belonging to this Discards VLAN and hat Were MISESPHEH due ta yi e160 404 4 6 18 VLAN related reasons This object refers specifically to the IEEE 802 1Q counters for Discard Inbound and Discard on Ingress Filtering Possible values are 0 264 C LAN Registration Table Attributes Table 12 45 C LAN Registration Table Attributes Attribute CLI Description SNMP Object ID Value Access Default Attribute Name Bridge Port The bridge port for the C ieee8021Brid lt ext bridge N A N A VLAN Registration entry geBasePort port list gt The bridge port specified 1 3 111 2 80 2 1 1 2 1 1 4 in the command must match the Component ID 1 2 in
93. 14 18 AWG to connect the power supply to the ODU You should use shielded outdoor Cat5e cables terminated with metallic RJ45 connectors In order to protect indoor equipment you must install surge protection circuits on all copper cables DC and Ethernet on their entrance to the building Install the NetBeam ODU in a location where proper electrical outdoor grounding is readily available Typically the grounding connection is attached directly to the mounting pole If not already present then suitable structure to earth grounding connections must be created before installation Ground the ODU using a minimum quantity of 16AWG grounding cable or according to local electrical code Improper electrical grounding can result in excessive electromagnetic interference or electrical discharge Netronics will not be held responsible for any malfunction or damage in the event that the ODU is not properly grounded Netronics NetPoint Pro Family System Manual 21 Installing the NetBeam System Chapter 2 NetBeam Package Contents A NetBeam link consists of two ODUs and two mounting assemblies The NetBeam package includes the following components e NetBeam 1G1 and M71 NetBeam Package Description Quantit 2G1 y Quantity NetBeam ODU NetBeam ODU including 1ft 1 1 antenna and radome Connecting cable All Weather 3 6 shells Connecting fiber All Weather 1 shells Unit grounding cable 90 cm 1 1 DC cable ter
94. 1G activity Green Link 1G Orange Link 10 100 Off No Link Carrier L 1 4 Blink Orange 10 100 activity NetBeam System Alarms and Events The following table lists all system alarms and events together with their severity possible cause and corrective actions Table 11 1 NetBeam System Alarms and Events Indication Classification Explanation Probable Corrective and Severity Cause Actions Cold Start Event The ODU is re N A N A initializing due to a Power Up or Reset Trap Log action Link Down Alarm The communication Ethernet Ethernet link either the RFor 1 A cable is 1 Check the High one of the Ethernet disconnected cable Trap Log Active Alarm List ports is not operational 2 Configuration connection 2 Check the CLI Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 202 NetBeam Diagnostics Chapter 11 Indication Classification Explanation Probable Corrective and Severity Cause Actions mismatch configuration between the and end ODU and end equipment equipment configuration RF Link RF Link 1 1 Check the Configuration configuration mismatch between sides 2 Isolate the frequency problem using modulation RF loopbacks role etc 2 Line of Sight disruption or antennas not aligned 3 Faulty ODU 3 Check cable c
95. 3 6 1 4 1 31926 2 2 1 4 Outgoing Octets out octets The total number of octets transmitted to the RF link rfOutOctets 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 2 2 1 5 Outgoing Idle Octets out idle octets The total number of octets transmitted to the RF link while idle rfOutldleOctets 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 2 2 1 6 Incoming Packets in pkts The total number of packets received from the RF link rflnPkts 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 2 2 1 7 Incoming Good Packets in good pkts The total number of good packets received from the RF link rflnGoodPkts 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 2 2 1 8 Incoming Erroneous Packets in errored pkts The total number of erred packets received from the RF link rflnErroredPkts 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 2 2 1 9 Incoming Lost Packets in lost pkts The total number of lost packets received from the RF link rflnLostPkts 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 2 2 1 10 Outgoing Packets out pkts The total number of packets transmitted to the RF link rfOutPkts 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 2 2 1 11 Table 12 23 Statistics History for the RF Object usrHistoryObjectindex usrHistoryObjectVariable 1 rflnOctets 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 2 2 1 1 2 rfinidleOctets 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 2 2 1 2 3 rfinGoodOctets 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 2 2 1 3 4 rfinErroredOctets 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 2 2 1 4 5 rfOutOctets 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 2 2 1 5 6 rfOutldleOctets 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 2 2 1 6 7
96. 522 50000 gt eir lt 0 1000 gt ebs lt 1522 100000 gt color mode lt aware blind gt The following is an example of configuring a meter with 5 Mbps CIR and 15 Mbps EIR Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 93 Performing Advanced Configuration Chapter 7 meter configuring set meter 1 cir 5 cbs 9600 eir 15 ebs 100000 color mode blind Index CIR CBS EIR EBS Color Mode 1 1o 50000 30 50000 jaware 2 20 50000 60 50000 jaware Figure 7 5 Meter Setup Binding Classifier and Meter Use the following command to bind specific configured classifier evc to CoS queue and Meter set ingress qos lt evc id 1 31 gt lt cos id 0 7 gt meter lt id 0 248 gt marking lt enable disable gt The following is an example of binding the meter configured above to an evc and cos ingress qos configuring set ingress qos 5 5 meter 1 marking enable Ingress QoS A EN z ICOS meee Mm et Marking enable 2 je 2 lenable im Add Figure 7 6 Ingress COS Setup QoS Scheduling The NetBeam QoS mechanism operates according to the following scheduling mechanisms Egress Queues Strict Priority Strict Priority WFQ Shaper Best Effort Figure 7 7 Scheduling Mechanisms Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 94 Performing Advanced Configuration Chapter 7 e Strict Priority Lower priority packets are served only if all higher priority queues are empty
97. 7 1 1 1 1 string desc a string that identifies the 2 manufacturer s name for the physical entity and should be set to a distinct value for each version or model of the physical entity Contained In The value of entPhysicallndex for entPhysicalContained integer32 integer cont in the physical entity which contains In 0 2147483647 this physical entity A value of 1 3 6 1 2 1 47 1 1 1 1 zero indicates this physical entity 4 is not contained in any other physical entity Note that the set of containment relationships define a strict hierarchy that is recursion is not allowed In the event that a physical entity is contained by more than one physical entity e g double wide modules this object should identify the containing entity with the lowest value of entPhysicallndex Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 230 Using the NetBeam CLI Attribute CLI Attribute Name Class class Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual Description An indication of the general hardware type of the physical entity If no appropriate standard registration identifier exists for this physical entity then the value other 1 is returned If the value is unknown by this agent then the value unknown 2 is returned SNMP Object ID entPhysicalClass 1 3 6 1 2 1 47 1 1 1 1 5 Chapter 12 SNMP Syntax CLI Syntax INTEGER other 1 other unknown chassis backplane contai
98. 88TC is supported on NetBeam 2G systems CLI example Activated by Sync E license set ieee1588 admin up default gt show ieee1588 ieee1588 admin Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 129 Performing Advanced Configuration Chapter 7 ieee1588 operational down ieeel1588 air delay correction 0 ieeel1588 air delay 634 ieee1588 air distance 0 ieee1588 modified packets counter 0 jeee1588 admin default down enables the 1588 TC stamping jeee1588 operational Read Only 1588TC status Will be Up if the 1588 is configured correctly on both sides and both sides time stamp counter are in sync Note that it can take up to 5 minutes till sync is achieved and operational status will be Up jeee1588 air delay correction Manual correction of air delay in nSec Correction may positive or negative jeee1588 air delay Read Only Measured air delay including modem delay in nSec Takes in account air delay correction jeee1588 air distance Read Only Measured air distance in meters Takes in account air delay correction manually changing the air delay correction affects the air distance jeee1588 modified packets counter 0 Number of 1588 packets which passed through the system and stamped The counter is cleared upon reset no option to clear it manually For 1588 phase locking SyncE must be configured for frequency locking even in the absence of SyncE signal over the link Basic SyncE co
99. AN Priority the VLAN tag if present in the 1 1 32 Ibm tx prio transmitted frame dotlagCfmMepTrans mitLbmVlan Priority LBM Transmit Drop Enable bit value to be used 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 enable RC Enable VLAN Drop in the VLAN tag if present in the 1 1 33 disable Eligibility transmitted frame For more dotlagCfmMepTrans Ibm tx drop information about VLAN Drop mitLbmVlanDropEnabl Enable see IEEE 802 1ad e LTM Destination A unicast destination MAC 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 MAC RC 00 00 MAC Address address specifying the target 1 1 38 address in 00 00 Itm dst mac MAC Address Field to be dotlagCfmMepTrans the form 00 00 transmitted This address is used mitLtmTarget NN NN if the value of the column MacAddress NN NN dotlagCfmMepTransmitLtmTarge NN NN tlsMepld is False where N is a hexadecim al number for example 00 AF DD 1E 2D A3 LTM Destination The MA End Point Identifier of 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 0 8191 RC 0 MEPID another MEP in the same MA to 1 1 39 which the LTM is to be sent This dotlagCfmMepTrans Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 255 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 Attribute CLI Description SNMP Object ID Syntax Access Default Attribute Name Itm dst mepid address is used if the value of the mitLtmTargetlsMepld column dotlagCfmMepTransmitLtmTarge tlsMepld is True LTM Destination The destination type indicator for 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7
100. Beam System Chapter 2 Mount the ODU by attaching the interior quick release hook A in place before attaching the exterior hook B The interior hook is the one located farthest from the tightening nut as shown below A Interior Quick Release Hook B Exterior Quick Release Hook C Elevation Position Slot Figure 2 2 Quick Release Hooks 9 Unlock the Azimuth adjustment lock bolts and the elevation adjustment lock bolts 10 Stretch the elevation screw tension band slightly and connect it to its mating tension pin located on the quick release plate Installing the ODU with a Two Foot Antenna This appendix presents the installation instructions of NetBeam ODU with a two foot antenna 1 Install the two foot antenna according to the mounting diagram on the next page Antenna mounting kit installation instructions are also available inside the mounting kit package 2 Remove the protective tape on the antenna feed The two foot ODU is shipped with External ODU adapter attached Outdoor Unit Adaptor Plate for 2 ft ant AD Sz een a as 8 ks P m 3 Lm Eb AL Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 25 Installing the NetBeam System Chapter 2 3 Unpack the two foot ODU and remove the protective cap 4 Attach the ODU to the antenna and tighten the four locking bolts 5 Make sure you install the ODU with the required polarization note the polarization arrow on the back of the ODU
101. Bolt in parallel to the pole Adjustment Bolts must be greased at all time After fine adjustment use tightening torque of 4 Nm on Azimuth Lock Bolts 4PL and 9 Nm on Nut of Elevation Lock Bolts 2PL Tool required 1 2 open end or deep socket wrench SHEET 1 OF 1 3 Installing the NetBeam System Chapter 2 Connecting the Cables Figure 2 3 shows the ODU interfaces There are two or four active Ethernet interfaces depending on HW configuration e NetBeam 1G NetBeam M7 two active Ethernet interfaces Eth1 Eth2 These may be optical Fiber SFP or electrical RJ45 physical interfaces configurable e NetBeam 2G four active Ethernet interfaces Eth1 Eth2 Eth3 Eth4 Ordering options e 2xkElectrical RJ45 2x optical Fiber SFP e 1xElectrical RJ45 3x optical Fiber SFP Figure 2 3 NetBeam Connection Panel Details 1 Electrical Ground Outlet GND 6 Ethernet Cable RJ45 Interface 2 Power Connector Interface PWR 7 Fiber Cable SFP Interface Eth4 3 DVM Probe Interface AUX 8 System LEDs 4 Ethernet Cable RJ45 Interface 9 Reset Button press for more than 8 seconds to restore factory 5 Fiber Cable SFP Interface defaults Figure 2 4 NetBeam DC Power Connector Pin Out Diagram Netronics NetPoint Pro Family System Manual 28 Installing the NetBeam System Chapter 2 Grounding the NetBeam and Cables The location of the electrical ground outlet on the ODU is shown in Figure 2 3 1 Con
102. Chapter 11 You can display Ethernet statistics counters per Ethernet port Default show eth all statistics eth eth0 elapsed time 0000 00 41 17 eth ethO in octets 18835233 eth ethO in ucast pkts 4294967357 eth eth0 in discards 0 eth eth0 in errors 0 eth eth0 out octets 19839102 eth eth0 out ucast pkts 63 eth eth0 out errors 0 eth ethO in mcast pkts 44 eth ethO in bcast pkts 247622 eth eth0 out mcast pkts 24773 eth eth0 out bcast pkts 0 eth eth0 out discards 0 eth eth0 in no rule discards 0 Observe the discard and error counters to evaluate the performance of the Ethernet transmission For detailed explanations of all Ethernet statistics refer to Viewing Ethernet Statistics on page 146 NetBeam System Loopbacks The NetBeam radio uses Ethernet and RF loopbacks designed to enable fault isolation and Ethernet service performance testing e Ethernet Loopback Internal and external loopbacks are performed on the interface testing the local ODU the radio link and the remote ODU e RF Radio Loopback Internal loopback is performed on the ODU s RF output m After activating Loopback it is important to clear all RF and Ethernet statistics in order to receive the most accurate results for analysis Note Use system alarms as well as statistic displays to determine if Loopback testing has passed or failed Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 208 NetBeam Diagnostics Chapter 11 Loopback Diagrams Sy
103. Clock Master Slave Manually set Clock Slave on the port that receives the SyncE clock and Clock Master on the port that transmits the SyncE clock This mode must be used when no SSMs are used on the network Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 128 Performing Advanced Configuration Chapter 7 SyncE Alarms Table 7 3 SyncE Alarms Event Classification Default Severity Destination Reference Clock Event N A Trap ref clock Switch switch Log Reception of QL Alarm Medium Trap generic EEC1 or Worse indicating a previous alarm Log Active element in the chain Alarm List is in holdover or failed Reception of QL Event N A Trap generic better than EEC1 alarm Log Remove Reception of QL EEC1 and Worse from Active Alarm List IEEE 1588v2 Transparent Clock TC In wireless link the compensation of the PDV needs to be done for the entire link including the air interface and not only per node Netronics 1588TC implements one step end to end HW time stamping and distributed TC algorithm to synchronize the two ends of the link The accuracy level of the synchronization correction field between the two sides is lt 100ns and complies with the most stringent accuracy level required accuracy class level 6 on all of the Ethernet ports The 1588TC support is part of the outdoor unit and no additional HW is needed A software license synchronization is required to activate this feature The 15
104. DU Software e Monitoring CLI Sessions e Viewing System Inventory e Upgrading the License Key e Performing Address Translation e Netronics File System SFS e Command Line Scripts e Macro Scripts e MAC Table Limitations e Configuring NTP e Viewing User Activity Log e Access Control List ACL e LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol e DHCP e Managing SNMP e Tacacs Radius e Ping Supported only from CLI Netronics NetPoint Pro Family System Manual 150 Performing System Administration Chapter 9 Configuring Encryption The NetBeam supports 128bit and 256bit AES encryption with Static key This means that the encryption key 32 64 characters long must be inserted manually into both ends of the link If there is an encryption mismatch traffic does not go over the link The encryption license must be enabled in order to configure encryption The NetBeam system supports AES encryption protocol which is capable of delivering encrypted transmission over the link Loading Encryption License Key Encryption is a licensed feature that requires a license for operation Before setting the encryption verify that the encryption license key is available Refer to Upgrading the License Key on page 160 Setting up a Static Key Use the following commands to set up a Static Key Default set encryption encryption static key static key 0123456789abcdef0123456789abcdef Set done encryption The string of either 32 128bits
105. F IC Antenna Modem FPGA CPLD SFP Boot Figure 12 2 Physical Inventory Hierarchy Scheme Overall Product Table 12 10 Overall Product Attribute Value Inventory Index 1 Descriptor Netronics NetBeam 1Gx Contained In 0 Class chassis Parent Relative Position 1 Name NB 1G1 Hardware Revision empty Firmware Revision empty Software Revision empty Serial Number to be read in runtime Manufacturer Name Netronics Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 Attribute Value Model Name NB 1G1 Field Replaceable Unit replaceable Indicator Antenna Table 12 11 Antenna Attribute Value Inventory Index 2 Descriptor Netronics Antenna Contained In 1 Class other Parent Relative Position 0 Name Antenna Hardware Revision empty Firmware Revision empty Software Revision empty Serial Number empty Manufacturer Name Netronics Model Name empty Field Replaceable Unit not replaceable Indicator RF IC Table 12 12 RF IC Attribute Value Inventory Index 3 Descriptor Netronics NB 1G1 RF IC Contained In 1 Class module Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 238 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 Attribute Value Parent Relative Position 1 Name RF IC Hardwa
106. HCP 187 Managing SNMP osiris 189 SNMP Managel Sicistinae aaiae daraa dr eE E vna Eaa Eaa 189 SNMP Agent COMMUNItIES scssseseseseeeccecececceccececececececaeaeaeaaueasasssessseseseees 190 SNMPv3 Users Settings csse ciis deiarna aeaa aeda 191 Tacacst Radiuso MIEL M MOL E UE DIDI 191 Ping Supported only from CLI sessi nan 193 Traceroute Supported Only in CLI cc cc ceccsssceceecssssceceesssceeeeeseseeeceessseseeeeesssaaeeees 194 Traceroute CLI Commands eese sees nnne nnnss 194 Chapter 10 Zero Touch Zero Touch EeatUr e rts ceri onto te ABER RA RA RRMRE Fa LAINE O RXTEYRE THEN CM A GR ER RR KE 195 Zero Touch PredefinitiOns 5 v ritiene Corn iar y era ry nena rie goo A Rua 195 Zero Touch System PrOceSS cccscesssesensecaecececeecesseeseseeaeceeecueeeseeeseeseaesaeeeeeeessesseesees 196 Configure Zero Touch in the CLI esses enne eene nennen nnns 198 Configure Zero Touch in the WEB EM6G c sssccscseccecessessnsnsaececeeescessecsenseeaeeeseeesens 199 Chapter 11 NetBeam Diagnostics The Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Process seeeseseeeeeeeee ennt 201 Net Beam ODU db mE iaa a a EEA Enie AA TEE 202 NetBeam System Alarms and Events cccccccssssssesssssessescssscseseescasessescaecoesaeserssseeesesaseass 202 NetBeam System Statistics cessi
107. M7 Systems Local Site show rf rf operational rf tx state rf rx state rf cinr rf rssi rf channel width rf frequency rf role rf role status rf mode rf alignment status rf lowest modulation rf tx asymmetry rf rx link id rf tx link id rf temperature rf loopback timeout rf loopback rf tx power rf long range mode For example NetBeam 2G Systems Local Site gt show rf rf operational rf tx state rf rx state rf cinr rf rssi rf channel width rf tx frequency rf rx frequency rf role rf role status rf tx mute rf tx mute timeout rf mode rf alignment status rf lowest modulation rf tx asymmetry rf rx link id rf tx link id rf tx temperature rf rx temperature up normal normal 19 43 500 74375 auto slave adaptive qam64 4 1 0 5 inactive qpsk 1 4 0 5 50tx 50rx 0 0 52 60 disabled 5 false up normal normal 24 42 500 72375 82375 auto slave disable 60 adaptive qam16 4 1 0 5 inactive qpsk 1 4 0 5 100tx 100rx 0 0 44 35 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 57 Performing Basic Configuration Using the CLI Chapter 4 rf loopback timeout 60 rf loopback disabled rf tx power 7 rf long range mode false Local Site gt Configuring the Radio Parameters Using the CLI Set rf for NetBeam 1G NetBeam M7 systems frequency 71375 71875 72375 72875 73375 73875 74375 74875 75375 Set rf for NetBeam 2G systems f
108. MS Configuring VLANs This section lists the default VLAN and Port settings and provides instructions for modifying these settings By default the NetBeam system is set to Transparent Bridge Undefined VLAN mode The Transparent Bridge feature enables transparent forwarding of both tagged and untagged traffic by default No configuration or license is necessary for this feature which gives you the flexibility to change your VLANs with no additional configuration necessary in the NetBeam system In addition to the default Transparent Bridge feature you can choose to create VLANs as well as block specific VLANs Transparent Bridge Mode NetBeam s default setting is Transparent Bridge Undefined VLAN In this configuration both tagged and untagged traffic is forwarded transparently No VLAN configuration is required for Undefined VLAN This feature gives you the flexibility to change your VLANs with no configuration necessary on the part of the NetBeam system LI ETH1 C3 HOST S1 ETH2 C4 me emus Dsum Sud Figure 6 3 Undefined VLAN Implementation In Transparent VLAN mode you can use the Eth1 or the Eth2 port for all data and management traffic included both tagged and untagged data Alternatively you can use one of the ports for management and the other port for data including both tagged and untagged data Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 70 NetBeam Networking Configuration default show v
109. Nefronics NetBeam Family Gigabit Ethernet Wireless Solutions NetBeam Family M71 M72 1G1 1G2 2G2 and 2G2 SYSTEM MANUAL This document contains information that is proprietary to Netronics Technologies Inc No part of this publication may be reproduced modified or distributed without prior written authorization of Netronics Technologies Inc This document is provided as is without warranty of any kind Statement of Conditions The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice Netronics shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damage in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this document or equipment supplied with it Information to User Any changes or modifications of equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user s authority to operate the equipment and the warranty for such equipment Copyright 2011 by Netronics All rights reserved Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 2 READ THIS FIRST Important Safety Instructions e Caution 3 g amp S e o 3 S H 3 3 amp S 3 3 amp S E 3 amp S S z cz S amp S S Caution e Caution Read and save these instructions Heed all warnings Follow all instructions Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding Only use attachments accessories specified by the manufacturer Refer a
110. NetBeam receives timing information on Eth 1 from PRC ql 2 and distributes it to all interfaces Thereis no input on the remote NetBeam because the radio link is down Theremote NetBeam switches to holdover mode maintaining the PRC it received previously and distributing it with its own ql ql 11 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 125 GPS Performing Advanced Configuration NetBeam 1G Local Cesium SyncE PRC ql 2 GrandMaster Chapter 7 NetBeam 1G Remote Sync Module host qi PRC ETH1 PHY holdover quii PRC ETHORE PRC holdover FTH2 PHY holdover qi 11 gii Figure 7 23 Typical SyncE Scenario Holdover Due to Radio Failure The configuration for this scenario is Local NetBeam Default gt show ref clock ref clock host prio ref clock host status ref clock host ql actual ref clock host ql config ref clock host ql mode ref clock host ssm cvid ref clock ethl prio ref clock eth1 status ref clock ethl ql actual ref clock ethl ql config ref clock eth1 ql mode ref clock ethl ssm cvid Remote NetBeam Default gt show ref clock ref clock host prio ref clock host status ref clock host ql actual ref clock host ql config ref clock host ql mode ref clock host ssm cvid ref clock ethO0 prio ref clock eth0 status ref clock eth0 ql actual ref clock eth0 ql config ref clock eth0 ql mode ref clock eth0 ssm cvid Netronics NetBeam Family System
111. P table Use the following command to create and modify PEP Virtual Port elements set pep vp lt c comp id list gt sl lt vid list gt cpvid lt vid gt prio 0 7 admit all tagged untagged filter enabled disabled If the PEP Virtual Port entry does not already exist the set pep vp command creates it and assigns the attributes specified Upon creation in the event that an attribute is not explicitly specified the entry is created with the default value for that attribute Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 80 NetBeam Networking Configuration Chapter 6 If the PEP Virtual Port entry already exists then the set pep vp command replaces the attributes that are currently defined for the entry with those specified in the command Note the following conditions for execution The set pep vp command is valid only for those bridge ports which are S component ports Theset pep vp command fails if the port specified belongs to an S component and not a C component The set pep vp command also fails if the S VID specified is not yet defined in the VLAN table Use the following command to display PEP Virtual Port entries show pep vp lt c comp id list gt all all lt bridge port list gt all lt s vid gt info cpvid prio admit filter Use the following command to delete PEP Virtual Port entries clear pep vp lt c comp id list gt all sl all lt vid list gt a
112. PS Admin Status Ethernet Type 1000fd Operational Status up Auto Negotiation enabled v Ethernet Actual Type 1000fd Figure 3 11 Web EMS Quick Configuration Screen Port Section Eth1 You can also configure Ethernet port parameters from the EMS Web Main screen To configure Ethernet port parameters from the EMS Web Main screen 1 Click the icon of the interface you want to configure Figure 3 12 3 Timeout sec 0 Start Rollback Reset m Save Configuration The Interface screen Figure 3 13 contains several additional fields Figure 3 12 Interface Icons on Web EMS Main Screen Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 48 Performing Basic Configuration Using the Web EMS Interface Name Eth1 Description Eth 1 Alias J MAC Address 00 24 a4 01 4a 88 MTU 16384 Admin Status up Oper Status up Last Change 0002 09 51 04 PCP Write Profile ID none PFC Mode disable Figure 3 13 Interface Screen v Ethernet Type Ethernet Actual Type Auto Negotiate Loopback Mode Loopback Timeout Alarm Propagation Network Type Classifier Mode Clock Alarm Suppression Chapter 3 1000fd 100fd enabled disabled 60 disabled customer uni pcp dscp auto disable Admin Status Determines whether the port is enabled up or disabled down The Default value is up Oper
113. Performing Address Translation on page 162 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 CLI command syntax changes to fit the NetBeam object being managed or displayed For specific command syntax and execution details see the information bd that accompanies a particular object starting in CL Managed Object Reference on page 226 Set Commands The Set command is used to create update and modify the characteristics of dynamic objects in the NetBeam configuration and values for a chosen object Examples of dynamic objects are VLANs MEPs and Static MAC Addresses The generic form the Set command is set object name lt object ids gt attribute name lt value gt attribute name lt value gt If a dynamic object does not already exist the Set command creates it and assigns the attributes specified Upon creation in the event that an attribute is not explicitly specified the entry is created with the default value for that attribute If the dynamic object already exists then the Set command will replace the attributes that are currently defined for the entry with those specified in the command If a set command is entered in an incomplete or invalid form when possible the CLI responds with an execution error message that specifies the reason for the error For more information on error handling in the CLI refer to CLI Error Messages on page 224 Show Commands The Show command is us
114. Priority 0 0 0 v Admit oresstemg isase Figure 6 8 Change Port Window 4 In the Port field select the port you want to edit 5 Configure the following Port attributes pvid A vid which will be assigned to an untagged frame or a priority tagged frame the VID is set to O indicating that the frame does not belong to any VLAN and only PCP field is relevant which enters to the bridge through this port The special value undef cannot be used as PVID By default it is set to 1 prio The value which is assigned to the PCP field if an untagged frame arrives through this port For priority tagged frames this field is irrelevant By default it is set to O admit This attribute controls what kinds of frames are allowed into the bridge If itis set to untaggedthen only untagged or priority tagged frames may enter If itis set to tagged then only tagged frames i e those with VID different from zero may enter If itis set to a11 all kinds of frames may enter By default it is set to all Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 78 NetBeam Networking Configuration Chapter 6 filter By default the VLAN configuration is essentially asymmetrical Frames with any VIDs may enter through any port but leave only though a port which is a member in the egress set assigned to a particular VLAN By setting filter to enabled symmetry is introduced in this case a frame can enter through a particular p
115. RF link This chapter includes the following topics e Installation Verification and Testing e NetBeam Commissioning and Acceptance Form Installation Verification and Testing Inspect the following components and confirm their adherence to requirements that are detailed in the accompanying checklist NetBeam Commissioning and Acceptance Form on page 64 ma S amp S Make copies of the NetBeam Commissioning and Acceptance Form on page 64 we and use it as a comprehensive guide to RF link commissioning and acceptance Note Physical Installation Verification This inspection verifies the physical installation of the ODU in accordance with Installing the NetBeam on page 20 e Pole mount installation Netronics NetPoint Pro Family System Manual 62 Commissioning and Acceptance Procedure Chapter 5 e ODU installation e Connectors sealing e Cables installation e Grounding RF Link Test This inspection verifies the RF link status in accordance with Performing Basic Configuration Using the Web EMS on page 39 and Performing Basic Configuration using the CLI on page 53 e RFLEDis green e Management CLI indication RF Operational Up e Receive Signal Strength Indication RSSI achieved in Alignment mode is within 5 dB of the expected value e Carrier to Interference Noise Ratio CINR is 17 or higher e Link configuration modulation mode is in accordance with plan requirements Link Errors Test This ins
116. SNMP Object ID Syntax Attribute Name MD Index MA Index Value to be used as the index of the MA table MD Domain when the management entity wants to create a new entry in that table Entering the MD Index for an MA enables use of the common command structure Index of the MA table dot1agcfmMdMaNextIndex which needs to be inspected to find an available index for row creation An MA Index entry cannot be deleted if it is used as the key in MA MEP Received CCM Presentation Peer MEP Create or LTR DB A value that represents a type and the resulting format of the MD Name The short MA name The type format of this object is determined by the value of the dotlagCfmMaNetNameType object This name must be unique within an MD The interval to be used between CCM transmissions by all MEPs in the MA dotlagCfmMdInde x 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 5 2 1 1 dotlagCfmMalnde X 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 6 1 1 1 dotlagCfmMaNet Format 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 6 1 1 2 dotlagCfmMaNet Name 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 6 1 1 3 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 6 1 1 4 dot1agCfmMaNet CcmInterval Chapter 12 Integer vid string vpnid vid string vpnid lt name according to format gt 3 3ms 10ms 100ms 1s 10s 1min 10min 249 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 Component MA Object Attributes Table 12 27 Component MA Attributes Attribute CLI Description SNMP Object
117. Sender ID TLV from that system Management The TAddress that can be 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 3 1 11 IP Address RO Address mng used to access the SNMP dotlagCfmMepDbMan dotted addr agent of the system Address notation MAC transmitting the CCM Address NN received in the CCM Sender NN NN NN NN ID TLV from that system NN where N is If the related object a hexadecimal dot1agCcfmMepDbManAddr number for essDomain contains the example 00 AF value zeroDotZero this DD 1E 2D A3 object the rest dotlagCfmMepDbManAddr hexadecimal ess must have a zero length string OCTET STRING as a value LTR Object Attributes Table 12 33 LTR Attributes Attribute CLI Description SNMP Object ID Syntax Access Attribute Name MD Index Value to be used as the index dotlagCfmMdIndex Integer N A of the MA table entries for 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 5 the MD when the 2 1 1 management entity wants to create a new entry in that table An entry cannot be created if a corresponding MD Index does not exist MA Index Index of the MA table dotlagCfmMalndex N A dot1agCcfmMdMaNextIndex 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 6 1 1 which needs to be inspected to 1 find an available index for row creation An entry cannot be Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 265 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 Attribute CLI Description SNMP Object ID Syntax Access Attribute Name created if a corresponding MA Index does not exist
118. System Administration Chapter 9 Size Bytes startup config bank 1 18 11 2011 startup configuration bt 5914 04 03 2012 09 28 53 startup counter b l4 05 03 2012 09 45 03 startup debug configu 567 04 03 2012 09 28 53 startup factory configu 178 04 03 2012 09 28 53 From FTP v srv admin 192 168 0 100 d txt Te IScripts d td Figure 9 22 Adding Scripts Viewing Script Content You cannot display script content directly from the CLI To view the content of a script transfer the script to the server and view it with a text editor In the same manner you cannot edit scripts directly on the ODU To edit a script transfer the script to the server and edit it with a text editor Then transfer the new script back to the ODU overwriting the existing script Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 179 Performing System Administration Chapter 9 From To FLASH srv admin 192 168 0 100 d tx Figure 9 23 Copying Scripts Command Line Scripts using the CLI Use the show script command to display the names of all script files stored in the local directory Default gt show script Use the run script command to execute scripts Default gt run script lt script filename gt To add the script text file to the system use an FTP SFTP or TFTP server to transfer the file to the scripts directory under flash flash scripts The following
119. TpFd b Status 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 4 1 2 2 1 3 It belongs to ieee8021QbridgeTpFd b Table 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 4 1 2 2 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual Chapter 12 NN NN NN NN NN NN where NN isa hexadecimal number for example 00 AF DD 1E 2D A3 host ethO eth1 eth2 c1 C2 C3 c4 s1 Learned The port was learned and is being used Self The port indicates which of the device s ports has this address Mgmt The entry has been assigned by management 298 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 ARP Table Attributes Table 12 51 ARP Table Attributes Attribute CLI Description SNMP Object ID Value Attribute Name ARP Interface interface ARP IP Address ARP MAC Address mac addr The index value that uniquely identifies the interface for this entry The interface identified here is identical to that of the MIB s iflndex The IP Address that corresponds to the media dependent physical address The media dependent physical address ipNetToPhysicallf Index 1 3 6 1 2 1 4 35 1 1 ipNetToPhysicalNet Address 1 3 6 1 2 1 4 35 1 3 ipNetToPhysicalPhysA ddress 1 3 6 1 2 1 4 35 1 4 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual where X is a decimal number from 0 to 255 for example 10 0 15 74 NN NN NN NN NN NN where NN isa hexadecimal number for example 00 AF DD 1E 2D 299
120. able Indicator Boot Table 12 18 Boot Attribute Value Inventory Index 8 Descriptor Netronics NB 1G1 Boot Contained In 4 Class module Parent Relative Position 5 Name Boot Hardware Revision empty Firmware Revision empty Software Revision to be read in runtime Serial Number empty Manufacturer Name Netronics Model Name empty Field Replaceable Unit Indicator not replaceable Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 242 Using the NetBeam CLI Radio Object Attributes RF Object Attributes Chapter 12 This section lists configurable RF attributes Table 12 19 and read only RF attributes Table 12 21 separately Table 12 19 Attribute CLI Attribute Name Description The maximum allowed bandwidth expressed in MHz Number of Channels num of channels Operational Frequency frequency The frequency at which the RF operates expressed in MHz The current role of the RF device Role role The current RF device operating mode Mode Selector mode When static mode is specified only certain sub parameter combinations produce a valid result When an invalid combination is specified on the command line the CLI responds with the modulation does not exist in the modulation table CINR Low cinr low The lowest acceptable value for CINR expressed in decibels dB CINR Interval cinr interval
121. agent does not have to provide write access for such entities and may return a zero length string Chapter 12 SNMP Object ID SNMP Syntax entPhysicalSoftwareR character string ev 1 3 6 1 2 1 47 1 1 1 1 10 character string up to 32 chars entPhysicalSerialNum 1 3 6 1 2 1 47 1 1 1 1 11 CLI Syntax character string character string up to 32 chars 234 Using the NetBeam CLI Attribute CLI Attribute Name Physical Manufacturer Name mfg name Physical Model Name model name Field Replaceable Unit Indicator fru Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual Description The name of the manufacturer of this physical component The preferred value is the manufacturer name string actually printed on the component itself if present If the manufacturer name string associated with the physical component is unknown to the agent then this object will contain a zero length string The vendor specific model name identifier string associated with this physical component The preferred value is the customer visible part number which may be printed on the component itself If the model name string associated with the physical component is unknown to the agent then this object will contain a zero length string This object indicates whether or not this physical entity is considered a field replaceable unit by the vendor If this object contains the value true 1 then
122. allation and configuration as simple and trouble free as possible During site selection and preparation always consider the long term needs of both your network and your applications Physical and Environmental Requirements Each NetBeam ODU site should adhere to the following requirements There must be a clear unobstructed line of sight between ODU nodes Netronics NetPoint Pro Family System Manual 20 Installing the NetBeam System Chapter 2 e Caution You must mount the NetBeam ODU on a fixed stable permanent structure A reinforced steel mounting pole is required with a diameter measuring from 2 4 inches 5 10 centimeters Do not mount the NetBeam device on a structure that is temporary or easily moved Doing so may result in poor service or equipment damage You must mount the NetBeam ODU in a site that is easily accessible to authorized personnel and only authorized personnel Operating temperature between 45 and 55 C Relative humidity O to 10096 Maximum altitude 4 500 m Ingress Protection rating IP67 Cabling Requirements Note Ensure that your power connection cable matches the NetBeam power connector pin outs See Figure 2 4 for the DC power connector pin out diagram Install the NetBeam ODU where network connections and optional power cabling are ready for operation and easily accessible All cabling connected to the ODU should be outdoor grade with UV protection Use a two wire cable
123. and creates a Peer MEP set cfm peer mep create 2 2 1 The following command sets the MIP to the lower level set cfm ma comp c3 2 2 vlan 200 mhf creation explicit Checking the CCM Status show cfm peer mep cfm peer mep 1 1 1 2 state ok lt ok or failed cfm peer mep 1 1 1 2 failed ok time 0000 02 22 05 cfm peer mep 1 1 1 2 mac 00 24 a4 00 01 e1 cfm peer mep 1 1 1 2 rdi off cfm peer mep 1 1 1 2 port status unknown cfm peer mep 1 1 1 2 if status unknown cfm peer mep 1 1 1 2 chassis id subtype unknown cfm peer mep 1 1 1 2 mng addr domain unknown Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 112 Performing Advanced Configuration Chapter 7 cfm peer mep 2 2 1 2 state ok cfm peer mep 2 2 1 2 failed ok time 0000 02 22 05 cfm peer mep 2 2 1 2 mac 00 24 a4 00 01 e2 cfm peer mep 2 2 1 2 rdi off cfm peer mep 2 2 1 2 port status unknown cfm peer mep 2 2 1 2 if status unknown cfm peer mep 2 2 1 2 chassis id subtype unknown cfm peer mep 2 2 1 2 mng addr domain unknown Configure the Loopback on the Local ODU The following set of commands sets up the Loopback on the local ODU You must set the destination type mepid or mac and the destination MEP ID determine the number of loopback packets to transmit and enable the Loopback for transmit Enter the following commands on the link level set cfm mep 1 1 1 lbm dst type mepid set cfm mep 1 1 1 lbm dst mepid 2 set cfm mep
124. and interference free licensed E band 71 76 81 86Ghz wireless spectrum enabling fast and efficient frequency and network planning and deployment As a bonus licensing registration processes for this band are cheaper simpler and quicker With 1 Gbps throughput the NetBeam radio future proofs the backhaul network to meet the growth in demand for data capacity from 4G LTE and WiMAX installations Carrier class Ethernet provides QoS and OAM with standards based support for ring mesh and multi add drop topologies assuring resiliency and high availability NetBeam s bandwidth aware QoS mechanism differentiates between multiple services guaranteeing efficient transport of timing signaling voice video web surfing and more Advanced timing over packet handling SyncE IEEE 1588 enables migration to packet based backhaul All outdoor unit eliminates co location fees and costs associated with indoor installations and enables fast deployment at any cell site Low power consumption delivers 8096 energy savings Introduction to NetBeam System Chapter 1 NetBeam Cell Sites Transport Network II Aggregation Node BSC RNC SAE G d BSC RNC Site Figure 1 2 Wireless Backhaul for 2G 3G 4G LTE and WiMAX Networks Ethernet Wireless Backhaul for Business Services and Enterprise Connectivity A low cost high capacity Ethernet wireless solution enables you to rapidly extend your fiber reach beyond your existing fiber
125. anual 197 Zero Touch Chapter 10 1 5 0 0 9931 2013 09 01 10 09 52 no no missing 2 5 0 0 9931 2013 09 01 10 09 52 yes no missing 7 If any errors occur during the execution of the DHCP script the error file uploads to the server restarts the system and sends an SNMP trap Configure Zero Touch in the CLI Begin the configuration with the following command to enable the net config file This allows the unit to be configured through the network default gt set net config config file enable Set done net config Confirm that the config file was successfully enabled default gt show net config net config config file enable net config config error restart delay 60 Then ensure that the DHCP server is enabled default gt set ip 1 ip addr dhcp Set done ip 1 Confirm that that the DHCP server was successfully enabled NB2G1 Left 213 show ip ip 1 ip addr dhcp 0 0 0 0 ip 1 prefix len 0 ip 1 vlan 0 ip 1 default gateway 212 143 164 214 ip 2 ip addr Static 212 143 164 213 ip 2 prefix len 30 ip 2 vlan 0 ip 2 default gateway 212 143 164 214 Move the configured file to the unit through the TFTP Server Run configuration file var sw etc customer default config txt If an error occurs in the script causing the configuration to fail an error message to the TFTP Server and the unit sends an SNMP trap The following command allows you to set the delay time before the system restarts the configuration Ne
126. aseband ASIC Netronics modem baseband ASIC includes the modem FEC engines and Synchronous Ethernet support e Network Processor The network interface consists of integrated 100 1000 Ethernet MAC I F The block is suitable for both copper and fiber interfaces by using the external PHY The networking engine is the heart of the high speed bridge router function The engine receives packets from both Ethernet interfaces and from the modem It is responsible for proper forwarding between these four ports e Host processor integrated with the network processor The general purpose host processor controls the system and the antenna alignment system The processor is integrated with standard peripherals such as memory controller communication I F WD GPIO and motor controller e Antenna Netronics self designed innovative antenna is designed for best price performance ratio Licensing The NetBeam family provides for easy migration to support Gigabit throughput enabling operators to enhance bandwidth capacity on a pay as you grow basis as well as adding features and capabilities according to their networks evolutions You can order the following NetBeam software capacity steps and feature availability depend on your platform e Data rates e Layer 2 networking capabilities OAM and Resiliency e Synchronization Synchronous Ethernet ITU T G 8261 and IEE 1588TC e Encryption Vlan configuration and Provider Brid
127. assignment is based on the PVID and VID Set for the port When this is admitTagged 3 the device will discard untagged frames or Priority Tagged frames received on this port When admitAll 1 untagged frames or Priority Tagged frames received on this port will be accepted This attribute does not affect VLAN independent ieee8021QbridgePort AcceptableFrameTypes 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 4 1 4 5 1 2 All Admit all untagged and priority tagged frames Untagged Admit untagged frames only Tagged Admit tagged frames only RW All Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 281 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 Attribute CLI Attribute Name Description SNMP Object ID Value Access Default Bridge Protocol Data Unit BPDU frames such as MVRP or Spanning Tree Protocol STP However it does affect VLAN dependent BPDU frames such as MMRP If ingress filtering is enabled on the same port then accepting untagged frames only is not compatible since the combination effectively leads to discarding all frames on the port Bridge Port Ingress Filtering filter The ingress filtering state of the port When Enabled the device discards incoming frames for VLANs that do not include the port in its Member Set When disabled the device accepts all incoming frames to the port If untagged frames are admitted on the port then ingress filtering is
128. ate a new entry in that table An entry cannot be created if a corresponding MD Index does not exist dotlagCfmMdIndex 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 5 2 1 1 Integer N A MA Index Index of the MA table dotiagCfmMdMaNextInde x which needs to be inspected to find an available index for row creation An entry cannot be created if a corresponding MA Index does not exist dot1agCfmMalndex 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 6 1 1 1 N A MEPID An integer that is unique for all the MEPs in the same MA that identifies a specific MA End Point An entry cannot be created if a corresponding MEPID does not exist 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 1 1 1 dotlagCfmMepldentifier integer RC Peer MEPID Integer identifying a specific Peer Maintenance Association End Point 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 3 1 1 dotlagCfmMepDbRMep Identifier 1 8191 N A Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 262 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 Attribute CLI Description SNMP Object ID Syntax Access Attribute Name Peer MEP State The operational state of the 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 3 1 2 idle start RO state remote MEP IFF State dotlagCfmMepDbRMepState failed ok machines This state machine monitors the reception of valid CCMs from a remote MEP with a specific MEPID It uses a timer that expires in 3 5 times the length of time indicated by the dot1agCfmMaNetCcmlnterv al object
129. ation each port has a C Bridge component e Provider NNI PNP Provider Network Port S VLANs port as per old Multi Component Bridge Mode configuration when the C Bridge component was removed e Customer NNI CNP Customer Network Port C VLANs port as per new Single Component Bridge Mode configuration It does not have a C Bridge component but it can carry C VLANs and map them to S VLANs using C VLANs Registration By default all Ethernet ports are configured as Customer NNI ports Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 74 NetBeam Networking Configuration set set set set set set Figure 6 6 Et eth eth eth eth eth eth h1 Eth2 Eth3 Eth4 host etho ethl eth2 eth3 eth4 network type network type network type network type network type network type customer nni customer nni customer nni customer nni customer nni customer nni Chapter 6 shows the model of the NetBeam Bridge Single Component Bridge Model 1 Figure 6 6 Single Component Bridge Model VLAN Forwarding Based on Network Type Host EthO RF The ability to pass different types of packets depends on the Ethernet port s network type e Customer UNI CEP can only process C VLANs type 8100 e Provider NNI PNP can only process S VLANs type 88a8 e Customer NNI CNP can only process C VLANs type 8100 VLAN Configuration Transparent Bridge NetBeam s default setting is Transparent Bridge In this
130. ayed for all existing objects Display Formats Both line by line and table methods are available for displaying attributes The method used depends upon the object being displayed Line by line per attribute displays the objects in the form lt object name gt lt object id gt lt attribute name gt lt value gt Note that multiple lt object ids gt may be displayed using this form The Table display method presents the information in blocks and omits the object name and IDs asin the form lt attribute name gt lt attribute name gt lt attribute name gt lt value gt lt value gt lt value gt Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 217 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 Clear Commands The Clear command is used to reset or delete the specified values for a chosen object The generic form of the Clear command is clear object name object ids attribute name Nearly all clear commands require that at least one object identifier follow the object name in the command line Alternatively an object identifier may be replaced on the command line with the word a11 which typically will be interpreted as the whole range or the whole set of identifiers for the specified object Reset Commands There are two Reset commands used in the NetBeam system Reset commands are used exclusively during initialization or reboot activities Reset RF Resetting the RF returns the radio and modem hardware to its default setting
131. b based local and remote management e Extremely high reliability with high MTBF e Designed for ultra low MTTR without the need for antenna realignment Green Design e Zero footprint all outdoor extremely light weight Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 15 Introduction to NetBeam System Chapter 1 e Ultra low power consumption e Standard IEEE 802 3 at Power over Ethernet PoE Quick and Easy Installation e Rapid and flexible deployment e Precise antenna alignment e Minimal site preparation Security e Advanced AES encryption and security e Narrow and secure beam width Adaptive Bandwidth Coding and Modulation The NetBeam family implements hitless errorless adaptive bandwidth coding and modulation adjustment to optimize the over the air transmission and prevent weather related fading from disrupting traffic on the link The NetBeam can gain up to 21 dB in link budget by dynamically adapting Modulation FEC coding rates and channel bandwidth dropping the traffic according to the QoS priority see Configuring Quality of Service on page 87 99 99 500Mbps Posonii x y 25 L m a nternet email background traffic 99 995 auk d 26 3 min amp lud 7 Streaming media interactive traffic 99 999 5 3 min Voice synchronization real time traffic signaling and control Figure 1 4 Hitless Adaptive Bandwidth Coding and Modulation NetBeam Product Family NetBeam 1G NetBeam M7 NetBeam 2G
132. ber from 0 to 255 for example 10 0 15 74 All IP addresses in the table must be different prefix len ip prefix a number from 0 to 32 By default no route is defined To set a static route use the following command Local Site set route 1 dest 192 168 0 64 prefix len 30 next hop 192 168 0 66 To set a single default gateway use the following command When single IP is used and a static route is not used you may configure a default IP gateway In such case use 0 0 0 0 as the destination network with pre ix len 0 set route 1 dest 0 0 0 0 prefix len 0 next hop 192 168 0 254 To display all of the currently configured routes and their attributes usethe show route command Local Site show route ip 1 dest 0 0 0 0 ip 1 prefix len O0 ip 1 next hop 192 168 0 254 Configuring Radio Parameters Using the CLI This section lists and describes the CLI commands you need to configure and display radio parameters Usethe set rf command followed by the name of the parameter you want to configure to configure the ODU s radio parameters For example Local Site set rf tx power 3 Local Site set rf role auto Local Site set rf mode adaptive Displaying Radio Parameters and Status Using the CLI Use the show rf command to display the ODU s current radio status and parameter settings Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 56 Performing Basic Configuration Using the CLI Chapter 4 For example NetBeam 1G NetBeam
133. c4 c4 s1 fdb id A single FID number from 1 to 64 vid A single VID number from 1 to 4094 lt mac addr gt A MAC address in the form NN NN NN NN NN NN where N is a hexadecimal number e g 00 AF DD 1E 2D A3 lt ip addr gt A standard dotted notation IP address e g 10 0 15 74 lt ip mask gt The IP address mask i e the number of bits that constitute the IP network address prefix lt qid list gt A range of numbers from 1 to 8 lt hist range gt A list of ranges of history interval numbers from 0 to 95 The notation covers comma separated lists of the numbers within the specified range as well as a range of numbers separated by a hyphen e g 5 25 For details refer to Designating Indexed Objects on page 2211 CLI Command Types The CLI uses a limited number of commands to create maintain and monitor NetBeam configuration Table 12 3 CLI Command Types To perform this operation use this CLI Command Create update or modify an object Set Display the characteristics or values of an object Show Reset or delete specified characteristics or values of an Clear object Reset the RF or System Reset The following sections describe the generic use of these routine CLI commands When performing non routine activities some additional commands are used including copy run and accept See e g Upgrading the ODU Software on page 160 and
134. ce Setting this attribute to enabled causes the auto negotiation signaling ability of the interface to be operational Setting this attribute to disabled causes the auto negotiation signaling ability of the interface to be non operational and no auto negotiation signaling will be performed In such a case the MAU type is forced to the value that has been assigned in the eth type attribute Loopback Mode loopback mode Loopback mode operation Loopback Timeout loopback timeout Loopback timeout expressed in seconds Chapter 12 SNMP Object ID ifMauAutoNegAdmi 1 Enabled i 2 Disabled Status 1 3 6 1 2 1 26 5 1 1 1 Part of ifMauAutoNegTabl e 1 3 6 1 2 1 26 5 1 disabled external internal Integer Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual Enabled Disabled Disabled 272 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 Attribute CLI Description SNMP Object ID Value Attribute Name Alarm Alarm propagation The possible alarm Disabled Propagation mode is used to define propagation values are Mode alarm system behavior in case propagation of a link failure Disabled No propagation is performed Backward The Ethernet link is set to down if the radio link is down or if a Peer Eth Down notification has been received at the radio interface Forward A Peer Eth Down notification is sent to the other end of the radio link if the Ethernet link is down Bo
135. ce permission enable license encryption status enable license encryption permission enable license data rate status 500 license data rate permission 1000 license resiliency status disable license resiliency permission disable to activate the license Default gt set license data rate status 1000 Set done license Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 161 Performing System Administration Chapter 9 Status Permission Resiliency enable X enable OAM enable v enable SyncE enable Y enable Encryption enable v enable Data Rate 1000 1000 Figure 9 9 Advance Setting Screen License Section Performing Address Translation The ARP table is used to map between IP addresses and physical addresses Use the following command to create and modify entries in the ARP table set arp ip address lt mac address gt If the ARP entry does not already exist the set arp command creates it and assigns the attributes specified Upon creation in the event that the interface address or the default router address is not specified the entry is created with the default value that has been defined for the VLAN If the ARP entry already exists then the set arp command replaces the attributes that are currently defined for the entry with the value specified in the command Use the following command to display ARP entries show arp lt ip address gt ARP 192 168 0 99 00 05 1b 95 30 7e IP Address _ MAC A
136. cir cir ooooo Update Egress Qos Interface cos Weight CIR Color Drop etho 2 0 Bina 96 Performing Advanced Configuration Chapter 7 Shaper Shaper is used to control traffic flows in order to optimize or guarantee performance and improve latency by limiting the maximum bandwidth of certain flows to maintain fairness and to assure SLA You must set the Committed Information Rate to a value between 1 1000 Mbps Table 7 2 provides an example of Shaper Table 7 2 Shaper Example Radio Rate 320 Mbps Stream Stream rate H Queue CIR Expected Rate Stream rate 60 SP CoS 7 NA 60 Stream rate 60 SP CoS 6 NA 60 Stream rate 60 CIR CoS 5 50 50 Stream rate 45 CIR CoS 4 40 40 Stream rate 15 CIR CoS 3 30 30 Stream rate 20 CIR CoS 2 20 20 Stream rate 40 CIR CoS 1 10 10 Stream rate 70 BE CoS 0 0 50 Total 370 The following is an example of Shaper Strict Priority configuration scheduler configuring set scheduler mode priority shaper egress qos configuring set egress qos ethO0 1 color drop blind weight 1 cir 10 set egress qos eth0 2 color drop blind weight 2 cir 20 set egress qos eth0 3 color drop blind weight 4 cir 30 set egress qos eth0 4 color drop blind weight 6 cir 40 set egress qos eth0 5 color drop blind weight 8 cir 50 Refer to Figure 7 8 WFQ Shaper Setup for configurat
137. cli tech run sw immediate no timeout Dec 23 09 06 36 sw cad User cli admin copy running configuration startup configuration Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 184 Performing System Administration Chapter 9 Dec 23 09 13 09 sw cad User cli admin clear log Dec 24 02 36 48 sw cad User cli admin set rf mode alignment Dec 24 02 44 34 sw cad User cli admin set license data rate status 1000 Access Control List ACL The ACL is list of authorized IP s attached to the Host object and are the only permitted one to access the ODU The Max number of IP s in the ACL is eight different IP s If no entry is specified the Host allows access from all IP addresses Management Access ji IP Address Prefix Length 1 0 0 0 0 0 IP Address Prefix Length Figure 9 25 Web EMS ACL Window ACL configuration using the CLI CLI gt show access list access list 1 ip addr 0 0 0 0 access list 1 prefix len 0 CLI gt set access list set access list index ip addr value prefix len lt value gt index integer 1 8 CLI gt clear access list all access list 1 cleared CLI gt Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 185 Performing System Administration Chapter 9 LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol The Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP is an unidirectional neighbor discovery protocol It enables the NetBeam to discover other network elements that are connected to it This feat
138. command replaces the attributes that are currently defined for the entry with those specified in the command Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 82 NetBeam Networking Configuration Chapter 6 Note the following conditions for execution of the set cvlan reg command The set cvlan reg command is valid only for bridge ports that are external C component ports host ethO eth1 and eth2 The set cvlan reg command fails if the port specified belongs to an S component and not a C component The set cvlan reg command also fails if the C VID specified is not yet defined in the VLAN table Use the following command to display C VLAN Registration table entries show cvlan reg lt c comp id list gt all lt ext bridge port list gt all lt vid list gt all info svlan untag cep untag pep Use the following command to delete C VLAN Registration table entries clear cvlan reg lt c comp id list gt all lt ext bridge port list gt all lt vid list gt all VLAN to SNMP ifTable Whenever a VLAN is associated with Component c1 an entry in the SNMP ifTable is automatically created for that VLAN When the VLAN is deleted the corresponding ifTable entry is also deleted Forwarding Data Base FDB The Forwarding Data Base FDB enables access to general parameters of the FDB Address table which specifies configuration and control information for each Filtering Database currently operating on the
139. covery Fault Detection A Continuity Check protocol detects both connectivity failures and unintended connectivity between service instances heartbeat Each MEP can periodically transmit a multicast Connectivity Check Message CCM announcing the identity of the MEP and its MA and tracks the CCMs received from the other MEPs Path Discovery The path is determined by the linktrace L2 Trace Route Linktrace messages LTM are multicast from the originating MEP to the target MAC MIP or MEP MEP ID Linktrace Replies LTR are unicast from the target or MIPs on route to the originating MEP Fault Verification and Isolation A Loopback protocol performs fault verification typically after fault detection An MEP can be ordered to transmit a unicast Loopback Message LBM to an MEP or MIP in the MA The receiving MP responds by transforming the LBM into a unicast Loopback Reply LBR sent back to the originating MEP Fault Notification and Recovery When an MEP detects a connectivity fault in its MA CCM is not received or an invalid CCM is received it sends an SNMP trap and enters a log entry The network administrator responds to a fault notification by categorizing isolating and resolving the connectivity fault For information on troubleshooting procedures refer to NetBeam Diagnostics on page 201 Working with Maintenance Domains A Maintenance Domain MD is a part of a network that is controlled by a single operator and used
140. ctet string s fileSessionUser 1 octet strinc noam 6E 6F 61 6D hex filesessionRowStatus 1 integer createAndGo 4 Select file5esslonUser 1 Remote SNMP Agent 192 168 1 131 At OID to Set 0007 s 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 18 1 6 1 o Value to Set nam Jse Syntax nteger32 Timeticks Counter64 Ulnteger32 IP address Opaque Counter32 OID Nsapaddr Gauge32 Octets Bits OOS sa SNMPv Figure 9 15 fileSessionUser Settings To enter fileSessionLocalParams settings 1 Double click the fileSessionLocalParams row 2 Enterthe following settings e Remote SNMP Agent The IP address of the ODU connected to the MIB Browser e OID to set x x x x x 1 as the next object in table e Value to set Enter the required MO string e string mo mo id fromz time toz time Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual o x Name Syntax Value fileSessionServer 1 octet string 192 168 1 15 31 39 32 2E 31 36 123456 31 32 33 34 35 36 hex fileSessionLocalParams 1 octet string mo eth ethO 6D 6F 3D 22 65 7 fileSessionRemotePath 1 octet string ETHOS zip 45 54 48 30 53 2E 7A 173 Performing System Administration Chapter 9 e mo id Mandatory parameter in CLI format e rf e eth host ethO eth1 eth2 eth3 eth4 e vlan cl c2 c3 c4 c5 c6 s1 undef 1 4094 e from Request for history from t
141. ctivity Fault Management CFM is an Ethernet layer operation administration and management OAM protocol designed to monitor and troubleshoot networks CFM enables you to detect verify and isolate connectivity failures in virtual bridged local area networks A Maintenance Domain MD is a part of a network that is controlled by a single operator and used to support the connectivity between service access points There are eight hierarchical Maintenance Domain Levels MD Level Each CFM layer supports OAM capabilities independently with the customer at the highest level the provider in the middle and the operator at the lowest level Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 101 Performing Advanced Configuration Chapter 7 CFM is designed to be transparent to the customer data transported by the network and to provide maximum fault coverage These capabilities are used in networks operated by multiple independent organizations each with restricted management access to each other s equipment CFM entities support an individual service instance as Maintenance Association End Points MEPs are configured to create a Maintenance Association MA The MA monitors connectivity provided by that instance through the Maintenance Domain Maintenance Association Intermediate Points MIPs are the intermediate points in a specific MA or MD The major features of CFM are fault detection path discovery fault verification fault isolation and fault re
142. d at the device works only for flash and eprom available to all types of users Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 164 Performing System Administration Chapter 9 copy from url to Copy file url root admin and super are allowed to copy from any device to any device Tech and user are allowed to copy files from the local devices namely flash ram eprom to the network devices namely ftp but not vice versa they are not allowed to copy files between the local devices Works only for flash available only for root admin and super Displaying the List of Stored Files The command dir displays the list of the stored files in table format Num Size date time name Where e Numz The sequential number e Size File size in bytes e data Storage data e time Storage time e name File name SFS Example for Backup Restore of Configuration file Backup the configuration file startup configuration txt to your PC CLI copy flash startup configuration txt ftp userl pass0192 168 0 222 backup txt finished Restore the Startup configuration back into the ODU from the PC CLI gt copy ftp userl pass80192 168 0 222 backup txt flash startup configuration txt finished FTP server address 192 168 0 222 Username user1 Password pass Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 165 Performing System Administration Chapter 9 Default gt dir flash Num Size Date Time Name
143. d relevant for s vlans only string Returns a detailed list of commands that begin with a particular character string For example Default set vlan returns Default set vlan comp id list lt vid list gt fdb id lt fdbid gt egress bridge ports gt untagged lt bridge ports gt where lt bridge ports gt are port names or none fdbid in range 1 64 and relevant for s vlans only Following printout the CLI prompts you with the command that was input Default set vlan xxx Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 223 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 Feature Description string tab Automatically completes a specific command name For example Default set vl tab Default set vlan Default se vl 33 e Default set vlan 33 egress If more than one command matches the string that you entered the CLI indicates that an ambiguous command has been entered Note that the autocompletion feature does not function for indexes MAC addresses or IP addresses or Help Returns a list of top level CLI commands only without a string CLI Error Messages NetBeam CLI issues three types of error messages Ambiguous command This error occurs when the command entered can only be partially interpreted If possible following the error message a help syntax line is returned to assist you in correcting the command For example Default sh i SAmbiguous
144. ddress Status Add Figure 9 10 ARP Screen Use the following command to delete ARP entries and clear their associated statistics Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 162 Performing System Administration Chapter 9 clear arp lt ip address gt Table 12 51 on page 299 lists and describes the ARP table attributes Netronics File System SFS Understanding SFS With SFS all files can be listed and classified binary text file and so on including files on remote servers SFS minimizes the required prompting for many commands such as the copy CLI command You can enter all of the required information in the command line rather than waiting for the system to prompt you For example to copy a file to an FTP SFTP or TFTP server you can specify the specific location on the device of the source file the specific location of the destination file on the FTP SFTP or TFTP server and the username and password to use when connecting to the FTP SFTP or TFTP server Alternatively you can enter the minimal form of the command SFS enables you to navigate to different directories and list the files in a directory Specifying Files Using URLs Specifying Files on Network Servers To specify a file on a network server use one of the following forms ftp username password Location subdirectory filename The location can be an IP address or a host name The file path directory and filename is specified relative
145. dicate that the radio link is operating without errors Radio errors observed in these indicators do not mean necessarily frame loss on the Ethernet service The ARQ Automatic Repeat Request algorithm uses selective repeat retransmission to eliminate radio BER The arq in loss and arq out loss indicate frame loss over the radio that is noticed by the Ethernet service For detailed explanations of all RF statistics refer to Viewing Radio Statistics on page 140 VLAN Statistics You can display statistic counters of each NetBeam component per VLAN Default gt gt show vlan all statistics component vlan port in pkts out pkts drop pkts elapsed time c1 1 host 0 0 0 0000 00 00 32 c1 100 host 96 0 0 0000 00 00 32 c2 1 etho 0 0 0 0000 00 00 32 c2 100 ethO 100 127 0 0000 00 00 32 c2 110 etho 0 28601 0 0000 00 00 32 c2 120 etho 0 28601 0 0000 00 00 32 c2 130 etho 0 57180 0 0000 00 00 32 c3 1 ethl 0 0 0 0000 00 00 32 c3 110 ethl 28601 0 0 0000 00 00 32 c3 120 ethl 28601 0 0 0000 00 00 32 c3 130 ethl 71518 0 0 0000 00 00 32 c4 1 eth2 0 0 0 0000 00 00 32 c4 100 eth2 224 196 0 0000 00 00 32 Observe the in pkts out pkts and dropped pkts for each VLAN Note that packets may be dropped due to traffic exceeding the radio link s maximum bandwidth For detailed explanations of all VLAN statistics refer to Viewing VLAN Statistics on page 143 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 207 NetBeam Diagnostics Ethernet Statistics
146. dropped or queued depending on the packet s drop probability Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 98 Performing Advanced Configuration Chapter 7 WRED Parameters e Minimum and Maximum Thresholds When the system uses color aware configuration it requires the use of thresholds per color green and yellow When the system does not use color aware configuration blind mode it uses one set the Green set of thresholds The difference between the maximum threshold and the minimum threshold should be large enough to avoid global synchronization of TCP hosts which can occur as multiple TCP hosts reduce their transmission rates If the difference is too small many packets may be dropped at the same time resulting in global synchronization e p the average factor n is the user configurable exponential weight factor The previous average is more important for the higher n values Peaks and Lows in queue length are smoothed by a high value Lower n values allow the value of the average queue size to remain similar to the value of the close to the current queue size If the value of n is too high WRED does not react to congestion Packets are sent or dropped as if WRED is not enabled e Packet Drop Probability The mark probability denominator is the fraction of packets dropped when the average queue size reaches the maximum threshold For example if the denominator is 512 one out of every 512 packets is dropped when the ave
147. dx list lt ma idx list gt peer mepid list gt Use the following command to display Peer MEP information show cfm peer mep creat lt md idx list gt all lt ma idx list gt all lt peer mepid list gt all Use the following command to delete a Peer MEP entry This command causes automatic deletion of entries in the Peer MEP DB for all MEPIDs that have entries in MEP table and this Peer MEP ID clear cfm peer mep create lt md idx list gt all lt ma idx list gt all lt peer mepid list gt all CFM Peer MEP a Port Status no port no ir no port no ir IE failed 0000 00 38 00 00 00 0 unknown failed 0000 00 38 00 00 00 0 unknown Delete Figure 7 17 CFM Peer MEP Setup Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 107 Performing Advanced Configuration Chapter 7 Working with CCM Messages An MEP can periodically transmit a multicast Connectivity Check Message CCM announcing the identity of the MEP and its MA The MEP also tracks CCMs received from the other MEPs The following information is displayed per CCM message stored e Eth Source Address e VLAN Priority PCP e Drop Eligibility e VLAN ID e MD Level e Version e RDI e CCM Interval e Sequence Number e Counters TxFCf RxFCb TxFCb e f present e Sender Chassis Subtype and ID e Management Address Domain e Management Addres
148. e 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 4 1 4 3 1 1 defined in the Bridge Component table Table 12 38 VLAN ID The VLAN ID referring to this VLAN leee8021QbridgeVlanStaticVI N A 1 an Index 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 4 1 4 3 1 2 Egress Ports Set The set of ports that are permanently ieee8021QbridgeVlanStaticEg RC Empty egress assigned by management to the ress egress list for this VLAN Only those Ports ports that belong to the 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 4 1 4 3 1 4 corresponding component can be included in the set Untagged Ports Set The set of ports that should transmit ieee8021QbridgeVlanStatic RC Empty Untagged egress packets for this VLAN as UntaggedPorts untagged This set is allowed only for 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 4 1 4 3 1 4 S VLANs This set must be subset of the Egress Ports Set attribute FDB ID fdb id The ID of the filtering database used ieee8021QBridgeVlanFdbld RC 1 for this VLAN Possible values are 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 4 1 4 2 1 4 1 64 Per VLAN Incoming The number of valid frames received ieee8021QbridgeTpVlanPortl RO n a Packets in pkts by this port from its segment that were classified as belonging to this VLAN Note A frame received on this port is counted by this object only if it is for a protocol being processed by the local forwarding process for this VLAN This object includes received bridge management frames that are classified as belonging to this VLAN e g MMRP but not MVRP or STP n Frames 1 3 1
149. e cfm mep 2 2 1 mac cfm mep 2 2 1 high defect cfm mep 2 2 1 defects cfm mep 2 2 1 ccm seq errors cfm mep 2 2 1 ccm tx cfm mep 2 2 1 lbm tx result cfm mep 2 2 1 lbm tx sn cfm mep 2 2 1 lbm next sn cfm mep 2 2 1 lbr in order cfm mep 2 2 1 lbr out of order cfm mep 2 2 1 lbr tx cfm mep 2 2 1 ltm next sn cfm mep 2 2 1 ltr unexpected cfm mep 2 2 1 ltm tx result cfm mep 2 2 1 ltm tx sn cfm mep 2 2 1 lm cfm mep 2 2 1 lm interval cfm mep 2 2 1 dm cfm mep 2 2 1 dm interval cfm mep 2 2 1 ais generate cfm mep 2 2 1 ais period cfm mep 2 2 1 ais level cfm mep 2 2 1 ais suppress cfm mep 2 2 1 ais defects Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual Chapter 7 mac rem err xcon 250 1000 00 00 00 00 00 00 2 mepid 10 0 0 enable 00 00 00 00 00 00 1 mac 64 tx idle tx idle fngReset 00 24 a4 00 07 5a none 1948 ok 9 10 10 0 0 0 0 unknown 0 disabled 10s disabled 10s disabled 1s 7 enabled none 115 Performing Advanced Configuration Configuring the Link Trace Chapter 7 There are five indices The first three are the MEP the fourth is the index number of the LTR packet each LTR is one packet and the fifth is the number of replies according to their order of arrival Where several elements answer you must check the TTL to identify the trace Enter the following on the link level set cfm mep 1 1 1 ltm dst type mepid set cfm mep 1 1 1 ltm dst mepid 2 set cfm mep 1 1 1 ltm tx
150. e 1 prefix len 0 next hop 192 168 1 254 Set done route 1 CLI gt CLI gt show ip ip 1 ip addr static 192 168 1 151 ip 1 prefix len 23 ip 1 vlan 0 ip 1 default gateway 192 168 1 254 CLI gt The following is an example of setting IP amp DGW using DHCP server Currently supported only from CLI CLI gt set ip 2 ip addr dhcp Set done ip 2 CLI gt show ip 2 ip 2 ip addr dhcp 192 168 0 36 ip 2 prefix len 23 ip 2 vlan 0 ip 2 default gateway 0 0 0 0 CLI gt CLI gt set route 1 prefix len 0 next hop 192 168 1 254 Set done route 1 CLI gt show ip 2 ip 2 ip addr dhcp 192 168 0 36 ip 2 prefix len 23 ip 2 vlan 0 ip 2 default gateway 192 168 1 254 CLI gt Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 188 Performing System Administration Chapter 9 Managing SNMP The NetBeam supports SNMPv2 and SNMPv3 SNMP managers and users can be configured SNMP Managers The following command sets the SNMP Trap Destination lists set snmp mng lt ip addr list gt udp port lt 0 65535 gt security name lt string gt snmp version v2 v3 set snmp mng 1 5 ip addr value udp port lt 0 65535 gt snmp version v2 v3 security name lt value gt engine id lt value gt The security name is the same as the trap community name in SNMP2 and it is the same as the user name in SNMP3 The default udp port is 162 The default security name trap community is public The default
151. e Weighted Fair Queuing WFQ Weights can be assigned to the radio queues assuring fairness between the queues e Shaper Sets the CIR Committed Information Rate i e the maximum rate of the queues with Strict Priority or WFQ The default scheduling mode is Strict Priority When you configure the egress cos color drop blind or aware can be configured Weighted Fair Queue WFQ Weighted Fair Queuing WFQ can be used to provide different rates to different flows while maintaining fairness in order to avoid starvation WFQ is a data packet scheduling technique that provides different scheduling priorities to statistically multiplexed data flows If the link data rate is R weights of N data flows are W1 W2 Wn the i th data flow will achieve an average data rate of R Wi W1 W2 Wn WFQ explicitly considers data queue and by regulating the weights dynamically you can utilize WFQ to control the QoS WFQ can only be configured for ETHO queues 1 through 5 The highest queues 6 and 7 are Strict Priority queues and the lowest queue 0 is on a best effort basis Table 7 1 provides an example of WFQ Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 95 Performing Advanced Configuration Table 7 1 Weighted Fair Queue Example with NetBeam M7 Chapter 7 Radio Rate 320 Mbps Stream Stream rate 4 Queue Weight Expected Rate 1 60 SP CoS 7 NA 60 2 60 SP CoS 6 NA 60 3 60 WFQ
152. e default configuration the startup configuration must be removed and the ODU rebooted You can clear the startup configuration with the clear startup configuration command or click Restore to Default in the Commands section of the Advanced Settings screen of the Web EMS Default gt clear startup configuration startup configuration cleared On the next startup after this command is executed the NetBeam system reverts to the hard coded factory default parameters Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 152 Performing System Administration Chapter 9 Pressing the ODU s reset push button on the AUX port for more than five seconds resets the ODU and restores the default configuration Rollback Operations You can roll back system configurations This is a safety measure to prevent unwanted system changes in the event that a loss of communication occurs while performing configuration activities The Rollback timeout function reloads the saved startup configuration in the event that no command is entered within a predefined timeout period A Rollback timeout is especially recommended when configuring remote elements that are being managed over the link To specify the Rollback timeout period use the following command set rollback timeout duration in seconds When Rollback is used a timer runs and restarts whenever a CLI command is entered In the event that no CLI command is entered within the timeout period the system automa
153. e is no failure in the ring Using ERP NetBeam provides protection and recovery switching within 50 ms for typical rings The ERP mechanism uses a very small percentage of total available bandwidth Figure 7 25 illustrates the basic ERP protection mechanism In normal ring operation the RPL is blocked In a failure condition the failed link is blocked R APS messages are sent from the nodes adjacent to the failed links in order to unblock the RPL and an FDB flush is performed on all ring nodes as necessary Figure 7 25 Basic ERP Protection Mechanism Supported ERP Features Among the ERP features supported by the NetBeam are Backwards compatibility to previous versions Revertive and non revertive behavior Flush logic with the Node ID and BPR Blocked Port Reference mechanism Administrative commands manual and forced switch clear Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 131 Performing Advanced Configuration Chapter 7 Ability to block RPL at both ends of the link RPL owner and RPL neighbor Multiple logical ERP instances over a given physical ring Link failure detection can be based over CCM s or Physical link down By default the failure detection based on link down detection Using CCM s for failure detection required MEP settings 300Hz every 3 3 ms for sub 50ms switchover ERP Ring Commands To set a ring use the following command Default gt set ring set ring lt ring index
154. e key in MA MEP Received CCM Presentation Peer MEP or LTR DB Each MD has a unique name This facilitates easy identification of administrative responsibility for each Maintenance Domain Represents a type and the resulting format of the MD Name Can be up to 256 characters Represents the Maintenance Domain Level Enumerated value indicating whether the management entity can create MHFs MIP Half Function for this MD Enumerated value indicating what if anything is to be included in the Sender ID TLV 21 5 3 transmitted by MPs configured in this MD SNMP Object ID dotlagCfmMdIndex 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 5 2 1 1 dotlagCfmMdNam e 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 5 2 1 1 dotlagCfmMdForm at 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 5 2 1 2 dotlagCfmMdMdL evel 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 5 2 1 4 dotlagCfmMdMhf Creation 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 5 2 1 5 dotlagCfmMdMhfl d Permission 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 5 2 1 6 Chapter 12 Integer dns like mac and unit string name according to format gt dns like mac and unit string lt name according to format gt none default explicit none chassis mgmg chassis mgmg 248 Using the NetBeam CLI Maintenance Association MA Object Attributes MA Format format MA Name name Interval interval Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual Table 12 26 MA Attributes Attribute CLI Description
155. e the following command to configure NTP set ntp lt idx gt server lt ip addr gt tmz 12 14 Use the following command to display the NTP settings show ntp lt idx gt all server tmz info tmz Time Zone Shift ntp 1 server 192 168 0 222 ntp 1 secondary server 020010 ntp 1 tmz S2 Right Master Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 183 Performing System Administration Chapter 9 Use the following command to clear the NTP settings set ntp 1 server 0 0 0 0 tmz 0 NTP a Server 0 0 0 0 Secondary Server 0 0 0 0 Timezone o v Figure 9 24 NTP Screen Viewing User Activity Log The ODU stores a log of all activities performed on the ODU Information recorded e Date Time Type CLI SNMP User Name and the command e Upon execution of each SNMP set request a CLI command functionally equivalent to the SNMP set request will be constructed and added to the log e Incase of SNMPv2 the write community name will be put into the log as the user name e Incase of SNMPv3 the message user name will be put into the log Example Left 13 gt show user activity log Dec 23 08 09 44 sw cad User cli admin set rf tx mute enable Dec 23 08 10 05 sw cad User cli admin set rf tx mute disable Dec 23 08 12 24 sw cad User cli admin clear log Dec 23 08 16 08 sw cad User cli admin copy sw ftp 192 168 0 254 pub netronics uimage 40 5444 Dec 23 08 45 48 sw cad User
156. eader values ignored Precedence Priority between classifiers Multiple and overlapping classifiers rules may be configured In such case the precedence value will determine the priority between the overlapping classifier rules The default system configuration is priority based on Vlan pBits PCP on all interfaces classifier cos configuring set classifier cos 1 interface host ethO0 ethl eth2 eth3 eth precedence 1 vid 0 4094 pcp 0 ip cos dont care cos 0 set classifier cos 2 interface host ethO0 ethl eth2 eth3 eth precedence 1 vid 0 4094 pcp 1 ip cos dont care cos 1 set classifier cos 3 interface host ethO0 ethl eth2 eth3 eth precedence 1 vid 0 4094 pcp 2 ip cos dont care cos 2 set classifier cos 4 interface host ethO0 ethl eth2 eth3 eth precedence 1 vid 0 4094 pcp 3 ip cos dont care cos 3 set classifier cos 5 interface host ethO0 ethl eth2 eth3 eth precedence 1 vid 0 4094 pcp 4 ip cos dont care cos 4 set classifier cos 6 interface host ethO0 ethl eth2 eth3 eth precedence 1 vid 0 4094 pcp 5 ip cos dont care cos 5 set classifier cos 7 interface host ethO0 ethl eth2 eth3 eth precedence 1 vid 0 4094 pcp 6 ip cos dont care cos 6 set classifier cos 8 interface host ethO0 ethl eth2 eth3 eth precedence 1 vid 0 4094 pcp 7 ip cos dont care cos 7 Classifier Cos settings example for management priority for traffic from ports Host Eth2
157. ed to display the current characteristics and other values for a chosen object The generic form the Show command is show object name object ids attribute name If a show command is entered in an incomplete form when possible the CLI automatically completes missing object ids with the keyword a11 and missing attributes with the keyword info For example Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 216 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 Table 12 4 Show Commands When this Command is entered the CLI interprets the Command as show system show system info show eth show eth all info show bridge port show bridge port all info show bridge port c2 show bridge port c2 all info show bridge port c2 eth0 show bridge port c2 eth0 info show vlan show vlan all info show vlan s1 show vlan s1 all info show vlan s1 123 170 show vlan s1 123 170 info For more information on the NetBeam CLI autocompletion feature see nvoking CLI Help and Autocompletion on page 2233 The autocompletion mechanism does not enable the omission of object ids or attributes which are required for correct command interpretation age For example show vlan 123 170 is not correctly autocompleted because it Note lacks a required reference to the object s1 When a show command is entered with the names or ids of an object that does not exist the reference to the non existing object is ignored and the information requested is displ
158. ede aiis 100 Configuring CFM Connectivity Fault Management esses 100 duse 101 Working with Maintenance Domains eseesseseseeneen nennen nnns 102 Working with Maintenance Associations tenens 103 Working with Component Maintenance Associations eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 104 Working with Maintenance End Points MEPS c sccesessesssessecseceesssseesesseeeees 105 Working with Peer MEPS sees nnne nnne nnne aiani nass nasse 107 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 7 Working with CCM Messages cccssssssssscsssssssscessesceseessesesssescessnscaeceseeeseaaaesaeeeesens 108 Working with Linktrace Messages essen nnne nnn nnns nnns 108 Sample CFM Configuration esses nennen nnns nenne nen nn anna nasse nnns 110 Configuring Link OAM rii eite e eee ose den etu aax e Disi ates Cetus 117 Enabling Link OAM cree pneter itecto po evecta aded Kanaa ndun 118 Link OAM DiSCOVery eseesees eene nnne nenne nenne nnns ense nennen tiii EiT Eeen 118 Link OAM Loopback esses eene enhn nnne nennen EEEE enne tana 119 Configuring Synchronous Ethernet SyNCE ccccsscccccssssececcseseececeesaaececeessaeeeeeseesas 120 edes 121 SyncE Configuration esses nente nennen nnnnnn inan senes enne ERER AREER EEE 121 Basic SyncE Scenarlo ssi erreten aerae er
159. eeeeeses eene eene nnne nennt nnn nnn nnne nnns 225 CLI Managed Object Reference eese ener nnne neni innen 226 Management Object AttriDUtes ccccceecsecscsscecsesssssseesesseaeeeeecesessseseesseseseseesensessees 227 System Object Attributes esses eee nnne nennen snnt tn sensn asser aan 227 Physical Inventory Object Attributes sessesesseesesee ener nnn 230 Physical Inventory Entities esiste nnne nennen nnn tn nena nnn 237 Radio Object AttriDUtes ccccccsscssssecsscecessesseeccesceeceeeeeecesseseeseeaeseeseeecceseneesaeseesrsesas 243 RF Object AttribUtes i esiti e eres certae pe dapes re eevee aoe 243 Radio Statisti Seona a 245 Encryption Object Attributes eene ennt nnn nennen 247 Connectivity Fault Management CFM Object Attributes eese 247 Maintenance Domain MD Object Attributes sess 247 Maintenance Association MA Object Attributes 249 Component MA Object Attributes eene nnne enne nn nnn 250 Maintenance End Point MEP Object Attributes esses 252 CCM Message Object Attributes eene nnne nnne nnn nnns 260 Peer MEP Object Attributes esses nennen nennen nnn nnne ennt aes 261 Peer MEP Database Attributes sss ener nnns 262 LTR Object Attributes esses eeeeeeeenen nnne ennt ntn natn nensi na tantas nan 265 Network Object AttriDUtes ccc cccsecsscessecececessessseseeseaseseeee
160. either the Web EMS or the CLI Upgrading the ODU Software Using the Web EMS To upgrade the ODU software 1 Connect to the ODU Refer to Connecting to the ODU Using the Web EMS on page 39 2 From the Web EMS Main screen click Advanced Settings and click the Software section of the Advanced Settings screen The Software section displays both the active and the standby software versions The software version is followed by the creation date and time of the version The first digit of the version number represents the major version number the second digit represents the minor version number the third digit represents the SVN revision and the fourth digit represents the version build number Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 155 Performing System Administration Chapter 9 Software A Flash Bank Version Running Scheduled to run 1 4 0 0 8484 lyes Ino 2 4 0 0 8409 Ino Ino Download RunSW Accept Figure 9 5 Web EMS Software Section 3 Click Download The Software Download window is displayed IP address File name Figure 9 6 Web EMS Software Download Window 4 Inthe Software Download window enter the following details for the FTP SFTP or TFTP server from which you are downloading the software Username Password IP address File name The file name of the software version you want to download 5 Click Apply to download the software
161. ent information In the CLI port name is used instead of number Bridge Port The interface that ieee8021BridgeBasePortlf host ethO eth1 RO N A Interface Index corresponds to this port Index eth2 interface 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 2 1 1 4 In the current 1 3 version when a port is bound to an internal interface s1 c1 C2 c3 c4 then the value for this attribute is O Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 280 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 Attribute CLI Attribute Name Description SNMP Object ID Value Access Default Bridge Port PVID pvid The port level VLAN ID that is assigned to untagged frames or Priority Tagged frames received on the port Each PVID must correspond to a valid VLAN on the corresponding component In practice this means that the VLAN must already be configured in the VLAN Table for the component before its VID can be assigned as the PVID for a port ieee8021QBridgePvid 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 4 1 4 5 1 1 1 4094 RW Bridge Port Default Priority Prio An integer indicating the default ingress User Priority for this port This attribute is relevant for protocols that do not support native User Priority such as Ethernet ieee8021BridgePortDefaul t UserPriority 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 2 1 3 1 1 1 0 7 RW Bridge Port Acceptable Frame Types admit The frame types that are accepted on the port and assigned to a VID VID
162. ep cfm mep cfm mep cfm mep cfm mep cfm mep cfm mep cfm mep cfm mep cfm mep cfm mep cfm mep cfm mep DN MO NON DN ND NO NO NN DN ND DO NMNHM NNN NN NNN DYN DN ND DO NMNH NN NN NN NNN DN ND NN NNN NNN NNN DYN DN ND NN DNMN NNN NN NNN DN ND PPRPeP PP oOoooooc oOooooo PRPRPRPHPHPHPHP PRP RPP PP Oooooooooooooo PRPRPRPrPHPHPHP PRP RPP PP PPRPrHPHPPHPHP PHP RPP PP Ooo0oo0o0ooooooooooo NNNNNNNNNNNDNDND ND egr action egr mac egr port id subtype trm mep last egr id next egr id rx ttl ltr forward relay action chassis id subtype mng addr domain ingr action ingr mac ingr port id subtype egr action egr mac egr port id subtype trm mep last egr id next egr id rx ttl ltr forward relay action chassis id subtype mng addr domain ingr action ingr mac ingr port id subtype egr action egr mac egr port id subtype trm mep last egr id next egr id Configuring Link OAM This section describes how to configure Link OAM Chapter 7 none 00 00 00 00 00 00 unknown unknown 00 00 00 24 a4 00 07 5a 00 00 00 24 a4 00 07 59 62 unknown fdb unknown unknown ok 00 24 a4 00 07 a9 unknown none 00 00 00 00 00 00 unknown unknown 00 00 00 24 a4 00 07 59 00 00 00 24 a4 00 07 aa 61 unknown hit unknown unknown ok 00 24 a4 00 07 aa unknown none 00 00 00 00 00 00 unknown unknown 00 00 00 24 a4 00 07 aa 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Link OAM as defined in IEEE802 3ah is an Etherne
163. er 12 Attribute CLI Description SNMP Object ID Syntax Access Attribute Name trm mep the forwarded LTM reached a 5 dotlagCfmLtrTerminal MEP enclosing its MA as Mep returned in the Terminal MEP flag of the Flags field LTR Last Egress An octet field holding the Last 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 2 1 Eight pairs RO Identifier Egress Identifier returned in the 6 hexadecimal last egr id LTR Egress Identifier TLV of the dotlagCfmLtrLastEgresside digits each LTR The Last Egress Identifier ntifier pair identifies the MEP Linktrace separated by Initiator that originated or the dashes NN Linktrace Responder that NN NN NN forwarded the LTM to which this NN NN NN LTR is the response This is the NN for same value as the Egress example 00 Identifier TLV of that LTM 00 00 AF DD 1E 2D A3 LTR Next Egress An octet field holding the Next 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 2 1 Eight pairs RO Identifier Egress Identifier returned in the 7 hexadecimal next egr id LTR Egress Identifier TLV of the dotlagCfmLtrNextEgressid digits each LTR The Next Egress Identifier entifier pair Identifies the Linktrace separated by Responder that transmitted this dashes NN LTR and can forward the LTM to NN NN NN the next hop This is the same NN NN NN value as the Egress Identifier TLV NN for of the forwarded LTM if any If example 00 the FwdYes bit of the Flags field is 00 00 AF DD false the contents of this field 1E 2D A3 are
164. ere N is a hexadecim al number for example 00 AF DD 1E 2D A3 LBM Destination The MA End Point Identifier of 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 Integer RC 0 MEPID another MEP in the same MA to 1 1 28 Ibm dst mepid which the LBM is to be sent This dotlagCfmMepTrans address will be used if the value mitLbmDestMepld of the column dotlagCfmMepTransmitLbmDes tlsMepld is True LBM Destination The destination type indicator for 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 mac RC mac Type purposes of Loopback 1 1 29 mepid Ibm dst type transmission either the unicast dot1agCfmMepTrans destination MAC address of the mitLbmDestls target MEP or the MEPID of the Mepld Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 254 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 Attribute CLI Description SNMP Object ID Syntax Access Default Attribute Name target MEP Number of LBMs The number of Loopback 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 1 1024 RC 1 to Transmit messages to be transmitted 1 1 30 Ibm tx num dot1agCfmMepTrans mitLbmMessages LBM Data TLV An arbitrary amount of data to be 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 String of RC Empty Ibm tx data included in the Data TLV if the 1 1 31 hexadecim String Data TLV is selected to be sent dot1agCfmMepTrans al digits mitLbmDataTlv Two digits constitute an octet therefore the length must be even LBM Transmit Priority 3 bit value to be used in 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 0 7 RC 0 VL
165. ernal mac swap qam64 4 1 0 5 Use the following command to clear the loopback set rf loopback mode disable For error free operation at high modulation profiles no interference should be present Switch off remote ODU or change its frequency to eliminate risk of interference Sage Note It will take the ODU to stabilize after loopback about 1 minute Ethernet Internal Line Loopback Point An Internal External loop returns the received frames to the radio side enabling you to test Ethernet traffic across the link The Ethernet traffic from the Customer s end equipment or Ethernet analyzer is looped at the Ethernet interface of the remote ODU enabling testing of the connection cable fiber the interface between end equipment and the ODU both local and remote ODUs and the radio transmission The loopback can be applied separately for Eth1 and Eth2 and can be set with or without MAC Address swapping Set the loopback mode to internal for the desired Ethernet port and set the loopback timeout in seconds set eth eth1 loopback timeout 300 set eth ethl loopback mode internal mac swap Use the following command to clear the loopback set eth ethl loopback mode disable Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 210 Using the NetBeam CLI This chapter describes how to use the NetBeam Command Line Interface CLI client to configure and maintain NetBeam devices on your network and includes the following topics e In
166. es 31 Removing Connectors from the NetBeam ODU sssssesse eene enne 32 Connecting the POwer csse sess eene nnn nnn nnn nnns sins tasas atas sanas ras sas nas 32 Connecting Other Interfaces ccccccsssssssssssssescessecsecseseecsssescesessaeseueseeseeserseaseeeeaeses 33 Aligning the Antenna ccssssssssssssssssscsssessesesssessesaeessessesscsesseseaecaesaeseesseesesaeaesaussassansass 33 Setting the ODU to Alignment MOE cssccccceccsssessessessessssessescaecoesaesecssusesssessaesaeeaes 34 Performing the AligNMent cccscccccccecssecssceecessessesssssesssscseseecaeseeceesessesaaeaessaesassasseseaees 34 Performing Initial System Setup ccssssscsecsscssseecessessesaesaesasscsesescascoeeseesaeseasaesaaeeaseuss 36 Chapter 3 Performing Basic Configuration Using the Web EMS Connecting to the ODU Using the Web EMS ssseseeeeneenee nennen nnne 39 Saving Configuration Changes and Resetting the System Using the Web EMS 40 Quick ConfiguratiOn ertet rrt teer etr teo rere rede eia ae eed eia neon sine in ge 40 Configuring and Displaying Basic System Information Using the Web EMS 41 Configuring System IP Addresses Using the Web EMS esee 42 Configuring Radio Parameters Using the Web EMS essere 44 Viewing Modulation Profiles Using the Web EMS sese 47 Configuring Ethernet Interfaces Usin
167. essionRowStatus row 2 Enter the following settings e Remote SNMP Agent The IP address of the ODU connected to the MIB Browser e OID to set x x x x x 1 as the next object in table e Value to set 4 CreateAndGo Activate the OID sequence to build the table 3 Click OK 5 Multiple Variable Bindings 192 169 1131 e3ess10nCo mmand sigu Cor sas Set 192 168 1 131 z amp r Log bx filesessioncommand 1 integer copyStatsHistory 13 filesessionServer 1 octet string 192 168 1 15 31 39 32 2E 31 36 fileSessionPassword 1 octet string 123456 31 32 33 34 35 36 hex fileSessionUser 1 octet string noam 6E 6F 61 6D hex fileSessionLocalParams 1 octet string mo eth eth0 6D 6F 3D 22 65 7 fileSessionRemotePath 1 octet string ETHOS zip 45 54 48 30 53 2E 7A fileSessionRowStatus 1 integer createAndGo 4 Eel Select fileSesstonRtowStatus 1 active 1 Remote SNMP Agent 192 168 1 131 Atk OID to Set 6607 ssi 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 18 1 10 1 OR Value to Set 4 ae Syntax nteger32 Timeticks Counter64 Ulnteger32 IP address Opaque Counter32 OID Nsapaddr Gauge32 Octets Bits OOO a SNMPv Figure 9 18 filesessionRemotePath Settings Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 176 Performing System Administration amem 192 168 1 131 Jat MIB Tree radioBridgelraps 1 3 radioB
168. esult cfm mep 1 1 1 lbm tx sn cfm mep 1 1 1 lbm next sn cfm mep 1 1 1 lbr in order cfm mep 1 1 1 lbr out of order cfm mep 1 1 1 lbr tx cfm mep 1 1 1 ltm next sn cfm mep 1 1 1 ltr unexpected cfm mep 1 1 1 ltm tx result cfm mep 1 1 1 ltm tx sn cfm mep 1 1 1 1m cfm mep 1 1 1 lm interval cfm mep 1 1 1 dm cfm mep 1 1 1 dm interval cfm mep 1 1 1 ais generate cfm mep 1 1 1 ais period cfm mep 1 1 1 ais level cfm mep 1 1 1 ais suppress cfm mep 1 1 1 ais defects cfm mep 2 2 1 interface cfm mep 2 2 1 dir cfm mep 2 2 1 vlan cfm mep 2 2 1 admin state cfm mep 2 2 1 cci cfm mep 2 2 1 msg prio Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual Chapter 7 1000 00 00 00 00 00 00 2 mepid 10 0 0 enable 00 00 00 00 00 00 1 mac 64 tx idle tx idle fngReset 00 24 a4 00 07 59 none 0 656243 ok 19 20 20 0 0 0 0 unknown 0 disabled 10s disabled 10s disabled 1s 7 enabled none ethl up none active enabled 0 114 Performing Advanced Configuration cfm mep 2 2 1 low defect cfm mep 2 2 1 alarm time cfm mep 2 2 1 reset time cfm mep 2 2 1 lbm dst mac cfm mep 2 2 1 lbm dst mepid cfm mep 2 2 1 lbm dst type cfm mep 2 2 1 lbm tx num cfm mep 2 2 1 lbm tx data len cfm mep 2 2 1 lbm tx prio cfm mep 2 2 1 lbm tx drop cfm mep 2 2 1 ltm dst mac cfm mep 2 2 1 ltm dst mepid cfm mep 2 2 1 ltm dst type cfm mep 2 2 1 ltm tx ttl cfm mep 2 2 1 lbm tx status cfm mep 2 2 1 ltm tx status cfm mep 2 2 1 fng stat
169. f the All Weather shell from its ODU port 3 Remove the cable connector from its port Connecting the Power 1 Carefully screw the connector outlet portion 9 of the All Weather shell into the PWR port or alternatively if a PoE connection is being used the RJ1 port Tighten the connector outlet portion securely by hand Do not use a wrench Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 32 Installing the NetBeam System Chapter 2 2 Insert the power or PoE data connector into the port The PWR LED color indicator turns red for one second then blinks green indicating that the ODU is powered on 3 Screw the cable inlet portion 9 of the All Weather shell onto the secured connector outlet portion taking care not to twist the connecting cable Tighten the cable inlet portion securely by hand The rubber gasket insert 8 will tighten to create a moisture proof seal Do not use a wrench 4 Secure the power supply cable into place using a cable tie Ensure that there is sufficient play in the cabling to allow movement of the ODU during final alignment 5 Wait for the NetBeam ODU to boot up about two minutes When the ODU is fully rebooted the PWR LED color indicator turns green during power up the PWR LED blinks green and the RF LED color indicator turns off indicating that the link is down Connecting Other Interfaces For each network connection perform the following steps 1 Carefully screw the connector outlet portion
170. faces bandwidth utilization in 15 minutes intervals using the Web EMS or the CLI The total in rate out rate and bandwidth utilization aggregated meaning Tx and Rx are displayed Bandwidth utilization is displayed as percentage of the aggregated total Tx and Rx from the max radio rate per the current modulation Bandwidth Utilization A Graph Table Bandwidth Utilization Graph Utilization 0 aS ll v v TM 1 500 000 1 250 000 1 000 000 750 000 Rate bps 500 000 250 000 05 10 00 05 15 00 05 20 00 05 25 00 05 30 00 05 35 00 05 40 00 Time Utilization In Rate out Rate Figure 8 12 Bandwidth Utilization Screen To display bandwidth utilization Ethernet statistics show eth lt eth list gt statistics summary Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 148 Monitoring the System Chapter 8 start ifc in octets out octets in rate out rate util 0 2012 12 05 01 01 10 ethO 747984743210 748161700832 1765192 1766392 10 To display the bandwidth utilization history last 24 hours in 15 minutes intervals show eth lt eth list gt statistics summary 0 95 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 149 Performing System Administration This chapter describes procedures that involve system administration rather than the network itself and includes the following topics e Configuring Encryption e Working with Configuration Files e Configuring Users e Upgrading the O
171. fferent cable diameters e 4 2mm inner diameter for cable diameter 3 5 4 9mm Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 31 Installing the NetBeam System Chapter 2 e 5 8mm inner diameter for cable diameter 5 0 6 7 mm e 7 9mm inner diameter for cable diameter 6 8 9 0 mm 1 Foreach ODU cable connection perform the following procedure a Disassemble a protective shell by unscrewing its parts and carefully removing the rubber gasket insert 8 from the cable inlet portion of the shell b Thread the cable connector through the cable inlet portion 69 of the shell through the rubber gasket insert 8 and through the connector outlet portion 9 as shown in Figure 2 6 c Connectthe cable connector to the ODU interface d Screw the connector outlet portion 8 to the ODU firmly by hand do not use tools e Insert the rubber gasket insert snugly into the connector outlet portion 8 of the shell f Screw the cable inlet portion to the connector outlet portion 8 firmly by hand do not use tools Se S amp S i e A Note Removing Connectors from the NetBeam ODU A To avoid accidental damage to the connector always use the following order to remove cable connections from the ODU refer to Figure 2 6 Caution 1 Unscrew the cable inlet portion 69 of the All Weather shell to release the gasket seal and then remove tension from the cable connector 2 Unscrew the connector outlet portion o
172. ftware version and upgrades the software version if the current version number is not the same as the most recently available version Configuration file Set the system name set system name NetBeam SiteA Copy the following sw and upgrade it if differs from netronics uimage 5 0 0 9900 copy sw tftp 192 168 0 222 netronics uimage 5 0 0 9931 if version differs from netronics uimage 5 0 0 9900 run sw immediate no timeout if version differs from netronics uimage 5 0 0 9931 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 196 Zero Touch Chapter 10 5 The configuration file is now located on the TFTP server directory Open DHCP Server Version 1 56 Windows Build 1627 section 86 86 98 61 4a 8d Invalid subnetmask SubNetMask 255 255 222 68 ignored section 86 86 98 66 D3 15 Invalid subnetmask SubNetMask 255 255 222 6 ignored IP Address is missing in Static DHCP Host 86 86 98 Ge ef d 1 1 Entry ignored Starting DHCP DHCP Range 192 168 0 73 192 168 0 74 255 255 254 80 Server Name odedo x200 Detecting Static Interfaces Warning Interface 192 168 42 88 is not Static not used Lease Status URL http 192 168 222 6789 Listening On 108 2 0 1 Listening On 192 168 6 222 Listening On 192 168 1 254 DHCP discover for 86 86 98 61 4a 8d gt from interface 192 168 0 222 received Host 86 86 98 61 4a 8d CHost8 8698G14a8d gt offered 192 168 8 73 DHCP discover for 86 86 98 1 4a 8d gt from interface 10 2 1
173. g If no System Name is assigned the system prompt will read Default The physical location of this node e g telephone closet 3rd floor The system input voltage The system enclosure temperature The host s local date and time of day SNMP Object ID sysName 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 5 sysLocation 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 6 NetronicsSysVol tage 1 3 6 1 4 1 319 26 1 1 NetonicsSysTem perature 1 3 6 1 4 1 319 26 1 2 hrSystemDate 1 3 6 1 2 1 25 1 2 As defined in RFC 2790 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual Chapter 12 Up to 256 Default characters If no system name exists the value returns a zero length string Up to 256 characters sysLocation undefined If no system location exists the value returns a zero length string yyyy mm dd hh mm ss where yyyy year 0 9999 mm month 1 12 dd day 1 31 hh hour 0 24 mm minute 0 60 ss second 0 60 229 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 Physical Inventory Object Attributes Table 12 9 Physical Inventory Attributes Attribute CLI Description SNMP Object ID SNMP Syntax CLI Syntax Attribute Name Inventory Index The index for the table entry entPhysicallndex integer32 integer 1 3 6 1 2 1 47 1 1 1 1 1 2147483647 1 Physical A textual description of physical entPhysicalDescr character string character Descriptor entity This object should contain 1 3 6 1 2 1 4
174. g the Web EMS sese 47 Configuring SNMP Settings cccccccsssssescescescscsecsssseseeseeceesesscseeecuesecsecaecassessesesaesaesaeeses 50 Default VLAN Setting sess eene ntn nnne tn tate tetra nas tantas is assa tassa asp Ea 51 Chapter 4 Performing Basic Configuration using the CLI Establishing a CLI Session with the ODU eseesseseseseeeen enne nennen 53 Saving Configuration Changes and Resetting the System Using the CLI 53 Configuring and Displaying Basic System Information Using the CLI 53 Configuring System IP Addresses Using the CLI eese ener 54 Configuring Radio Parameters Using the CLI cccsecscscsssscecsscescessesseseeseeserssaseeseaeses 56 Displaying Radio Parameters and Status Using the CLI sess 56 Configuring the Radio Parameters Using the CLI essen 58 Viewing Modulation Profiles Using the CLI esses 58 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual Configuring Ethernet Interfaces Using the CLI eese entente 59 Configuring Interface Parameters sese eene entren 59 Displaying Interface Status sisse serene enne entente tnter nnn nnn nennnn n 60 Default VLAN Settings eene echte sicot eee cente erre sae sace de se deceit eve eo Q d pasen ee eese ado 61 Chapter 5 Commissioning and Acceptance Procedure Installation
175. ge settings capabilities are enabled by default and do not require a license The software licenses are serial number dependent Management You can manage a NetBeam system using a Web Based Element Management System Web EMS or a Command Line Interface CLI The CLI is compatible with SNMP Advanced network features must be managed using the CLI The NetBeam system features a wide range of built in indicators and diagnostic tools for advanced OAM functionality The system is designed to enable quick evaluation identification and resolution of operating faults See NetBeam Diagnostics on page 201 Technical Specifications For detailed technical specifications please refer to the datasheet Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 19 Installing the NetBeam System This chapter describes how to install and perform the basic setup for NetBeam antenna outdoor units ODUs in a NetBeam wireless network including Preparing the Site NetBeam Package Contents Unpacking the NetBeam Required Tools Preparing for Installation Mounting the NetBeam Installing the ODU with a Two Foot Antenna Connecting the Cables Aligning the Antenna Performing Initial System Setup a The installation and maintenance of the NetBeam link should only be done by service personnel who are properly trained and certified to carry out such activities Preparing the Site Carefully select and prepare each NetBeam ODU site to make device inst
176. gh capacity E band radio that dramatically lowers the cost of wireless and Ethernet backhaul The system is uniquely based on an all silicon design that results in fewer components greater reliability and pricing that is up to 8096 less than comparable radio systems Operating in the uncongested and lightly licensed 71 76 81 86 Ghz E band TCO total cost of ownership is reduced even further to the lowest in the industry The following are just some of the highlights of the NetBeam system e Operates in the licensed uncongested and lightly licensed 71 76 81 86Ghz E band e Carrier grade Gigabit Ethernet radio e Revolutionary all silicon based design resulting in the industry s lowest TCO e Priced at as little as one fifth the cost of available wireless radio alternatives e Green design providing for extremely low power consumption small form factor and easy installation e Perfect wireless backhaul solution for mobile operators business service providers and enterprises Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 12 Introduction to NetBeam System Chapter 1 Cy Pie N us P ony RE gt W m Ser t EN A Figure 1 1 NetBeam 1G1 System System Applications Wireless Backhaul for 2G 3G 4G LTE and WiMAX Networks High capacity Gigabit Ethernet backhaul at the lowest TCO in the industry enables mobile operators to provide data intensive services profitably and reliably NetBeam uses the uncongested
177. gt all CFM MA Component A MA Component ID MD ID MAID VLAN MHFCreation MHF permission c2 n iD 200 defer none c3 2 2 200 explicit none I Ad a EE Figure 7 15 CFM MA Setup Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 104 Performing Advanced Configuration Chapter 7 Working with Maintenance End Points MEPS A Maintenance End Point MEP is a point on the perimeter of a domain which sends and receives CFM frames through the domain Use the following command to set an MEP set cfm mep lt md idx gt ma idx lt mepid gt interface lt ext bridge port list gt dir down upj vlan 1 4094 admin state active inactive cci enabled disabled msg prio 0 7 low defect lt low defect gt alarm time 250 1000 reset time 250 1000 1bm dst type mac mepid lbm dst mac mac addr gt lbm dst mepid lt mepid gt 1bm tx num 1 1024 l1bm tx data hex string gt 1bm tx prio 0 7 1lbm tx drop enable disable ltm dst type mac mepid l1tm dst mac mac addr gt ltm dst mepid mepid ltm tx ttl 0 250 lbm tx status tx pending tx idle ltm tx status tx pending tx idle Use the following command to display a particular MEP or all MEPs show cfm mep lt md idx list gt all lt ma idx list gt all lt mepid list gt all interface dir vlan admin state cci msg prio low defect alarm time reset time lbm dst
178. gth string Alias alias Up to 256 characters When the set command is used together with the alias attribute only one interface can be addressed per invocation The value of this attribute must be unique with respect to other interface aliases Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 270 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 Attribute CLI Description SNMP Object ID Attribute Name Ethernet Type This object identifier ifMauDefaultType For possible values refer to 1000fd eth type represents the 1 3 6 1 2 1 26 2 1 Table 12 36 operational type of 1 11 MAU that the Part of ifMauTable administrator has 1 3 6 1 2 1 26 2 1 assigned If auto negotiation is not enabled or is not implemented for this MAU the value of this attribute is used to determine the operational type of the MAU In such a case a set command is used to force the MAU into the specified operating mode If auto negotiation is implemented and enabled for this MAU the operational type of the MAU is determined by auto negotiation and the value of this attribute denotes the type to which the MAU automatically revert if when auto negotiation is later disabled Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 271 Using the NetBeam CLI Attribute CLI Attribute Name Description Auto Negotiation Admin Status auto neg An integer representing the administrative state of auto negotiation signaling for the interfa
179. h TACACS or Radius AAA servers up to five servers This is supported in addition to the local authentication The settings of Tacas and Radius authentication are supported only in CLI How to set the ODU to connect to AAA Radius Tacacs 1 Configure the Auth mode and the shared secret under System Show system system auth mode local system auth shared secret testingl23 2 Configure the Auth server IP address and its protocol port number show auth server auth server 1 ip addr 192 168 0 222 auth server 1 protocol port 1812 3 Configure the users without a password show user name type admin admin aaa tech Every change in the Auth mode deletes all users except for the admin user You can set up to five separate servers The Authentication starts from the 1 server and goes down to the 5 Setting a user for radius tacacs is done without a password The password is in the server If the server is disconnected only the Admin local user can connect to the unit Default Radius port 1812 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 192 Performing System Administration Chapter 9 Default Tacacs port 49 Ping Supported only from CLI Ping is the basic utility used to test the reachability of a host on an Internet Protocol IP network and to measure the round trip time for messages sent from the originating host to a destination computer Ping operates by sending Internet Control Message Protocol
180. he Service Selector is the Primary VLAN ID with which the Maintenance Association is associated or 0 if the MA is not attached to any VID The VLAN must be defined in the VLAN Table Table 12 44 Enumerated value indicating whether the management entity can create MHFs MIP Half Function for this MA Enumerated value indicating what if anything is to be included in the Sender ID TLV 21 5 3 transmitted by MPs configured in this MA ieee8021CfmMa CompPrimary SelectorOrNone 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 6 4 1 3 ieee8021CfmMa CompMhfCreation 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 6 4 1 4 ieee8021CfmMa CompldPermission 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 6 4 1 5 mhf creation none default explicit defer mhf permission none chassis mgmg chassis mgmg 251 Using the NetBeam CLI Maintenance End Point MEP Object Attributes Chapter 12 This section includes separate tables for configurable MEP object attributes Table 12 28 and read only MEP object attributes Table 12 29 Table 12 28 Configurable MEP Attributes Attribute CLI Attribute Name Description SNMP Object ID Syntax Access Default MD Index Value to be used as the index of the MA table entries for the MD when the management entity wants to create a new entry in that table Entering the MD Index for a MEP enables use of the common command structure dot1agCfmMdIndex 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 5 2 1 1
181. he DVM prior to installation based on the network link budget Calculating the expected RSSI RSSI Pa t Gana on LFS bun Attstm E Gan Where Pu ODU s Tx Power typically 5dBm Gant1 Gain of antenna 1 in dBi Gant2 Gain of antenna 2 in dBi LFS Loss of Free Space 92 45 20 Log Dim Fguz o D Link distance in Km o F Frequency in GHz Attatm Attenuation due to Atmospheric gases 0 5dB Km 0 5 Dkm Mounting the NetBeam 1G1 S Note e These instructions are for mounting a system with a one foot antenna For instructions on mounting the NetBeam with a two foot antenna refer to Installing the ODU with a Two Foot Antenna on page 25 e Torque level for tightening the nuts and bolts is 8 nm Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 23 Installing the NetBeam System Chapter 2 Figure 2 1 Netbeam Mounting Assembly Components 1 Unit mounting screws and bolts 6 Azimuth adjustment lock bolts 2 Back mounting bracket 7 Elevation adjustment lock bolts 3 Front mounting bracket 8 Azimuth fine adjustment screw 8 4 Quick release plate attached to ODU 9 Elevation fine adjustment screw 16 5 Quick release hooks 10 Elevation screw tension band and pin 1 Prior to mounting unpack the mounting kit package and attach the two unit mounting screws 69 to the front mounting bracket 8 securing them with mounting bolts 2 Assemble the back 8 mounting bracket to the front 8 mounti
182. he DVM probes into the AUX Interface sockets The RF LED color indicator turns orange indicating the ODU is in Alignment mode The ODU remains in Alignment mode even if the DVM probes are ejected until the ODU is rebooted Performing the Alignment These instructions are for aligning a one foot antenna For instructions on aligning a two foot antenna refer to Installing the ODU with a Two Foot Antenna on page 25 Note These instructions refer to Figure 2 1 NetBeam 1G Mounting Assembly Components To perform an alignment 1 Verify that the ODU is in Alignment Mode Refer to Aligning the Antenna on page 33 Coarse Alignment Azimuth Only 2 Loosen the unit mounting bolts 69 slightly to allow the ODU some freedom of movement 3 Perform a coarse ODU alignment using a line of sight visual check with the remote NetBeam ODU Lock the unit mounting bolts 69 using the 13mm open wrench 4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 above on the remote ODU Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 34 Installing the NetBeam System Chapter 2 Fine Alignment When aligning an antenna the antenna in the remote node must remain S amp S completely stationary Perform Fine alignment first on the local antenna and only uge afterwards on the remote antenna 10 11 12 13 The optimum alignment may require several adjustment iterations between the local and remote antennas Connect the DVM to the ODU by inserting both red and black p
183. he Web EMS Main screen and click the RF Statistics section The RF Statistics section of the Radio screen includes the following two tabs Current Real time statistics counters since the last time the RF statistic counters were cleared Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 140 Monitoring the System Chapter 8 RF Statistics R Current History Elapsed Time 0000 00 00 15 In Lost Packets 0 In Packets 594977 In Octets 1220503680 Out Packets 594162 In Idle Octetes 283046487 In Good Packets 594977 Out Octets 1220510400 In Errored Packets 0 Out Idle Octetes 284245603 In Arq Loss In Good Octets 930274570 Out Arq Loss In Errored Octets 0 Clear Figure 8 4 RF Statistics Screen Current Tab counters RF Statistics Current History History Displays 96 intervals of 15 minutes total 24 hours of the statistics 4 Elapsed Time In Packets Out Packets In Goo In Errored Pac InOctets In idl Outldle In Good Octets In Errored Octets 101151 193618 100704447 d 255815183 2307 2377 1 7278925 478761 90797 118542 10070493 0 235551631 2307 23215 23204 7278925 105248 08 22 42674 42579 22674 0 0 bagasoood ass 94386 94346 3087690 Jo 0000 00 15 07 59923 75889 69893 30 1274 167028803 1652 16578 16572 5056159 27519
184. ics bracket correctly installed Pole diameter between 2 4 Yes C No C Yes C No Bracket s mounting bolts securely C Yes No C Yes No tightened ODU grounding C Yes No C Yes No Cables Fibers connections mark all cables connected Overall cables fibers length Ethi Cats Eth1 Fiber Eth2 Cats Eth2 Fiber Eth3 Cats Eth3 Fiber Eth4 cat5 Eth4 Fiber bc meters Eth1 Cats Eth1 Fiber Eth2 Cat5 Eth2 Fiber Eth3 Cats Eth3 Fiber Eth4 Cat5 Eth4 Fiber bc meters Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 64 Commissioning and Acceptance Procedure Chapter 5 Cables Fibers securely routed and fixed properly using cable ties Yes No C Yes C No Cables Fibers are properly weatherproofed using the appropriate glands Yes No Yes No ODU DC source PoE JExternal DC PoE JExternal DC PoE model and manufacturer Measured DC power or CLI Web Volts DC Volts DC reading RF Link Parameters ODU Model ODU P N ODU S N ODU running SW version Tx Rx frequency MHz MHz Channel width 250MHz 500Muz 250MHz 500MHuz Role Auto Auto Master Slave C Master Slave Tx Rx Link ID 0 not used 0 not used Modulation Mode Adaptive Adaptive Mode modulation sub channel repetitions Fec Static 11 Static UL DL C
185. idge ports that are S component ports The set svid xlat command fails if the port specified belongs to a C component and not an S component The set svid xlat command also fails if the S VID specified is not yet defined in the VLAN table Use the following command to delete S VID Translation table entries and clear their associated statistics clear svid xlat sl all lt ext bridge port list gt all lt vid list all Use the following command to display S VID Translation table entries show svid xlat sl all lt ext bridge port list gt all lt vid list gt all info C VLAN Registration Table An element of the C VID registration table is accessed by PB C VLAN component Customer Edge Port bridge port number and C VID Each element contains the mapping between a C VID and the S VID which carries the service and Booleans for handling untagged frames at the PEP and CEP Use the following command to create and modify C VLAN Registration table entries set cvlan reg lt c comp id list gt lt ext bridge port list gt lt vid list gt svlan lt vid gt untag cep yes no untag pep yes no If the entry does not already exist the set cvlan reg command creates it and assigns the attributes specified Upon creation in the event that an attribute is not explicitly specified the entry is created with the default value for that attribute If the entry already exists then the set cvlan reg
186. idgeFdb Varies RO N A Discards full Forwarding Database entries LearnedEntryDiscards table counter that have been or would have 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 2 1 been learned but have been 2 1 1 4 discarded due to a lack of It belongs to storage space in the ieee8021QbridgeFdb Forwarding Database Table When this counter is 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 2 1 increasing it indicates that the 2 1 FDB is regularly becoming full a condition which generally has adverse performance effects on the sub network When this counter has a large value but is not currently increasing it indicates that entry discards have been occurring but are not persistent View the value of this object using the show command together with the statistics qualifier Dynamic Count The current number of ieee8021QbridgeFdb Varies RO N A num of dynamic entries in this DynamicCount dynamic Forwarding Database The 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 2 1 value of this object is 2 1 1 3 incremented each time an It belongs to entry is created or deleted ieee802 1Q0bridgeFdb View the value of this object Table using the show command 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 2 1 together with the statistics 2 1 qualifier Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 296 Using the NetBeam CLI FDB Address Table Attributes Attribute CLI Attribute Name Bridge Component ID FDB ID fdb id list Chapter 12 Table 12 50 FDB Address Table Attributes The component identifier is used to distinguish
187. ie e itecto ttal cios iir pd ri ede SEa 19 Technical Specifications nece certior e Pr DEREN TERR VERE ANM UE C eee 19 Chapter 2 Installing the NetBeam System Preparing the Site RES P o terrx rn eem is Ve dn pates e ue oes Ea dv ene tegens 20 Physical and Environmental Requirements esses eene nnns 20 Cabling Requirements esses eene nennen nnns nen nrsnarinn sss ers san nnns 21 NetBeam Package Content ccccccccccecssssssssssecessecessscescesseseesaescesseseaecaesaeseeeesesaesesseaeeaea 22 Unpacking the NetBe am cccsscssssssssscssecsssescessessesessaessssssseeseesecaesescaeseeesaeseessauensseasenes 22 REQUIRE T cc 22 Preparing for Installation cccccssssssesssssssssecsessecsesesceesescesessaeseesasesseseessaseescaeseeseesesseeesaea 23 Mounting the NetBe am c cccccccsssscesssssesssscccssecsecoessecoecessessaeseaaeseesassaesaescaeeessaeseaeeaesees 23 Installing the ODU with a Two Foot Antenna assesses ennt nennen nns 25 Connecting the Cables ccccsssssccccecessesssessssscecsesseceesesssecesaesaesasssessescaecaeesaesaeeseseesenseseees 28 Grounding the NetBeam and Cables sss eene 29 Power Supply NOtes csesscssssssssssessecsecescseceecssesscessessessessasseecaessaeseesseesuessesssaseeesasess 30 Preparing the Cables ccccccccscsssssessssssssssssecssssecoesseseecesacsessasessssceseeseessaseaecaeseeseesesa
188. ile System COMMANGAGL cccccsccceccecessesseseeaueaeeeececescussesesaesaeeeeecessesseesetseaaeess 164 SFS Example for Backup Restore of Configuration file sess 165 History File Transfer cccccccccccsscsssssssssececceecceecessessesseaaeaeeeesecsscuseaeuaeaeeeeeeeesessees 166 Command Line Scripts csse esee nn nnn nans sss n esseri n nan nin 177 Displaying SCriptS saeit ese enne nnne nennen nnn nana nnns 178 RUNNING Scripts rie e teet ease etse der onsite iine redisse eere 178 Adding kTedTo RR 178 Viewing Script CODtent icr e eine te retire pee tirer edv oes esu ens ieai iape 179 Command Line Scripts using the CLI eeeseseeseeee nennen 180 Macro Serlpts sii tiene ier a a EE EEEE EE E 181 GN BEC Ins DEDUCI 181 MAC Table Limitations ooi toti n dn o quen ne eon na eeu noo a Prae PUR rodean 182 MAC Table Limitation Setting Procedure cccccccesssssssssseceeeeeecesessssssesaeeeeeeeeens 182 Chl ExatnbDleiiotu e tirime iE HEIDE e ime d eI 182 Configuring pm 183 NTP Config tatiOD iicet riesce teint etn esae ero Eheu ere ta ecu euet aee verba eeu ee Even o stevens 183 Viewing User Activity LOG ccccccccccccececsesececseeeeeeeeensneneneussssseseseeseseseeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeess 184 Access Control List ACL iiiter er repetere A E EA ERU Re eC ee add 185 LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol ccccccssssssecceeceeeceessseeeseaeseceeeseeeessessnsaaeees 186 D
189. ime in the format lt 2013 05 22 09 45 00 gt This parameter is optional If it is missing it starts from the oldest entry e to Request for history until time in format the 2013 05 22 09 45 00 This parameter is optional If it is missing it goes until the latest entry 3 Click OK m Multiple Variable Bindings 192 168 1 131 fileSessionCommand 1 x COFI Set 192 168 1 131 ja amp r Log a Mame o foe fileSessionCommand 1 integer copyStatsHistory 13 fileSessionServer 1 octet string 192 168 1 15 31 39 32 2 E 31 36 fileSessionPassword 1 octet string 123456 31 32 33 34 35 36 hex fileSessionUser 1 octet string noam 6E 6F 61 6D hex fileSessionLocalParams octet string mo eth ethO 6D 6F 3D 22 65 7 fileSessionRemotePath 1 octet string ETHOS zip 45 54 48 30 53 2E 7A fileSessionRowStatus 1 X integer createAndGo 4 4 Select fileSessionLocalParams 1 Remote SNMP Agent OK 192 168 1 131 ja OID to Set Cancel 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 18 1 3 1 ig 3097 mw a 1 Value to Set mo eth etho c Syntax Integer32 Timeticks Counter64 Ulnteger32 IP address Opaque Counter32 OID Nsapaddr Gauge32 Octets Bits J99 SNMPy Figure 9 16 fileSessionLocalParams Settings Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 174 Performing System Administration Chapter 9 To enter fileSessionRemotePath settings
190. ing packets by port VID PCP and or DSCP as defined by the IEEE 802 1 Q p and RFC 2475 standards or alternatively MPLS EXP bit and maps them onto EVC CoS pairs The classification fields of VID PCP and DSCP MPLS Exp represent the CoS that determine the egress queue Classification based on EVC forwards the packets through the meter and the marker For NetBeam 1G DSCP classification is based on 3 MSB bits 8 options For NetBeam 2G two modes are supported PCP DSCP classification based on PCP 3 bits and DSCP 3 bits DSCP classification based on DSCP 6 bits only In this mode classification based on PCP is not available and trying to configure PCP classification will result in error message Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 88 Performing Advanced Configuration Chapter 7 In order to change the classification mode per interface Left l11 set eth ethl classifier mode dscp pcp dscp The default classification mode is pcp Classifier Cos Settings Use the following command to configure classifier cos set classifier cos classifier id 1 248 interface host eth0 thl eth2 eth3 eth4 5 precedence 1 8 vid lt list 0 4094 gt pcp lt list 0 7 gt ip cos lt dscp cos mpls exp list of 0 7 gt dont care gt cos lt 0 7 gt IP COS Priority based on IP header value DSCP differentiated services MPLS EXP MPLS experimental bit or Don t Care IP h
191. ion disabled backward forward both directions clock auto master slave synce For NetBeam 2G systems the following options were added network type provider nni customer uni customer nni ieee1588 on off pecp write profile id none integer 1 255 classifier mode dscp pcp dscp Displaying Interface Status Use the show eth command followed by the name of the interface to display the Ethernet port status for a specific interface show eth lt eth list gt all info description mtu mac addr admin operational last change name alias eth type eth act type auto neg loopback mode loopback timeout statistics alarm propagation The following is an example of an Ethernet interface status display Local Site show eth ethl eth ethl description Netronics eth eth1 mtu 16384 eth ethl mac addr 00 24 a4 00 06 d2 eth ethl admin up eth ethl operational up eth ethl last change 0000 00 12 11 eth ethl name Ethl eth eth1 alias i eth ethl eth type 1000fd eth ethl eth act type 1000fd eth ethl auto neg enabled eth ethl loopback mode disabled eth ethl1 loopback timeout 60 eth ethl alarm propagation disabled eth eth1 clock auto The following is an example of an Ethernet interface status display of NetBeam 2G Local Site show eth ethl eth ethl description Eth 1 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 60 Performing Basic Config
192. ion using the Web EMS Egress Queues There are eight egress queues one queue per CoS Eight queues for each of the interfaces EthO Eth1 Eth2 Eth3 and Eth4 are served by four queues on the radio RF Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 97 Performing Advanced Configuration Chapter 7 WFQ and Shaper can only be configured for queues 1 through 5 Weighted Random Early Detection WRED Weighted Random Early Detection is a queue management algorithm with congestion avoidance capabilities It is an extension of Random Early Detection RED in which a single queue may have several different queue thresholds Its main purpose is to improve TCP performance This feature is available for NetBeam 2G systems only Mark probability Packet discard pro bability Minimum Maximum threshold threshold 10778 Average queue size Figure 7 9 TCP Performance WRED Functionality When a packet arrives WRED handles it with the following process 1 The average queue size is calculated using the following equation Average old average 1 1 2 n current queue size 1 2 n 2 The packet is filtered according to its size e If the average queue size is below the minimum queue threshold the packet is queued normally e ftheaverage queue size is greater than the maximum threshold the packet is automatically dropped e lf the average queue size is between the minimum and maximum queue threshold the packet is either
193. ionalState up down N A State of the RF device 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 2 1 operational 1 17 Average CINR Average carrier to rfAverageCinr integer interference noise ratio 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 2 1 6 30 1 18 This object is only accessible via SNMP Average RSSI Average received signal rfAverageRssi integer strength indication 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 2 1 measured in DB 100 60 1 19 This object is only accessible via SNMP RF The current temperature of rfTemperature Varies N A Temperature the RF device 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 2 1 rf 1 26 temperature Radio Statistics Table 12 22 Radio Statistic Descriptions Attribute CLI Attribute Name Description SNMP Object ID Incoming Octets in The total number of octets received rfInOctets 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 2 2 1 1 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 245 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 Attribute CLI Attribute Name Description SNMP Object ID octets from the RF link Incoming Idle Octets in idle octets The total number of octets received from the RF link while idle rfinidleOctets 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 2 2 1 2 Incoming Good Octets in good octets The number of good octets received from the RF link rflnGoodOctets 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 2 2 1 3 Incoming Erroneous Octets in errored octets The number of received erred octets from the RF link rflnErroredOctets 1
194. is configuration is to configure an MD at level 0 set cfm md 1 name string Link level O0 The following command creates an MA set cfm ma 1 1 name string Link interval 300hz The following command creates a Component MA and assigns VLAN 200 as its Service Selector set cfm ma comp c2 1 1 vlan 200 The following command creates a Maintenance End Point MEP set cfm mep 1 1 1 interface ethO dir down cci enabled The following command creates a Peer MEP set cfm peer mep create 1 1 2 The following command creates an MD at level 2 set cfm md 2 name string Customer level 2 The following command creates an MA set cfm ma 2 2 name string Customer interval 1s The following command creates a Component MA and assigns VLAN 200 as its Service Selector set cfm ma comp c3 2 2 vlan 200 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 110 Performing Advanced Configuration Chapter 7 The following command creates a Maintenance End Point MEP set cfm mep 2 2 1 interface ethl dir up cci enabled The following command creates a Peer MEP set cfm peer mep create 2 2 2 The following command sets the MIP to the lower level set cfm ma comp c3 2 2 vlan 200 mhf creation explicit To create MIPs on the radio potr lower level you must create the Component MA on C3 Up MEP If the C3 Component MA is not created on C3 the CFM packets will not enter and pass through the MIP The MHF Creation value which determines whe
195. istics Use these indications to further refine the problem and help to assess possible causes both physical and logical in the NetBeam system Isolate the Fault Further isolate and characterize the problem using all available link indications Ascertain if the problem is related to End equipment configuration or an interconnection A hardware fault in the link s accessories such as a cable Configuration settings this can be verified using the CLI Ahardware fault in one of the ODUs Aresult of larger network propagation problem Note that Loopback indications are especially useful when isolating the fault s component and network location Correct the Fault Once the fault is isolated implement the necessary corrective actions until resolution of the problem is confirmed Whenever possible it is recommended that you repeat commissioning tests in order to verify that the problem link is now operating correctly Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 201 NetBeam Diagnostics NetBeam ODU LEDs Chapter 11 The following table lists the possible status of all LEDs together with a description for purposes of diagnostics Table 11 1 NetBeam ODU LEDs LED Color Description PWR Power Green Power OK Red Power Failure Off No Alarms Blink Green Device boot Blink Green RF activity RF Green Link Up ETH1 2 3 4 Blink Green
196. it breaker is the disconnecting device and should be readily accessible e When connecting the ODU to a MAINS DC distribution system use a two ampere circuit breaker to enable the central DC system to isolate the ODU in an emergency case e Use one poly circuit breaker and should connect it on the live voltage or The other poly should be grounded e Connect the circuit breaker to the or live voltage Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 30 Installing the NetBeam System Chapter 2 e The DC input is floating so either or can be connected to the GND on the power supply side For the sake of consistency with other systems Netronics recommends that you connect the to the GND e Useatwo wire cable 14 18 AWG to connect the power supply to the ODU On the ODU DC terminal connect only the and wires Do not connect to the ODU s GND input Disconnect all power cables before service Caution Preparing the Cables Before inserting a cable connector into the ODU you must first enclose the cable connector in a protective All Weather shell Three sets of All Weather shells are provided with the ODU for the ODU interfaces The protective All Weather shell assembly is shown in Figure 2 6 Figure 2 6 All Weather Connecting Cable Shell Assembly 1 Cable Inlet Portion 3 Connector Outlet Portion 2 Rubber Gasket Insert 4 Ethernet Cable Three sets of rubber gasket inserts are provided for di
197. ive version If you do not execute the accept sw command before the accept timeout sec period specified in Step 3 ends the system resets and wakes up running the software version image stored in the active flash bank Effectively this means that the software version rolls back Note that such a rollback also occurs if a reset occurs for whatever reason before the accept sw command is entered Monitoring CLI Sessions Use the following command to display active CLI sessions show loginsession my all In response the software displays the following Session ID Session Time xx dddd hh mm ss yy dddd hh mm ss Where xx or yy is a two digit integer from 00 to 99 and dddd hh mm ss days 0000 9999 hours 00 24 minutes 00 60 seconds 00 60 To display only the CLI session of the user entering the command use the show loginsession my command To display all active CLI session use the show loginsession all command The maximum number of CLI sessions is 10 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 158 Performing System Administration Chapter 9 Login Sessions Session ID Session Time E 00 0000 00 46 55 01 0000 00 34 49 Figure 9 7 Login Sessions Screen Viewing System Inventory You can display a system inventory list using the Web EMS or the CLI The NetBeam serial number and product type can be viewed under the chassis class in the Web EMS or can be accessed with the followi
198. ively more recent commands Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 222 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 Invoking CLI Help and Autocompletion The NetBeam CLI assists you both actively and passively as follows You can explicitly request syntax help on the command line e You can explicitly request autocompletion assistance on the command line The CLI command interpreter always checks the validity and completeness of a string that is entered on the command line When a command is determined to be invalid the CLI responds with a help message If possible the command interpreter derives the intended command from the initial entry and explains the syntax of the command and the range of allowed values When a command is determined to be incomplete for example if a required object or attribute is missing the CLI responds with a choice of variants that represent the possible values based on your initial entry The following table summarizes the ways to invoke CLI help and autocompletion features Table 12 7 Invoking CLI Help and Autocompletion Features Feature Description Help string Returns a help line for the requested command and object For example Default help set vlan xxx returns Default set vlan comp id list vid list fdb id fdbid egress bridge ports untagged bridge ports where bridge ports are port names or none fdbid in range 1 64 an
199. k poe status low loopback enabled tx mute enabled ql eecl or worse cold start modulation change sfp in ref clock switch erp ready erp forced switch erp manual switch erp signal fail erp invalid version Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual mask no mask no mask no mask no mask no mask no mask no mask no mask no mask no mask no mask no mask no mask no mask no mask no mask no 139 Monitoring the System Chapter 8 event cfg rx ql eecl mask no event cfg poe incompatible mask no Events Configuration A link down temperature high cfm fault alarm synthesizer unlock poe status low loopback enabled ix mute enabled gl eec1 or worse cold start modulation change sfp in ref clock switch erp ready erp forced switch erp manual switch erp signal fail erp invalid version rx gl eec1 Figure 8 3 Events Configuration Screen Viewing Radio Statistics You can display radio statistics using the Web EMS or the CLI Radio statistic counters can be used to identify radio errors When there are no errors on In Errored Octets In Errored Packets and In Lost Packets in the current radio statistics this indicates that the radio link is operating without errors Viewing Radio Statistics Using the Web EMS To display radio statistics using the Web EMS click Radio on t
200. lan component id vid sl sl cl el c2 c2 c3 G3 c4 c4 default undef undef undef undef undef fdb id egress Glj CGZ 09 04 Clee cl c2 c3 c4 none host sl host sl eth0 s1 eth0 s1 eth1 s1 eth1 s1 eth2 s1 eth2 s1 untagged host none eth0 none eth1 none eth2 none For NetBeam 2G the following additional config is displayed c5 co c6 c6 1 undef 1 undef 1 ul ii 1 eth3 sl1 eth3 s1 eth4 s1 eth4 sl eth3 none eth4 none Configuring VLANs Using the Web EMS To configure VLANs using the Web EMS c4 disabl history disabl disabl disabl disabl disabl disabl disabl disabl disabl 0000000000 disable disable disable disable Chapter 6 1 In the Web EMS Main screen click Bridge The Bridge screen is displayed 2 Click the VLANs section of the Bridge screen A Figure 6 4 Web EMS Bridge Screen VLANs Section 3 Click Add The Add VLAN window is displayed Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual VID Egress Set Untagged Set History 1 1 C1 C2 C3 c4 c5 C1 c2 C3 c4 c5 c6 disable 1 1 hosts1 host disable 1 1 jnone jetho disable 1 IE Jeth1 51 eth1 disable 1 1 jnone jeth2 disable n l1 none eth3 disable 1 1 none eth4 disable lunge fi c1 c2 c3 c4 c5 c6 none disable Add 71 NetBeam Networking Configuration Chapter 6 mun cum Component VID FDB
201. list gt ring id lt value gt type lt value gt fdb id lt value gt role lt value gt cw port lt value gt acw port lt value gt raps md level lt value gt raps svid lt value gt raps cvid lt value gt version lt value gt revertive lt value gt hold off timer lt value gt guard timer lt value gt wtb timer lt value gt wtr timer lt value gt action lt value gt lt ring index list gt lt list 1 16 gt Default gt To display ring statistics use the following command Default gt show ring all statistics ring 1 raps tx 1443 lt ACW RPL owner originate RAPS ring 1 raps rx 1443 lt Received RAPS ring 1 local sf cnt 0 Signal Failure ring 1 remote sf cnt Signal Failure ring 1 nr cnt sI No request ring 1 nr rb cnt 2 No request Request blocked ring 1 elapsed time 0000 02 00 24 To display ring events use the following command Default gt show log Jul 5 14 27 21 sw cad link down eth ethO Jul 5 14 27 21 sw cad modulation change qpsk 1 4 0 5 Jul 5 14 27 22 sw cad local Signal Fail at 1 CW unblocked ACW blocked Jul 5 14 30 43 sw cad remote Signal Fail at 1 CW unblocked ACW blocked Jul 5 14 30 43 sw cad link up eth ethO Jul 5 14 30 43 sw cad modulation change qpsk 2 2 0 5 Jul 5 14 31 43 sw cad ERP lis ready Role none Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 132 Performing Advanced Configuration Chapter 7 CLI example for setting failure de
202. ll S VID Translation Table The S VID Translation table is used to maintain bi directional mapping between a Local S VID used in data and protocol frames transmitted and received through a CNP or PNP and a Relay S VID used by the filtering and forwarding process Each VID Translation table definition contains Component Port Local S VID values and the Relay S VID values for each specified S VID If no entry exists in this table for a specified Component Port and Local S VID then a substitute value is taken from the Relay S VID that is specified in a frame received on a Local S VID Port All S VID Translation table entries are permanent and are restored when the device is reset Use the following command to create and modify S VID Translation table entries set svid xlat sl lt ext bridge port list gt vid relay svid vid If the entry does not already exist the set svid xlat command creates it and assigns the attributes specified Upon creation in the event that an attribute is not explicitly specified the entry is created with the default value for that attribute Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 81 NetBeam Networking Configuration Chapter 6 If the entry already exists then the set svid xlat command replaces the attributes that are currently defined for the entry with those specified in the command Note the following conditions for execution of the set svid xlat command The command is valid only for br
203. ll servicing to qualified service personnel Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way For example if the power supply cord or plug is damaged liquid has been spilled on the apparatus objects have fallen into the apparatus the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture it does not operate normally or has been dropped There is a risk of personal injury or death if the NetBeam antennas come near electric power lines Carefully read and follow all instructions in this manual By nature of the installation you may be exposed to hazardous environments and high voltage Use caution when installing the outdoor system This apparatus must be connected to earth ground Do not open the unit There is a risk of electric shock inside You are cautioned that any change or modification not expressly approved in this manual could void your authority to operate this equipment There are no user serviceable parts inside All service must be performed by qualified personnel The Netronics NetBeam can be installed in wet outdoor locations Make sure closure caps are installed and all cable connections are securely fastened and waterproofed The Netronics NetBeam can only be used with approved antennas Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 3 Safety and Regulatory Notices The following are mandatory notices for installation and operation of NetBeam 71 76 81 86 Ghz Wireless Backhaul Link Indications appearing here
204. lt hist range gt all For example show RF statistics For a complete description of available statistics refer to Monitoring the System on page 137 Using Statistics Intervals You can specify a range of history intervals for the requested object statistics When a statistics interval is requested the CLI returns information in the following format Interval Start End num time time Where num The interval number from O to 95 Interval O is the current interval while intervals 1 to 95 hold statistics collected from 15 to 1425 minutes ago The duration time for each interval is 15 minutes time The interval time displayed in a format that is identical to the System Up Time Table 12 8 When a history interval is not specified in the command line the CLI displays the ordinary accumulative counters associated with the object ma Usingthe clear statistics command erases all accumulative counters as ags well as the counters for Interval O Note Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 225 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 CLI Managed Object Reference This section describes all NetBeam System objects that can be created modified displayed or deleted using the command line interface Use Figure 12 1 to quickly identify and locate a specific NetBeam object according to its logical function in the NetBeam System System Eth Physical Inventory Bridge Man agement Managing SNMP Inco
205. ly System Manual 45 Performing Basic Configuration Using the Web EMS Chapter 3 manually configure the Role and set the Master unit to 75tx 25rx or 90tx 10rx and the Slave unit to 25tx 75rx or 10tx 90rx The default value is 5Otx 50rx e Mode Select one of the following operation modes Alignment Carrier Wave transmission Used for antenna alignment Adaptive Adaptive Bandwidth Code and Modulation Static Fixed modulation profile If you select Static you must select from a list of pre configured modulation profiles in the Modulation field Default value is Adaptive Modulation QPSK 16QAM or 64QAM ae S amp S Max modulation for NetBeam M7 systems is 16QAM Note e Sub Channels From 1 to 4 occupied bandwidth For Channel Width 500 MHz 125 500 MHz e Repetitions 1 2 or 4 e FECRate 0 5 When using the system in Static mode you must select from a pre defined list of modulation profiles In Adaptive mode the ODU switches among the modulation profiles from this list To check the available modulation profiles refer to Viewing Modulation Profiles Using the Web EMS on page 47 e Tx and Rx Link ID You can set unique Link IDs for links installed on the same site to avoid locking on the wrong transmitter e Operational Status Displays the radio link status Up or Down e Tx and Rx State Displays the Tx and Rx chains status e RSSI dBm Displays the Receiver Signal Stre
206. m CLI Chapter 12 Attribute CLI Description SNMP Object ID Value Attribute Name Operational The current operational state of ifOperStatus 1 Up Status the interface expressed as an 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 Ready to operational integer 8 pass When this attribute is in the Down packets state but the Administrative 2 Down Status attribute admin is in the Not Up state then a fault condition is available for presumed to exist on the interface hostO If the Administrative Status attribute admin is in the Down state then the operational attribute should also be in the Down state If the Administrative Status attribute admin changes to the Up state then the operational attribute should also change to the Up state if the interface is ready to transmit and receive network traffic It should remain in the Down state if and only if there is a fault condition that prevents the interface from going to the Up state Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 275 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 Attribute CLI Description SNMP Object ID Value Attribute Name Last Change The value of sysUpTime at the time ifLastChange ddd hh mm N A Time the interface entered its current 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 ss where lastChange operational state 9 ddd decimal If the current operational state integer was entered prior to the last representing reinitialization of the local network days it can management subsystem then the bean
207. mNext SeqNumber 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 1 1 24 dotlagCfmMepUnexpLtr In 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 1 1 42 dotlagCfmMepTransmit LtmResult 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 1 1 43 dotlagCfmMepTransmit LtmSeqNumber Chapter 12 ok not ok 259 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 CCM Message Object Attributes Table 12 30 CCM Message Attributes Attribute CLI Description SNMP Object ID Syntax Access Default Attribute Name MD Index Value to be used as the index dotlagCfmMdlnde Integer N A of the MA table entries for the x MD when the management 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 entity wants to create a new 8 1 5 2 1 1 entry in that table An entry cannot be created if a corresponding MD Index does not exist MA Index Index of the MA table dotlagCfmMalnde N A dot1agcfmMdMaNextIndex x which needs to be inspected to 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 find an available index for row 8 1 6 1 1 1 creation An entry cannot be created if a corresponding MA Index does not exist MEPID An integer that is unique for all 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 integer RC the MEPs in the same MAthat 8 1 7 1 1 1 identifies a specific MA End dotlagCfmMep Point An entry cannot be Identifier created if a corresponding MEPID does not exist Last Error Condition The last received CCM that 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 RO CCM last error ccm triggered an DefErrorCCM 8 1 7 1 1 15 fault dotlagCfmMepEr rorCcmLastFailure Last Xcon Condition The last received
208. mac lbm dst mepid lbm dst type lbm tx num lbm tx data lbm tx prio Ibm tx drop ltm dst mac l1tm dst mepid ltm dst type Itm tx ttl lbm tx status ltm tx status fng state mac high defect defects ccm seq errors ccm tx Ibm tx result lbm tx sn lbm next sn lbr in order lbr out of order lbr tx l1tm next sn ltr unexpected ltm tx result ltm tx sn last error ccm last xcon ccm info Use the following command to clear a particular MEP or all MEPs clear cfm mep lt md idx list gt all lt ma idx list gt all lt mepid list gt all Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 105 Performing Advanced Configuration Chapter 7 MEP commands include both configurable and read only attributes leth leth1 down LlN s 1 Q 4 Figure 7 16 CFM MEP Setup Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 106 Performing Advanced Configuration Chapter 7 Working with Peer MEPs MEPs connected by the NetBeam Provider Bridge feature are known as Peer MEPs Peer MEPs can be used to measure CCM delay and changes in that delay Use the following command to create a Peer MEP entry This command causes automatic creation of entries in the Peer MEP DB for all MEPIDs that have entries in MEP table and this Peer MEP ID set cfm peer mep create md i
209. minal block 1 1 connector NetBeam mounting assembly NetBeam mounting assembly 1 1 You must examine all NetBeam package contents carefully upon arrival If a component is missing or damaged contact your NetBeam distributor before attempting to install the equipment Unpacking the NetBeam When you unpack the components of the NetBeam it is important to use care so as to avoid damaging or scratching the antenna radome e Donottouch the radome when unpacking the ODU e Donotrest the ODU face down or touch the radome It is crucial to prevent contact between the radome and other objects Required Tools Ensure that you have the following tools with you when performing a NetBeam installation e Standard handheld digital voltage meter DVM with probes e Standard open end wrench 13 millimeter e Philips screwdriver medium size head for grounding connection e 8mm Allen key for ODU installation with 2 ft antenna e Cable ties for securing network and optional power cables e Cutter Netronics NetPoint Pro Family System Manual 22 Installing the NetBeam System Chapter 2 Cable labeling Preparing for Installation You must install NetBeam units in pairs working with two technicians One technician must be located at each node in order to align and calibrate each antenna ODU with its remote node pair for best performance You must calculate the expected receive signal strength for each antenna ODU read from t
210. ming Basic Configuration Using the Web EMS Chapter 3 Configuring SNMP Settings You can configure the SNMP V2 managers trap destination in the SNMP section of the System screen Refer to Managing SNMP on page 189 for SNMP V3 attributes You can define up to five managers with the following settings e Destination IP Address e UDP Port Number e Security Name community IP Address UDP Port SNMP Version Security Name Engine ID v2c public local Figure 3 14 Web EMS System Screen SNMP Managers Section To add or change managers 1 Click Add 2 Enter an Index and an IP Address 3 Click Apply a S Refer to the Managing SNMP section for SNMPv3 settings Note Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 50 Performing Basic Configuration Using the Web EMS Chapter 3 Default VLAN Setting NetBeam s Undefined VLAN feature enables transparent forwarding of both tagged and untagged traffic by default No configuration or license is necessary for this feature which gives you the flexibility to change your VLANs with no additional configuration necessary in the NetBeam system For VLAN configuration options including the ability to define or block specific VLANs refer to Configuring VLANs on page 70 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 51 Performing Basic Configuration using the CLI This chapter describes how to perform basic configuration tasks using the CLI
211. ming Queues Scripts Outgoing Queues Software Upgrade Bridging Port VLAN Common VLAN Table C VLAN Registration RF PEP Virtual Port Modulation S VID Translation Table Forwarding Data Base FDB Address Table Maintenance Domain Connectivity Maintenance Association ARB Component MA Fault Maintenance End Point Management Rec d CCM Presentation z C FM Peer MEP Create DB Mon ito ring Multiple CLI Monitoring LTR DB an d Events Alarms and Logs Diagnostics CLI Object Model NetBeam 60 70 Wireless Backhaul Link Figure 12 1 The NetBeam CLI Object Model Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 226 Attribute CLI Attribute Name System Description description System Object ID snmp id Using the NetBeam CLI Management Object Attributes This section lists and describes the attributes of network commands System Object Attributes Table 12 8 System Object Attributes Description SNMP Object ID A text string describing sysDescr Variable ASCII the system Generally 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 1 text includes the full name and version identification of the system s hardware type operating system and networking software The vendor s sysObiectID 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 authoritative 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 2 identification of the network management subsystem contained in the entity Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual Chapter 12 NB 1G1 HW W X SW Y Z where W X the HW version Y Z
212. n files which enable the transfer and loading of the software file The process results in full radio configuration completed without any need for intervention on your part This feature is supported on NetBeam 2G systems only Zero Touch Predefinitions Ensure that the following requirements are in fulfilled in order to enable Zero Touch e The system must have an enabled DHCP server and a TFTP server as well as access to your servers e Connectivity to the servers must be verified The Vlan for Inband management must be set to the correct operator Vlan e The operator must set the unit s frequency to the requested or default frequency Netronics NetPoint Pro Family System Manual 195 Zero Touch Chapter 10 Zero Touch System Process Predefinition ODU Side 1 Enable the Net config file set net config config file enable 2 Enable the DHCP server set ip 1 ip addr dhcp Zero Touch Procedure 1 The system starts and attempts to run the startup config file 2 If the startup config file does not exist the system runs the default config file and then the customer default config file if it exists on the system 3 If the DHCP config file is enabled the script runs on the DHCP server allocating an IP address to the ODU 4 The DHCP server points to the TFTP server that contains the user s zero touch txt configuration file In the example below it changes the system name to NetBeam_SiteA it then copies a new so
213. n a table containing static configuration information for each VLAN that is configured in the device by local or network management All VLAN table entries are permanent and are restored when the device is reset Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 72 NetBeam Networking Configuration Chapter 6 Use the following syntax to create or modify a VLAN set vlan lt comp id list gt lt vid list gt fdb id lt fdb id gt egress lt bridge port list gt untagged lt bridge port list gt Blocking Specific VLANs You can block specific VLANs from entering the NetBeam system by using the set vlan command and setting the egress attribute to none The following example blocks VLAN 333 traffic from entering the NetBeam system default gt set vlan c3 333 egress none untagged none Set done vlan c3 333 default gt set vlan c4 333 egress none untagged none Set done vlan c4 333 default gt set vlan c2 333 egress none untagged none Set done vlan c2 333 default gt show vlan component id vid fdb id egress untagged history sl 1 I Gl c2 G03 04 Gl Go2 C03 04 disable sl undef 1 cl c2 c3 c4 none disable cl 1 1 host sl host disable GE undef 1 host s1 none disable c2 1 1 eth0 s1 etho disable c2 undef 1 eth0 s1 none disable c3 ni 1 eth1 s1 eth1 disable c3 undef 1 ethl sl none disable c4 L 1 eth2 s1 eth2 disable c4 undef 1 eth2 s1 none disable default gt For NetBeam 2G the following additional config is displayed c5 1 1 eth3 s
214. nd line typically uses the following basic form command object lt object id s gt attribute name lt attribute value For example set eth ethl eth type 100hd command object object id s attribute name attribute value Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 212 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 Basic Conventions e CLI commands are not case sensitive e Youcan abbreviate commands and parameters as long as they contain enough letters to be distinguished from any other currently available commands or parameters e The commands entered from the CLI can apply to the entire system to a specific port or to a specific VLAN Common Syntax Rules This document uses the following notation conventions when presenting CLI usage examples These syntax conventions are found in commands index names objects and attributes Table 12 1 Common Syntax Rules Syntax Meaning a b c One of the specified values must be entered in the command line lt name gt The name of a required attribute explained in an accompanying or referenced section name The name of an optional attribute explained in an accompanying or referenced section n m Represents a number or integer series from n to m Repeatedly Used Identifiers This document uses the following identifying conventions when presenting CLI usage examples These syntax conventions are used primarily to represent various
215. nect one end of the grounding cable to the ground outlet on the left side of the ODU using the grounding cable lug 2 Tighten the lug securely in place 3 Connect the opposite end of the grounding cable to the earth connection typically located on the mounting pole If the earth connection is out of reach of the grounding cable install an alternative cable Figure 2 5 ODU with Grounding Cable Connected It is recommended to use Lightning Surge Protector on every Ethernet cable to protect the indoor networking equipment The Lightning Surge Arrestor should be installed indoor next to the cable s point of entry and shold be properly grounded An example for correct ODU grounding and Lightning Surge Protector installation is shown in Figure 2 3 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 29 Installing the NetBeam System Chapter 2 f 3 Grounded to pole ry Make sure to remove paint to J E good ground connectivity 1 Shielded Ethernet Cable To Indoor PoE m m Roof Outdoor Ground un M Shielded Ethernet Cable From roof Verify grounding continulty between outdoor and indoor ground AC Feed Indoor Ground Power Supply Notes The DC power input range of the ODU is 22 57 VDC for NetBeam 1G and M7 and 36 57 VDC for NetBeam 2G e The DC supply should be limited to two ampere to avoid surges and possible damage to the ODU For that use limited power supply or circuit breaker fast blow fuse The circu
216. ner power supply fan sensor module port stack cpu unknown 2 chassis 3 backplane 4 container 5 e g chassis slot or daughter card holder powerSupply 6 fan 7 sensor 8 module 9 e g plug in card or daughter card port 10 stack 11 e g stack of multiple chassis entities cpu 12 231 Attribute CLI Attribute Name Parent Relative Position rel pos Physical Name name Using the NetBeam CLI Description An indication of the relative position of this child component among all its sibling components Sibling components are defined as entPhysicalEntries that share the same instance values of each of the entPhysicalContainedIn and entPhysicalClass objects An NMS can use this object to identify the relative ordering for all sibling components of a particular parent identified by the entPhysicalContainedIn instance in each sibling entry The textual name of the physical entity The value of this object should be the name of the component as assigned by the local device and should be suitable for use in commands entered at the device s console This might be a text name e g console or a simple component number e g port or module number such as 1 depending on the physical component naming syntax of the device If there is no local name or if this object is otherwise not applicable then this object contains a zero
217. nfiguration may be applied Note that 1588 must be enabled Local side network side assuming local clock Host is used no SyncE running set ieeel588 admin up Remote side BTS side set ref clock eth0 prio 100 ql config ql eecl ql mode disable set ieeel588 admin up Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 130 Performing Advanced Configuration Chapter 7 Configuring Ethernet Ring Protection ERP Ethernet Ring Protection ERP is a network resiliency protocol defined in ITU T G 8032 The NetBeam supports ERP G 8032v2 with backwards compatibility to previous versions ERP support enables protection for any point of failure in the network This means that network connectivity is maintained in the event that the Ethernet link the radio link or even the entire NetBeam fails This provides resiliency for both Ethernet Ethernet rings that typically protect single site connectivity and Ethernet RF rings that typically protect against RF network failure ERP is a relatively simple protocol that operates at the network level on the set of nodes that constitute the ring or set of rings ERP monitors the Ethernet layer to discover and identify Signal Failure SF conditions and prevents loops within the ring by blocking one of the links either a pre determined link or a failed link ERP verifies at all times the ring is closed that frames will not be looped This is accomplished by taking down a Ring protection Link RPL whenever ther
218. ng CLI command default gt show inventory 1 inventory 1 desc NB 1G1 inventory 1 cont in 0 inventory 1 class chassis inventory 1 rel pos ocl inventory 1 name Chassis inventory 1 hw rev inventory 1 fw rev inventory 1 sw rev inventory 1 serial F026500011 inventory 1 mfg name Netronics inventory 1 model name NB 1G1 ODU 2ft inventory 1 fru true Viewing System Inventory Using the Web EMS To view the ODU s inventory list using the Web EMS 1 In the Web EMS Main screen click System The System screen is displayed 2 Click the Inventory section of the System screen which lists parts sub parts and their details Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 159 Performing System Administration Chapter 9 Inventory A Description Container Class Rel Pos Name HWRev FWRev SW Rev Serial NB 1G1 j0 chassis 1 Chassis JF026500011 External An 1 Jother jo jAntenna RF Board 7 1 jmodule 1 IRF JAO JF132003095 BBBoard 1 jcontainer 2 Base Band 16 128 3 0 0 6178 F143004789 Modem Chip 4 module jo Modem 801 FPGAcode 4 module 1 FPGA 1 11 9764 CPLD code 4 module 2 CPLO 2 8 SFP1 4 jmodule i3 SFP1 SFP2 l4 module 4 SFP2 Figure 9 8 System Screen Inventory Section Viewing System Inventory Using the CLI To display a list and description of the system inventory use the following command show inventory lt ph idx range
219. ng bracket using one bolt and separate them by about 120 degrees so that the assembly can to be attached to the mounting pole 3 Place the assembly on the mounting pole and rotate the front and back mounting brackets to close the assembly on the pole Replace the unit mounting bolt that was removed 4 Ensure that both front and back mounting brackets are attached evenly to the pole and are completely level 5 Usethe 13 mm open wrench to tighten the nuts on both unit mounting bolts Temporarily tighten the unit mounting bolts at this stage to keep the unit from moving freely 6 By default the ODU is delivered with the quick release plate securely attached in a vertical polarization If necessary change the ODU polarization to match the orientation of the remote ODU by removing the quick release plate changing its orientation and reattaching For ease of reference the markings V vertical and H horizontal are engraved on the back side of the ODU 7 Examine the position scales of both the Azimuth adjustment lock bolts G and the elevation adjustment lock bolts 63 found on the front mounting bracket and ensure that they are positioned at O degrees in the middle of the scale 8 Position the quick release hooks 8 onto the top elevation adjustment lock bolt 6 and carefully set the ODU in place on the front mounting bracket and slide it firmly inwards Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 24 Installing the Net
220. ng is a partial list of events that can cause system problems End equipment problems such as connection or device configuration issues External hardware faults System level configuration issues Hardware faults that require radio link replacement This chapter describes the NetBeam diagnostics features and offers basic instructions for how to use these features to isolate and resolve operating faults in the ODUs or in the NetBeam network The chapter includes the following topics The Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Process NetBeam ODU LEDs NetBeam System Alarms and Events NetBeam System Statistics NetBeam System Loopbacks Netronics NetPoint Pro Family System Manual 200 NetBeam Diagnostics Chapter 11 The Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Process Follow this step by step process whenever you encounter a problem with the link Define the Problem Isolating a problem s symptoms is the first step in corrective maintenance It is important to define the problem clearly and fully Define the problem as either a customer impact type for example loss of element management or no Ethernet services over the link or a product related type for example a link is down or an ODU does not power up Check and Gather Relevant Information Examining the link s status indications will provide both current and historical information regarding the link s performance and alarms Indications include ODU LEDs System Alarms and System Stat
221. ngress MAC address field If the 14 NN NN NN dotiagCfmLtringress object dotlagCfmLtringressMac NN NN NN contains the value ingNoTlv 0 where N is a then the contents of this object hexadecimal are meaningless number for example 00 AF DD 1E 2D A3 the rest hexadecimal string LTR Ingress Port ID Format of the Ingress Port ID If 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 2 1 if alias RO Subtype the dotlagCfmLtringress object 15 dot1agCfmltringress port comp ingr port id contains the value ingNoTlv 0 PortldSubtype mac net subtype then the contents of this object addr if are meaningless name agent circuit id local LTR Ingress Port ID Ingress Port ID The format of this 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 2 1 Format in RO Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 267 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 Attribute CLI Description SNMP Object ID Syntax Access Attribute Name ingr port id object is determined by the value 16 dotlagCfmLtringress accordance of the Portld with LTR dot1agCfmltringressPortidSubtyp Chassis ID e object If the Subtype A dot1agCfmltringress object hexadecimal contains the value ingNoTlv 0 string is used then the contents of this object if no format is are meaningless known LTR Egress Action The value returned in the Egress 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 2 1 none ok RO egr action Action Field of the LTM The value 17 dotiagCfmLtrEgress down egrNoTlv 0
222. ngth Indicator e CINR dB Displays the Carrier to Interference Noise ratio which indicates the radio link s signal quality In normal conditions CINR217 indicates a good signal quality e Tx Power dBm ODU s transmit power 5 to 35 dBm 7 to 5 dBm for NetBeam 2G Note that it will take the ODU up to 2 minutes to update its Tx power Adjust Tx Power so the RSSI at the remote end will not be higher than 35 dBm overload threshold The Tx power value sets the transmit power for the highest modulation profile In case lower modulation profile s has higher max Tx power based on product s Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 46 Performing Basic Configuration Using the Web EMS Chapter 3 specs the Tx power will be increased automatically without indication in RF configuration menu e Tx Mute Set to Enable to mute the transmitter e Txmute Timeout seconds Number of seconds for Tx mute enabled e Loopback ODU RF loopback Select the modulation the ODU will be set to in loopback mode Note that it will take the ODU to stabilize after loopback about 1 minute so set the loopback timeout accordingly recommended 600 seconds e Loopback Timeout seconds Number of seconds the ODU will be in RF loopback e Long Range Mode allows radio link at more than 4500 m up to 7000 m link Set to True only when path length is over 4500 m 3 Click Apply Viewing Modulation Profiles Using the Web EMS To vie
223. nt then this object will contain a zero length string Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual Chapter 12 SNMP Object ID SNMP Syntax CLI Syntax character string entPhysicalHardware Rev 1 3 6 1 2 1 47 1 1 1 1 8 character string character string entPhysicalFirmware Rev 1 3 6 1 2 1 47 1 1 1 1 9 character string 233 Using the NetBeam CLI Attribute CLI Attribute Name Physical Software Revision sw rev Physical Serial Number serial Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual Description The vendor specific software revision string for the physical entity Note that if revision information is stored internally in a non printable e g binary format then the agent must convert such information to a printable format in an implementation specific manner If no specific software revision string is associated with the physical component or if this information is unknown to the agent then this object will contain a zero length string The vendor specific serial number string for the physical entity The preferred value is the serial number string actually printed on the component itself if present Not every physical component will have a serial number or even need one Physical entities for which the associated value of the entPhysicallsFRU object is equal to false 2 e g the repeater ports within a repeater module do not need their own unique serial number An
224. o distinguish between ieee8021QBridgeCompone s1 the multiple virtual bridge ntld instances within a PB 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 Component identifiers must 1 be defined in the Bridge Component table Table 12 38 VLAN Version Number The version number of IEEE ieee8021QbridgeVlanVersi RO version1 version 802 1Q that this device on supports Number 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 2 Maximum VLAN ID The maximum IEEE 802 1Q ieee8021QBridgeMaxVlanl RO n a max vid VLAN ID that this device d supports Possible values are 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 4094 3 Maximum Number of The maximum number of ieee8021QBridgeMaxSupp RO n a VLANs max num IEEE 802 1Q VLANs that this ortedVlans device supports Possible 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 values are 1 4094 4 Current Number of The number of IEEE 802 1Q ieee8021QBridgeNumVlans RO n a VLANs curr num VLANs currently active on the 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 network This attribute is 5 updated each time a VLAN is added or deleted from the network Possible values are 1 4094 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 285 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 VLAN Table Attributes Table 12 44 VLAN Table Attributes Attribute CLI Description CLI Object ID Access Default Attribute Name Component Identifier Used to distinguish between multiple ieee8021QbridgeVlanStatic N A s1 virtual bridge instances within a PB Componentld Component identifiers must b
225. onfiguration symmetric symmetric Asymmetric ratio 26 Asymmetric ratio ODU polarization v lH v H Link distance Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual meters 65 Commissioning and Acceptance Procedure Chapter 5 RF Link Tests Expected RSSI dBm dBm Measured RSSI dBm dBm Measured CINR dB dB Green RF LED C Yes C No E Yes No RF operational status Up Yes No C Yes No RF Statistics error counters clear Yes No Yes C No Ethernet Services Tests Packet Loss test Packet Analyzer _ SW based No Packet Loss Test duration No Packet Loss Test duration Eth Statistics dropped packets counters clear Yes C No 3 Yes C No Management IP address Mask IP Mask Default IP Gateway In band management enabled C Yes VLAN ID B Yes VLAN ID Management of local and remote C Yes C No Yes E No NMS used Web CLI only Web CLI only f Other NMS management access ok L Nok N A ok L Nok N A Traps received in NMS ok Nok N A ok Nok N A Final Configuration Verification Copy running config to startup C Done Done Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 66 Commissioning and Acceptance Procedure Chapter 5
226. onfiguration Using the Web EMS Chapter 3 mm Before you perform basic configuration on the ODU you must ensure that the S amp S ODU is set to either Adaptive or Static mode The RF LED color indicator ona A network ready ODU is green Refer to Step 2 in Performing Initial System Setup on page 36 Connecting to the ODU Using the Web EMS 1 Launch an Internet browser and enter the ODU s IP address in the address bar The default IP address is https 192 168 0 1 2 Wait for the Java Applet to load and enter the username and password admin admin The Web EMS Main screen is displayed Save Configuration Figure 3 1 Web EMS Main Screen NetBeam 1G NetBeam M7 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 39 Performing Basic Configuration Using the Web EMS Chapter 3 Timeout sec p Start Rollback Reset System Save Configuration Figure 3 2 Web EMS Main Screen NetBeam 2G Saving Configuration Changes and Resetting the System Using the Web EMS Whenever you make changes to the ODU configuration using the Web EMS you must click Save Configuration on the Web EMS Main screen to save the configuration changes to the startup configuration If you do not save the configuration the changes will be lost the next time the system resets To reset the system click Reset System on the Web EMS Main screen Quick Configuration It is recommended to use the Quick Configura
227. onnection is established the ODU responds as follows login as admin NB2G1 S N F323036112 Ver 5 0 0 9931 admin 192 168 0 1 s password NB2G1 gt Saving Configuration Changes and Resetting the System Using the CLI Whenever you make changes to the ODU configuration you must save the configuration changes to the startup configuration If you do not save the configuration the changes will be lost the next time the system is reset Use the following command to save configuration changes to the startup configuration Local Site copy running configuration startup configuration To reset the system use the reset system command You must reset the system whenever you exit Alignment mode Local Site reset system Configuring and Displaying Basic System Information Using the CLI Use the Set system name command to set the ODU s name Once you set the ODU s name a prompt appears with the name you just set the date and the time Default set system name Local Site Local Site To set system date amp time use the following command Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 53 Performing Basic Configuration Using the CLI Chapter 4 Local Site set system date 2012 12 01 time 15 08 00 Usethe show system command to display basic information about the ODU Local Site show system system description NB 1G1 system snmpid 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 system uptime 0000 00 05 10 system contact undefined system name Local Site
228. onnections and antenna alignment 4 Replace ODU Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 203 NetBeam Diagnostics Chapter 11 Indication Classification Explanation Probable Corrective and Severity Cause Actions Link Up Event The communication N A N A link either the RF or one of the Ethernet Trap Log ports is operational Modulation Event The modulation N A N A Change setting for the RF link currently in Adaptive Trap Log mode has changed Temperature Alarm The ODU temperature 1 The ODU is 1 Check the High has exceeded a installed in ODU installation di predefined threshold extreme and verify that it Medium temperature is installed in Trap Log conditions accordance with Active Alarm environmental List 2 Wrong specifications temperature reading in the 2 Replace ODU ODU Temperature Event The temperature of N A N A Normal the device has returned to the Trap Log normal range This event clears a Temperature High alarm SFP In Event SFP inserted N A N A Trap Log SFP Out Event SFP extracted N A N A Trap Log Reference Event The reference clock N A N A Clock Source Trap Log source for the Change NetBeam system has changed CFM Fault Alarm A maintenance end Varies 1 Use the Alarm point MEP has a reported OID to T1 persistent defect determine the Hig condition source of the Trap Log fault Active Alarm Netronics NetBeam Family Sys
229. opback Event Loopback cleared User action N A Disabled Trap Log Tx Mute Alarm User enabled Tx Mute User action N A Enabled Low Trap Log Active Alarm List Tx Mute Event Tx Mute cleared User action N A Disabled Trap Log Reception of Alarm SyncE quality received Network N A QL EEC1 or Low on the link is sameor changes or sync Worse worse that the ODU s failure Trap Log Active Alarm List internal clock quality Reception of QL better than EEC1 Event Trap Log SyncE quality restored N A N A NetBeam System Statistics The NetBeam system uses advanced RF and Ethernet counters to provide real time performance statistics for radio transmission activities Ethernet ports and VLAN traffic The following statistics enable quick analysis of system and component performance in support of troubleshooting and diagnostics b For more details on system statistics refer to Monitoring the System on page 137 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 206 NetBeam Diagnostics Chapter 11 RF Statistics Check RF statistic counters to identify radio errors and check the radio status history The RF statistics consist of real time statistic counters since the last time the counters were cleared The RF transmission quality indicators are rf in errored pkts rf in lost pkts and rf in errored octets A rise in these indicators indicates radio errors No errors in thse indicators in
230. ority regeneration table by extracting the highest priority value in this table on this MEP s Bridge Port 1 is lowest followed by 2 then 0 then 3 7 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 1 1 8 dotlagCfmMep CcmLtmPriority RC Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 253 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 Attribute CLI Description SNMP Object ID Syntax Access Default Attribute Name Lowest Primary An integer specifying the lowest 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 all def RC mac Defect priority defect that is allowed to 1 1 10 mac rem rem err low defect generate a fault alarm dotlagCfmMep err xcon xcon LowPrDef rem err xcon err xcon xcon no xcon Alarm Time The time that a defect must be 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 250 000 RC 250 alarm time present before a fault alarm is 1 1 11 issued dotlagCfmMep FngAlarmTime Reset Time The time that a defect must be 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 250 1000 RC 1000 reset time absent before resetting a fault 1 1 12 alarm dotlagCfmMep FngResetTime LBM Destination A unicast destination MAC 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 Mac RC 00 00 MAC Address address specifying the target 1 1 27 address in 00 00 Ibm dst mac MAC address field to be dot1agCfmMepTrans the form 00 00 transmitted This address will be mitLbmDestMacAddres NN NN used if the value for the column s NN NN dotlagCfmMepTransmitLbmDestl NN NN sMepld is False wh
231. orming Advanced Configuration Chapter 7 To view the discovered peer port MAC address and other settings default gt show link oam peer eth0 link oam peer eth0 mac addr 00 24 a4 00 1f b8 link oam peer eth0 vendor oui 00 24 a4 link oam peer eth0 vendor info 0 link oam peer eth0 mode active link oam peer eth0 pdu size 1518 link oam peer eth0 revision 2 link oam peer eth0 functions loopback Link OAM Loopback Link OAM loopback is supported and can be enabled on the Ethernet port Once enabled traffic received on the port is looped back to the port that initiated the remote loopback To set Link OAM loopback set link oam loopback lt eth list ethO ethl eth2 gt status lt value init terminate gt peer request lt value ignore process gt To allow ports to enter loopback state when receiving remote loopback initiation command the peer request status should be set to process default gt set link oam loopback ethO peer request process To initiate loopback on remote port the loopback status should be set to init default gt set link oam loopback ethO0 status init To view loopback settings default gt show link oam loopback ethO0 link oam loopback eth0 status remote link oam loopback eth0 peer request process The status will change to remote on the port that initiated the loopback i e sent the request for loopback and local on the port performing the loopback Use reset loopback command to stop
232. ort only if it can leave through this port as well By default the attribute is set to disabled 6 Click Apply to close the Change Port window 7 Click Apply to implement the changes and close the Bridge screen Configuring Bridge Ports Using the CLI The Bridge object is always followed by one or more name strings that t correspond to ports or devices to be acted upon In the commands below this string is represented as lt comp id list gt Note For more details on this convention see Designating Named Objects on page 219 Use the following command to assign the bridge device set bridge lt comp id list gt Use the following command to display bridge parameters show bridge lt comp id list gt all info mac addr num ports Use the following command to reset all bridge attributes clear bridge lt comp id list gt all Configuring the Bridging Port The bridging port provides access to port wide definitions from the bridge When using the bridge port commands you can specify any combination of components and ports However only certain combinations will produce a result In the current product version the following usage restrictions exist Component c1 is strictly associated with the Ports host and s1 Component c2 is strictly associated with the Ports ethO and s1 Component c3 is strictly associated with the Ports eth1 and s1 Component c4 is strictly associated with the P
233. orts eth2 and s1 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 79 NetBeam Networking Configuration Chapter 6 Component c5 is strictly associated with the Ports eth3 and s1 Component c6 is strictly associated with the Ports eth4 and s1 The Ports associated with the Component s1 are dependent on the c components that currently exist For example if the components c1 and c4 already exist then the Component s1 is associated with the Ports ethO eth1 c1 and c4 The validity of a specified combination should be tested before command execution You can use the set bridge port command to assign the bridging port parameters set bridge port lt comp id list gt lt bridge port list gt pvid lt vlan gt prio 0 7 admit untagged tagged all filter enabled disabled You can use the show bridge port command to display the bridging port attributes show bridge port lt comp id list gt all lt bridge port list gt all info mac addr num ports interface pvid prio admit filter gvrp vlan restricted last pdu origin statistics Configuring Provider Bridge and Advanced VLAN Settings Configuring PEP Virtual Ports PEP Virtual Ports are used to configure ingress port filtering PEP table entries define traffic flows from the provider network to the customer edge port The table is indexed by Component ID and S VID You can specify the default C VID value and default user priority in the PE
234. ost sl specifies the bridge ports c1 host and c1 s1 Note that not every combination of keywords is valid For example the command bridge port cl c2 hostis invalid because two different C components cannot be associated with the same port Designating Indexed Objects Countable NetBeam CLI objects are specified by their unique identifying keyword followed by the object s index number A VLAN is a typical countable object For example vlan 230 refers to the VLAN with the index number 230 A complete list of indexed objects is specified in a command using a comma separated series For example vlan 230 330 430 refers to VLANs with the index numbers 230 330 and 430 It is also possible to specify a range of indexed objects in a command For example vlan 230 270 refers to VLANs with the index numbers 230 to 270 inclusive Finally a mixed method may be used for specifying indexed objects in a command enabling references to both a range of objects and to individual objects For example vlan 230 270 300 401 410 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 221 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 refers to VLANs with the index numbers 230 to 270 VLAN number 300 and VLANs 401 to 410 Designating indexed objects is valid in all set show and clear commands If the show command is executed for indexed objects which do not exist the non existing objects are ignored and the command is only executed for existing objects
235. oud frames are forwarded based on the S VLAN tag only while the C VLAN tag remains shielded during data transmission Netronics NetPoint Pro Family System Manual 68 NetBeam Networking Configuration Chapter 6 The S VLAN tag is removed when the frame exits the provider network restoring the original customer frame The NetBeam incorporates a fully functional integrated Provider Bridge IEEE 802 1ad NetBeam Bridging Model The Netronics implementation of Provider Bridge is a network of up to seven virtual bridges connected in a cross like fashion as shown in Figure 6 1 and Figure 6 2 Eth1 Host Eth2 jx Figure 6 1 NetBeam 1G M7 Generic Model of the NetBeam Bridge Eth1 Host Eth2 Eth3 Eth4 px Figure 6 2 NetBeam 2G Generic Model of the NetBeam Bridge Each component acts as a virtual bridge A component can have both external and internal ports An external port name is identical to its interface name For example the C component 1 C1 external port name is ETH2 An internal port uses the name of its peer component as shown above For example when C component 1 C1 is connected to the S component the corresponding internal port is S1 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 69 NetBeam Networking Configuration Chapter 6 You can change the default bridge configuration to suit your network by removing or adding the desired bridge components All components are created managed and removed using the CLI or Web E
236. ounter Ibr tx LTM Next Sequence Number Itm next sn Unexpected Incoming LTR Itr unexpected LTM Transmit Result Itm tx result LTM Transmit Sequence Number Itm tx sn The Loopback Transaction Identifier dotiagCfmMepNextLbmTransld of the first LBM sent The value returned is undefined if dot1agCfmMepTransmitLbmhResult OK is False Next sequence number transaction identifier to be sent in a Loopback message This sequence number can be zero when it wraps around Total number of valid in order Loopback Replies received The total number of valid out of order Loopback Replies received Total number of Loopback Replies transmitted Next transaction identifier sequence number to be sent in a Linktrace message This sequence number can be zero when it wraps around The total number of unexpected LTRs received Indicates the result of the operation The LTM Transaction Identifier dot1agCfmMepLtmNextSeqNumbe r of the LTM sent The value returned is undefined if dot1agCfmMepTransmitLtmResult is False Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 1 1 35 dotlagCfmMepTransmit LbmSeqNumber 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 1 1 19 dotlagCfmMepNextLbm Transld 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 1 1 20 dotlagCfmMepLbrin 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 1 1 21 dotlagCfmMepLbrinOut 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 1 1 25 dotlagCfmMepLbrOut 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 1 1 23 dotlagCfmMepLt
237. own eth1 07 57 22 Mar 20 07 57 22 cad modulation change apsk 2 2 0 5 07 57 28 Mar 20 07 57 28 cad modulation change apsk 4 1 0 5 up 4 Figure 8 2 Events Screen Logs Section Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 138 Monitoring the System Chapter 8 To display a log of alarms and system events using the CLI use the show 1og command A log of alarms and system events appears including the date and time the alarm or event occurred 2010 7 10 2010 7 10 2010 7 10 2010 7 10 2010 7 10 2010 7 10 9 35 11 temperature high 9 36 13 link down ethO 9 36 49 link up ethO 9 40 04 temperature normal 9 45 21 temperature high 9 50 13 link down ethO To clear all system logs use the clear log command Events Configuration Masking The NetBeam supports masking of individual group alarms In case alarm is masked it is not displayed in the Active Alarms and Event Log and no trap is sent By default none of the alarms are masked To mask an alarm set the event cfg mask value to yes set event cfg lt event cfg id list gt mask lt value gt Use the following command to view the events configuration CLI gt show event cfg event cfg event cfg event cfg event cfg event cfg event cfg event cfg event cfg event cfg event cfg event cfg event cfg event cfg event cfg event cfg event cfg event cfg link down temperature high cfm fault alarm synthesizer unloc
238. packets which were ifOutDisacrds Packets out discards chosen to be discarded due to excessive 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 19 collision or excessive deferral Erroneous Outgoing The number of outbound packets that could ifOutErrors 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 20 Packets out errors not be transmitted because of errors Incoming Multicast The number of multicast packets received on iflnMulticastPkts Packets in mcast pkts the interface 1 3 6 1 2 1 31 1 1 1 2 Incoming Broadcast The number of broadcast packets received on iflnBroadcastPkts Packets in bcast pkts the interface 1 3 6 1 2 1 31 1 1 1 3 Outgoing Multicast The number of multicast packets transmitted ifOutMulticastPkts Packets out mcast pkts out of the interface 1 3 6 1 2 1 31 1 1 1 4 Outgoing Broadcast The number of broadcast packets transmitted ifOutBroadcastPkts Packets out bcast pkts out of the interface 1 3 6 1 2 1 31 1 1 1 5 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 278 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 Bridge Object Attributes Table 12 38 Bridge Object Attributes Attribute CLI Description SNMP Object ID Value Access Default Attribute Name Component ID Used to distinguish ieee8021BridgeBas None between the multiple eComponentld virtual bridge instances 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 within a PBB 2 1 1 1 1 1 The component id s1 cannot be supplied as an argument when using the clear command Bridge Address The MAC address to be ieee8021BridgeBas Octet RO
239. pares a file to send to the Manager Next the NE functioning as a client opens the FTP SFTP or TFTP session to the Manager who functions as a server After the session begins the Manager can use SNMP to request the session status In Progress or Terminated and Errors or OK Note that the NE can open only one session at a time Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 166 Performing System Administration Chapter 9 Manager NE Manager Side Network Element FTPISFTP TFTP Start Session Ask for Status Prepare or Find File SNMP Get Set Figure 9 11 SNMP Request Process SNMP PDU Activation You can use the following SNMP SET request commands to start a FTP SFTP or TFTP session and set the following items Table 9 3 SNMP SET Commands fileSessionProtocol ftp 1 sftp 2 tftp 3 fileSessionServer FTP SFTP or TFTP server IP address string fileSessionUser FTP SFTP or TFTP server user name string fileSessionPassword FTP SFTP or TFTP server password string fileSessionRemotePath URL of file on the Manager side includes file name Note that Manager decides the remote file name and location Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 167 Performing System Administration Chapter 9 The NE just uses parameters specified by the Manager to initiate the transfer filesessionLocalParams The parameter meaning depends on the command type fileSessionCommand parameter It can be the name of an act
240. pection verifies error free operation of the radio link e Noerrors loss on the RF Statistics counters show rf statistics Ethernet Services Test This inspection verifies correct Ethernet services flow and error free operation e Connect PCs on both ends of the link and use software based utilities to test for packet loss e lf available connect a packet analyzer to the GbE port and verify that no packets are lost Management Verification This inspection verifies proper management of the link e Verify correct management CLI connection to both local and remote ODUs e Verify management access from remote NMS stations Recording ODU Configuration Perform the following steps after the NetBeam ODU is commissioned and accepted Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 63 Commissioning and Acceptance Procedure Chapter 5 e Copy the Running Configuration currently active to Startup Configuration e Save the configuration file for future records and backup NetBeam Commissioning and Acceptance Form NetBeam Commissioning and Acceptance Form Customer Details Customer Project link name Physical Installation Verification Local Site Remote Site Site name amp address Mount type Roof top Roof top Mast Tower Mast Tower ODU mount above ground meters meters Clear line of sight Yes No Yes C No ODU safely mounted using C Yes No C Yes No Netron
241. pped frames Incoming Queues Commands Incoming Queues are defined only for rf note that the rf has only four queues Use the following command to display statistics for incoming queues show in queue rf all 1 4 all statistics Use the following command to clear the incoming queue statistics clear in queue rf all 1 4 all statistics In Queue Statistics A Interface QID Good Error Lost Elapsed Time m o 6183607 17 o 0119 01 34 49 rf 1 0 19 o 0119 01 34 49 m 2 0 25 jo 0119 01 34 49 m 3 0 15 o 0119 01 34 49 dear Figure 8 10 Incoming Queue Statistics Screen Table 8 2 Incoming Queues Commands Attribute CLI Description Syntax Attribute Name Interface Name Interface name rf currently only one but may be extended in the future Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 145 Monitoring the System Chapter 8 Attribute CLI Description Syntax Attribute Name QueuelD QueuelD fQueueID o fQueueID o Rangefrom1toa Rangefrom1toa 1to4 Good Frame The counter of the per good 0 264 Counter Q received good frames Erroneous Frame The counter of the per error 0 264 Counter Q received erroneous frames Lost Frame The counter of the per lost 0 264 Counter Q lost rx frames Viewing Ethernet Statistics You can display statistics on NetBeam s Ethernet interfaces using the Web EMS or the CLI Ethernet Statistics Attributes Table 8 3 Ethernet Stati
242. profile id none disable PCP rewrite on port PCP Rewrite in the Web EMS From the Main screen select QoS Expand the PCP Write Profile area Select a profile and click Edit In the PCP Mapping field enter a number from 0 7 Click Apply To add a profile click Add oe oo OO um uU css To delete a profile select the profile and click Delete Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 92 Performing Advanced Configuration Chapter 7 PCP Mapping Delete 12345667 Apply Figure 7 4 PCP Rewrite 8 Onthe bottom of the QoS window click Apply Metering and Coloring Configuring Meter This is an optional mechanism only for use in cases in which classifier evc is configured to control and limit the traffic committed rate and peak rate If a meter was defined for the classifier the packet is internally colored Green or Yellow or dropped Red based on the following e CIR Committed Information Rate Mbps Represents the amount of credit the meter should receive each time interval e EIR Excess Information Rate Mbps Exceeding limitations of credits for each time interval e CBS Committed Burst Size bytes e EBS Excess Burst Size bytes Color aware mode is supported for ingress S VLAN packets only based on MEF definitions Use the following command to configure a meter set meter meter id 1 248 cir lt 0 1000 gt cbs lt 1
243. rage queue reaches the maximum threshold CLI bridge common bridge common egress wred lt enable disable gt wred wred lt 0 99 gt min threshold lt UINT32 gt max threshold lt UINT32 gt drop probability lt 1 1000 gt egress qos egress qos eth0 queue wred lt wred index gt wred green lt wred index gt wred yellow lt wred index gt wred n 1 16 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 99 Performing Advanced Configuration Chapter 7 Example Measurement The following images display how the system behaves with and without WRED Thu 7 Feb 2013 17 15 22 Bandwidth TWAIN n 2 3 E E Figure 7 10 System Behavior with WRED Thu 7 Feb 2013 17 14 28 Bandwidth eed e E i i i i P RP RR E o Time sec Figure 7 11 System Behavior without WRED Configuring CFM Connectivity Fault Management This section explains how to configure CFM and includes the following topics e CFM Overview e Working with Maintenance Domains e Working with Maintenance Associations e Working with Component Maintenance Associations e Working with Maintenance End Points e Working with CCM Messages Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 100 Performing Advanced Configuration Chapter 7 e Working with Peer MEPs e Working with CCM Messages e Working with Linktrace Messages e Sample CFM Configuration OAM 192 168 0 1 Figure 7 12 CFM OAM Main Screen CFM Overview Conne
244. re Revision to be read in runtime Firmware Revision empty Software Revision empty Serial Number to be read in runtime Manufacturer Name Netronics Model Name empty Field Replaceable Unit Indicator not replaceable Base Band Board Table 12 13 Base Band Board Attribute Value Inventory Index 4 Descriptor Netronics NB 1G1 Base Band Board Contained In 1 Class container Parent Relative Position 2 Name Base Band Board Hardware Revision to be read in runtime Firmware Revision empty Software Revision empty Serial Number to be read in runtime Manufacturer Name Netronics Model Name empty Field Replaceable Unit Indicator not replaceable Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 239 Using the NetBeam CLI Modem Chapter 12 Table 12 14 Modem Attribute Value Inventory Index 5 Descriptor Netronics NB 1G1 Modem Contained In 4 Class module Parent Relative Position 0 Name Modem Hardware Revision to be read in runtime Firmware Revision empty Software Revision empty Serial Number empty Manufacturer Name Netronics Model Name empty Field Replaceable Unit Indicator not replaceable FPGA Table 12 15 FPGA Attribute Value Inventory Index 6
245. requency 71375 71875 72375 72875 73375 73875 74375 74875 75375 frequency 81375 81875 82375 82875 83375 83875 84375 84875 85375 role master slave auto tx mute disable enable tx mute timeout lt integer 0 86400 gt mode static lt modulation gt lt subchannels gt lt repetitions gt lt fec rate gt from list of modulations alignment adaptive lowest modulation lt modulation gt lt subchannels gt lt repetitions gt lt fec rate gt from list of modulations tx asymmetry for NB1G NBM7 systems for master use 50tx 50rx 75tx 25rx 90tx 10rx for slave use 50tx 50rx 25tx 75rx 10tx 90rx tx link id lt integer 0 127 gt rx link id integer 0 127 gt loopback internal mac swap modulation lt subchannels gt lt repetitions gt lt fec rate gt from list of modulations disabled loopback timeout integer 0 86400 gt tx power lt integer 35 5 gt Viewing Modulation Profiles Using the CLI Use the show modulation command to display available supported modulation profiles and their parameters Local Site show modulation frequency modulation subchannels repetitions fec rate cinr low cinr high backoff any qpsk zx 4 0 5 128 10 5 any qpsk 2 2 0 5 6 13 8 any qpsk 4 1 0 5 9 14 8 any qami 4 1 0 5 13 127 8 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 58 Performing Basic Configuration Using the CLI Chapter 4 CINR Low Lower threshold
246. rface Precedense Add Classifier EVC Index Interface Precedence IP COS IP COS Value Refresh Figure 7 3 Classifier EVC Setup Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 91 Performing Advanced Configuration Chapter 7 PCP Rewrite PCP Rewriting capability allows you to set the outer PCP value of an outgoing frame as a function of COS This feature only exists in version 5 of the NetBeam 2G The PC Write Profile table is a set of profiles where each profile is a single mapping between eight COS values to eight PCP values so it can be represented by eight values in the range 0 7 Each profile is identified by a profile ID In addition the rewrite profile attribute is available for each eth The attribute value can be set to NULL or a valid profile ID A non Null value causes a frame s PCP to be written accordingly prior to the frame being sent on an external port When no value is set the default value is no profiles defined The maximum number of profiles is 128 PCP Rewrite in the CLI rewrite PCP on frames going to ethl with the cos value set pcp write profile 10123456 7 profile that maps each cos to the pcp of same numerical value set pcp write profile 1XX 12345678 set eth ethl pcp write profile id 1 let port 1 operate with PCP rewrite do not rewrite pcp of frames on ethl set eth ethl pcp write
247. rflnPkts 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 2 2 1 7 8 rflnGoodPkts 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 2 2 1 8 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 246 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 9 rfinErroredPkts 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 2 2 1 9 10 rfinLostPkts 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 2 2 1 10 11 rfOutPkts 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 2 2 1 11 Encryption Object Attributes Table 12 24 Encryption Attributes Attribute CLI Description SNMP Object Syntax Access Default Attribute ID Name Encryption Encryption mode This disabled static key disabled Encryption attribute is only visible to an admin user Static Key This is the only key string of 32 92E3C2802 Static Key that is to say the hexadecimal digits 0570998E7 current key and next 4B key are always the 41C06A58 same and equal to this BB40 configured key Connectivity Fault Management CFM Object Attributes Maintenance Domain MD Object Attributes Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 247 Using the NetBeam CLI Attribute CLI Attribute Name MD Index Name name Format format Level level MHF Creation mhf creation MHF ID Permission mhf permission Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual Table 12 25 Attributes Description Value to be used as the index of the MA table entries for this MD when the management entity wants to create a new entry in that table An MD Index entry cannot be deleted if it is used as th
248. ridgeRefClock 6 1 4 1 31926 4 radioBridgeEthernet 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 5 c radioBridgeQosClassifier 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 6 radioBridgeQosIngressQueue 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 7 c radioBridgeQosEgressQueue 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 8 radioBridgelp 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 9 radioBridgeCfm 1 3 1 31926 10 radioBridgeAlarms 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 11 D radioBridgeScheduler 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 12 c radioBridgeEncryption 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 13 c radio igeMeter 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 14 radioBridgeEventConfig 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 15 c radioBridgeSnmp 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 17 rbSysfileOperationTable 1 3 6 1 31926 18 amp rbSysFileOperationEntry 1 3 4 1 31926 18 1 9 fileSessionIndex 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 18 1 1 fileSessionCommand 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 18 1 2 9 fileSessionLocalParams 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 15 1 3 fileSessionRemotePath 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 18 1 4 fileSessionServer 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 18 1 5 fileSessionUser 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 18 1 6 9 filesessionPassword 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 18 1 7 fileSessionResult 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 18 1 8 fileSessionState 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 18 1 9 L 9 fileSessionProtocol 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 18 1 13 c radioBridgelldp 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 19 radioBridgeWred 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 20 D radioBridgeAuthentication 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 21 radioBridgeQuota 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 22 radioBridgePcpProfile 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 23 security 1 3 6 1 5 c snmpV2 1 3 6
249. rmat of this object is with LTR determined by the value of the Chassis ID dot1agCfmLtrChassisldSubtype Subtype A object hexadecimal string is used if no format is known LTR Management The TDomain that identifies the 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 2 1 snmp udp RO Address Domain type and format of the related 11 dot1agCfmltrMan snmp mng addr dot1agCfmMepDbManAddress AddressDomain ieee802 object used to access the SNMP Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 266 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 Attribute CLI Description SNMP Object ID Syntax Access Attribute Name domain agent of the system transmitting the LTR LTR Management The TAddress that can be used to 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 2 1 IP Address RO Address mng access the SNMP agent of the 12 dotilagCfmLtrMan dotted addr system transmitting the LTR Address notation received in the LTR Sender ID TLV MAC Address from that system NN NN NN NN NN NN whereNisa hexadecimal number for example 00 AF DD 1E 2D A3 the rest hexadecimal string LTR Ingress Action The value returned in the Ingress 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 2 1 none ok RO ingr action Action Field of the LTM The value 13 dotlagCfmLtringress down ingNoTlv 0 indicates that no blocked vid Reply Ingress TLV was returned in the LTM LTR Ingress MAC MAC address returned in the 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 2 1 MAC Address RO Address ingr mac i
250. robes into their appropriate positions in the AUX port Figure 2 3 Throughout the alignment procedure you must compare the actual receive signal strength indication RSSI to the expected RSSI that was calculated during network link budget preparation refer to Preparing for Installation on page 23 Read the receive level RSSI using the DVM The voltage reading will be between 0 to 1V indicating the RSSI in dBms For example a DVM reading of 0 45V is equivalent to 45 dBm Align the fine Azimuth axis Use the hexagonal wrench to adjust the Azimuth fine adjustment screw Q Be sure to sweep the complete range of the Azimuth in order to determine the maximum received signal strength position When the optimum axis is achieved tighten both Azimuth adjustment lock bolts 6 Align the fine elevation axis Use the hexagonal wrench to adjust the elevation fine adjustment screw Be sure to sweep the complete range of the elevation in order to determine the maximum received signal strength position When the optimum axis is achieved tighten both elevation adjustment lock bolts Perform steps 6 and 7 for the remote ODU Repeat steps 6 and 7 for the local ODU Use the DVM to verify maximum received signal strength on both local and remote ODUs For best performance measured RSSI should be within 4 dB of the calculated value Once the optimum position has been achieved for the ODU pair tighten the Azimuth adjustment lock
251. rt a number of defects and multiple defects can be present at the same time The total number of out of sequence CCMs that have been received from all remote MEPs Total number of Continuity Check messages transmitted Indicates the result of the operation Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 1 1 6 dotlagCfmMepFngState 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 1 1 9 dotlagCfmMepMacAddr ess 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 1 1 13 dotlagCfmMepHighestP r Defect 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 1 1 14 dotlagCfmMepDefects 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 1 1 17 dot1agCfmMepCcm SequenceErrors 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 1 1 18 dotlagCfmMepCciSentC cms 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 1 1 34 dotlagCfmMepTransmit LbmResultOK Chapter 12 reset defect report defect defect reported defect clearing MAC address in the form NN NN NN NN NN NN where N is a hexadecimal number for example 00 AF DD 1E 2D A3 none rdi ccm mac status remote ccm error ccm xcon ccm Any combination of rdi ccm mac status remote ccm error ccm xcon ccm Integer Integer ok not ok 258 Using the NetBeam CLI Attribute CLI Description SNMP Object ID Syntax Attribute Name LBM Transmit Sequence Number Ibm tx sn LBM Next Sequence Number Ibm next sn Incoming In Order LBR Counter Ibr in order Incoming Out of Order LBR Counter Ibr out of order Transmit LBR C
252. rver 1 octet string 192 168 1 15 31 39 32 2E 31 36 fileSessionPassword 1 octet string 123456 31 32 33 34 35 36 hex fileSessionUser 1 octet string noam 6E 6F 61 6D hex fileSessionLocalParams 1 octet string mo eth ethO 6D 6F 3D 22 65 7 fileSessionRemotePath 1 octet string ETHOS zip 45 54 48 30 53 2E 7A fileSessionRowStatus 1 X integer createAndGo 4 Select fileSessionPassword 1 Remote SNMP Agent 192 168 1 131 Ak OID to Set Cancel 6007 ws 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 18 171 9 Value to Set 334509 j e Syntax nteger32 Timeticks Counter64 Ulnteger32 IP address Opaque Counter32 OID Nsapaddr Gauge32 Octets Bits OOO s SNMPv Figure 9 14 fileSessionPassword Settings Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 172 Performing System Administration To enter fileSessionUser settings 1 Double click the fileSessionUser row 2 Enter the following settings e Remote SNMP Agent The IP address of the ODU connected to the MIB Browser e OID to set x x x x x 1 as the next object in table e Value to set The username of the FTP SFTP or TFTP server 3 Click OK Chapter 9 ET Multiple Variable Bindings 192 168 1 131 fileSessionCommand 1 ca TT aM wa Set gt 192 168 1 131 Ja tr Log fileSessionCommand 1 integer copyStatsHistory 13 fileSessionPassword 1 o
253. s e Port Status blocked up according to IEEE 802 1ag Table 21 10 e Interface Status up down testing unknown dormant not present lower layer down according to IEEE 802 1ag Table 21 1 e Other Tl Vs Type Data as hexadecimal string To display this information use the following commands show cfm ccm lt md idx list gt all lt ma idx list gt all lt mepid list gt all last error ccm and show cfm ccm lt md idx list gt all lt ma idx list gt all lt mepid list gt all last xcon ccm Refer to Figure 7 17 CFM Peer MEP Setup for CCM status monitoring Working with Linktrace Messages Linktrace messages are multicast from an originating MEP to a target MAC MIP or MEP MEP ID to verify the path between the two Linktrace Reply messages LTRs are unicast from the target or MIPs on route to the originating MEP Receipt of an LTR verifies the path Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 108 Performing Advanced Configuration Chapter 7 Arriving LTRs are stored on a per MEP basis in the LTR database as shown in Figure 7 18 MD Hame MA Name LTR SN X LTR SN X 1 LTR SN X 1 LTR SN X 1 Figure 7 18 Per MEP LTR Storage Structure LTRs are stored in ascending sequence number order and LTRs with the same sequence number i e replies to the same LTM are grouped together Since storage is limited arrival of a new message resul
254. s The command does not change a system configuration Default gt reset rf Reset RF is required whenever an RF Mode change is made from Alignment to Adaptive or Static amp 3 Resetting the RF causes a service disruption of approximately 2 seconds in a duration Note Reset System Resetting the System reboots and reloads the currently saved system startup configuration Default gt reset system Reset System is used for power up and is required after software upgrades m Resetting the System causes a service disruption of approximately 90 seconds in 7 duration Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 218 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 Designating Objects in CLI Commands The CLI requires explicit identifiers to perform operations on the objects in an NetBeam configuration You can designate a specific object e g a bridge by using its unique identifier Two types of object identifiers are used in the CLI Object Names Object Indexes Designating Named Objects Certain NetBeam CLI objects are identified by symbolic names These names are static and are always assigned to the same NetBeam object type Using static names generally makes system configuration much easier and more consistent from network to network For example the designation eth ethO refers to the Wireless Port while the designation bridge port s1 c3 refers to Port c3 on Component s1 The following lists all named objects u
255. s only PEP Ingress Filtering The ingress filtering state of ieee8021PbEdge Enabled RC Disabled Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 289 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 Attribute CLI Attribute Name Description SNMP Object ID Value Access Default filter the PEP When enabled the device discards incoming frames for Port EnablelngressFilt ering VLANs that do not include the 1 3 111 2 802 1 port in its Member Set When 1 5 1 3 1 5 disabled the device accepts all incoming frames to the port Disabled S VID Translation Table Attributes Attribute CLI Attribute Name Table 12 47 S VID Translation Table Attributes Description Bridge Port The bridge port for the VID Translation Table entry Local S VID The internal S VID on received local svid transmitted at the ISS of a CNP or PNP The VID must be defined in the VLAN Table Table 12 44 and the Bridge Port specified in the comma nd must belong to the S component Because VID translation is bidirectional two entries cannot use the same Local S VID for the same port Figure 12 3 shows the bidirectional relationships for Local S VID SNMP Object ID ieee8021BridgeBaseP host ethO eth1 ort 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 2 1 1 4 1 2 ieee8021PbVid TranslationLocalVid 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 5 1 1 1 1 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual
256. sec gt no timeout if version differs from lt version gt convert configuration run script lt script name gt lt arguments gt where lt arguments gt optional arguments in format name value name value run convert startup accept sw Use the following command to reset the system with the formerly standby software version as the active version run sw immediate next rst lt accept timeout sec gt no timeout f immediate is specified as the first parameter on the command line then a reset is performed immediately This is the default value If next rstis specified as the first parameter on the command line then the next system reset that occurs for whatever reason Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 157 Performing System Administration Chapter 9 causes the system to wake up with the software version stored in the standby flash bank If lt accept timeout sec gt is specified as the second parameter on the command line then this duration in seconds is used as the safety timeout period in order to manually enter the command accept sw f no timeout is specified as the second parameter on the command line then the command accept swis not expected and the standby software version automatically becomes the active software version 4 Ifthe system reactivates after reset with a software version stored in the standby flash bank use the accept sw command to make the standby version the act
257. sed in the CLI together with the NetBeam objects that they reference Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 219 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 Table 12 5 Named Objects in the CLI CLI Name Referenced Object ethO Wireless port eth1 Wired Ethernet port 1 eth2 Wired Ethernet port 2 eth3 eth4 host Internal CPU s1 S component 1 c1 C component 1 c2 C component 2 c3 C component 3 c4 C component 4 c5 C component 5 c6 C component 6 The CLI supports specifying a list of named objects by entering multiple comma separated names For example eth eth0 host ethl specifies to three eth objects ethO host and eth1 bridge cl c2 sl specifies three bridge components c1 c2 and s1 and egress host sl specifies two egress ports host and s1 When using the show and clear commands the keyword a11 may be substituted for a b list of object names In this context all means all of the objects For example eth allis identical to eth host eth0 ethl eth2 eth3 eth4 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 220 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 Multi Dimensional Object Lists To specify objects in a multi dimensional object list the symbol names or comma delimited lists of names are entered one after another and are separated by spaces The generic syntax is as follows object lt namel gt lt name2 gt lt name3 gt For example bridge port cl h
258. sion lt value gt Default read com is public Default write com is private Default snmp version is v2 To view the SNMP agent communities default gt show snmp agent snmp agent read com public snmp agent write com private nmp agent snmp version v2c SNMP Agent Read Community public Write Community private SNMP Version vac v Figure 9 28 Web EMS System Screen SNMP Agent Section Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual snmp 190 Performing System Administration Chapter 9 SNMPv3 Users Settings The following command sets the SNMP users settings set snmp user lt engine id gt lt user gt lt auth gt lt priv gt lt engine id gt local string lt auth gt none md5 lt passphrase gt sha lt passphrase gt lt priv gt none des lt passphrase gt aes lt passphrase gt auth passphrase and privacy passphrase are ASCII strings Together with internally calculated Engine ID these strings are used to produce authentication and privacy keys respectively If no parameters other than the user name are supplied to the set command an entry is created for the user identified by the name while privacy and authentication algorithms are set to NULL If a privacy algorithm des or aes is not supplied the privacy algorithm is set to NULL If a privacy passphrase is not supplied the privacy passphrase is the same as the authentication passphrase
259. snmp version is v2 Use the following command to view the SNMP manager list default gt show snmp mng snmp mng 1 ip addr 192 168 0 100 snmp mng 1 udp port 162 snmp mng 1 snmp version v2c snmp mng 1 security name public snmp mng 1 engine id local Each SNMPv3 agent has an engine ID that uniquely identifies the agent in the device and also the unique identification of the MIB objects within a domain In SNMPv3 communication Engine ID is used as an identifier for an agent among other agents When you define get and set commands for an SNMPv3 user set Engin ID to Local When you define trap for an SNMPv3 user set Engin ID to the value of the Engine ID of the remote manager Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 189 Performing System Administration Chapter 9 Note that get set and trap commands should be defined for the same user The same user should be defined twice once with Engin ID Local and the second time with the Engin ID of the remote manager SNMP Managers A IP Address UDP Port SNMP Version Security Name Engine ID Add SNMP Morooer MN Index IP Address UDP Port 162 SNMP Version 2c Security Name public Engine ID locat mm Figure 9 27 Web EMS System Screen SNMP Managers Section SNMP Agent Communities The following command sets the SNMP agent communities set snmp agent read com lt value gt write com lt value gt ver
260. sse nennen nnne nnn nnne nnn 206 RE Statistics cocer eret teni teretes ertet iu entree oec ui cr 207 nac HR aa ia oa a Era Ea Eee AENEAS ESNE eaS 207 Ethernet Statistics i 2 retro ioo creo za cet Pone ce rac eio Aaea Eaa Edo eeu Ee oe EEE 208 NetBeam System LoOpbackS ccccsscssssecceceeeccesssssessesaeaecececcssecoesessesasaeeseessaeeeeeaees 208 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual LOO Phack Diagram Seenioride eae aa oet c dece ceca idet E ege 209 Chapter 12 Using the NetBeam CLI INVOKING thE CL E 211 CLlCommiatid Syntax roc ety ten Pet ode ERR VI NC Ea SEKERES REKENEN 212 Basie CONVENTIONS e 213 Common Syntax Rules n tete tret inr rau en Pe Vo iana niaaa raK 213 Repeatedly Used Identifiers elei eee 213 CLE Command TYPES eee rte cen or esee ERES aye te dex Pearni 215 Designating Objects in CLI COMMANAS ccccecescssssseeceeceeecesseseeessaeaaeeeseeceseees 219 Designating Named Objects sessi tn nennen 219 Viewing the CLI Command History eesssessseeeesee eene eene nnne nnns tn nena 222 Invoking CLI Help and AUtOCOMPetiON cccsececessescececeesessesteseceaeseeeeeeceessssesessaeeaes 223 CLI Error Messages reiten odzact e a ee EEE EEEE EESE A EE RR iE 224 Viewing the NetBeam Statistics HiStOry cccccssssecssssccecessesscecssseseeeeeecesesesesseaaees 225 Using Statistics Intervals esesss
261. ssessseesseseeesasscessescascaesaeses 270 Ethernet Interface Attributes sss eee eene ener ntn ennt 270 Ethernet Statistic Descriptions esses nennen nnne ennt nnne 278 Bridge Object Attributes eese eene enne neni nnn tarta stans nnns 279 Bridging Port Object Attributes sese nnne nennen etn nennen tn nnn nns 280 Outgoing Queue Object Attributes esses enne eene nennen nnns 283 Incoming Queue Object Attributes ssssseesesee eene 283 IP Object Attributes siiis eseeee nennen tenens anna aaa EAE EERTE satt aane tasas 284 VLAN Common Table Attributes sess ener enne nennen 285 VLAN Table AttriDUtes 1 ot oisierietes tete rennen rene n sa eite rne m e Pede de de 286 C LAN Registration Table Attributes nennen nnne 287 PEP Virtual Port Table Attributes sssseeseseeeeeeeene nennen tne 289 S VID Translation Table Attributes esssesssse seen eene 290 SNMP ifTable Attributes esses esses esee een nen nennen neris 292 Forwarding Data Base FDB Object Attributes sess 295 FDB Address Table Attributes eene 297 ARP Table AttribUtes 1 5 i ite iterari emanat uo Cen aee dnd ea rea ede el eb eed de dd aee 299 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 10 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 11 Introduction Welcome to NetBeam Netronics NetBeam is a carrier class hi
262. sssssescsessssescesceesssesesecsessseeeseeees 79 Configuring the Bridging Port esses serene nennen nnne nnne nnns 79 Configuring Provider Bridge and Advanced VLAN Settings eese 80 Configuring PEP Virtual Ports eene nnne enne nenn nis 80 S VID Translation Table 5 eese tte erede ttes x Ie node da aeos 81 C VLAN Registration Tabl siipiin aeieea nnns es 82 VLAN tO SNMP ifTable scsi cicescsiiscssestcticideccectscdiediodiedescuscascasicecseaubacceseanacecesssbbacectects 83 Forwarding Data Base FDB ccssesssesessecsessssssssssessesensceseseseeececsseseceseseeaeeeeaeeas 83 Configurable Eth type 2 eene ceo tet eite ge eee ne aeaaea 84 FDB Address Table etus see reete nes soacucndesaeadeddsssaedevecesssetce 85 Chapter 7 Performing Advanced Configuration Configuring Quality Of ServiCe cccccceceessssscceececeeeccescsesesneaeceseeececesseseeseaesaeeeeeeeseess 87 QOS Classificati ssania 88 Metering and Coloring rettet cte drea eec EGE iaeiae 93 QOS Scheduling RTI 94 Weighted Random Early Detection WRED cccccsecsssscecsssceeeesssceeeesssssseeeesseaeeees 98 WRED F nctionality 5 enit trece ashen tenax qr accom eee 98 Ms PEEICuc icem 99 el 99 Example Meas retmerit icc resanse eteen Ro daa ee cR Pe DE R
263. stem Loopback Points Local Remote Line Internal Loopback Line External Figure 11 1 NetBeam System Loopback Points Ethernet External Line Loopback Point The Ethernet traffic from the customer s end equipment or Ethernet analyzer is looped on the Ethernet interface Eth1 or Eth2 enabling testing of the connection cable fiber and the interface between end equipment and the ODU When testing a link from one side local apply an external line loopback should be applied on the local unit The loopback can be applied separately for Eth1 and Eth2 and can be set with or without MAC Address swapping Set the loopback mode to external for the desired Ethernet port and set the loopback timeout in seconds set eth ethl loopback timeout 300 set eth ethl loopback mode external mac swap Use the following command to clear the loopback set eth ethl loopback mode disable RF Radio Internal Loopback Point The Ethernet traffic from a customer s end equipment or Ethernet analyzer is looped on the ODU s radio output enabling testing of the connection cable fiber the interface between end equipment and the ODU and the local ODU Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 209 NetBeam Diagnostics Chapter 11 The loopback should be set with MAC Address swapping and on specific modulation profile Set the loopback mode on the RF menu and set the loopback timeout in seconds set rf loopback timeout 300 set rf loopback mode int
264. ster Figure 7 20 SyncE Functional Diagram Synchronization messages are transported between the SyncE elements using Ethernet Synchronization Message Channel ESMC ESMC is similar to SSM Synchronization Status Message used in Sonnet SDH systems ESMC carries information about the Quality Level ql and sync status of the source clock enabling the NetBeam to determine which clock source of use based on performance and the need to avoid loops Quality Level is based on the clock s holdover performance Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 120 Performing Advanced Configuration Chapter 7 Quality Levels gl names Quality Level ql Names No Name No Name 0 ql stu 8 ql ssu b 1 ql prs 9 ql inv9 2 ql prc 10 ql eec2 3 ql inv3 11 gl eec1 4 ql ssu a 12 ql smc gl inv5 13 gl st3e 6 gl inv6 14 ql prov 7 ql st2 15 ql dnu SyncE Configuration SyncE is a licensed feature that requires a license for operation Before configuring SyncE verify that the SyncE license key is available and enable the license Refer to Upgrading the License Key on page 160 You can set the reference clock ref clock per interface host ethO eth1 eth2 eth3 eth4 using the following command set ref clock lt clk if gt prio 1 255 The prio attribute determines the priority of the reference clock source in the event that there is an equal ql among the interfaces The priority can be any value from 1
265. stics Attributes Attribute CLI Attribute Description Name Incoming Octets in octets The total number of octets received on the interface including framing characters Incoming Unicast Packets in The number of unicast packets received on the ucast pkts interface Discarded Incoming Packets The number of packets which were chosen to be in discards discarded due to RX FIFO full Erroneous Incoming Packets The number of received erred packets in errors Outgoing Octets out octets The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface including framing characters Outgoing Unicast Packets The number of unicast packets transmitted out of the out ucast pkts interface Discarded Outgoing Packets The number of outbound packets which were chosen out discards to be discarded due to excessive collision or excessive deferral Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 146 Monitoring the System Attribute CLI Attribute Name Erroneous Outgoing Packets out errors Incoming Multicast Packets in mcast pkts Incoming Broadcast Packets in bcast pkts Outgoing Multicast Packets out mcast pkts Outgoing Broadcast Packets out bcast pkts Chapter 8 Description The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors The number of multicast packets received on the interface The number of broadcast packets received on the interface The number of multicast packets
266. syntax of the IANA ifType textual convention The size of the largest packet which can be sent received on the interface specified in octets For interfaces that are used for transmitting network datagrams this is the size of the largest network datagram that can be sent on the interface The interface s address at its protocol sub layer The desired state of the interface SNMP Object ID ifDescr 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 2 ifType 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 3 ifMtu 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 4 ifPhysAddress 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 6 ifAdminStatus 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 7 RW Only a single value is allowed Value ASCII representation of the VLAN ID I2vlan 135 9216 The MAC address of the corresponding Eth 292 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 Attribute CLI Description SNMP Object ID Attribute Name Operational The current operational state ifOperStatus Up 1 Ready to Status of the interface 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 8 pass packets The Down state of ifOperStatus has two meanings depending on the value of ifAdminStatus If ifAdminStatus is not Down and ifOperStatus is Down then a fault condition is presumed to exist on the interface If ifAdminStatus is Down then ifOperStatus will normally also be Down i e there is not necessarily a fault condition on the interface Last Change The value of sysUpTime at ifLastChange Time the time the interface 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 9 lastchange entered
267. t IP address your connection to the ODU is lost To re establish a connection launch an Internet browser and connect using the new IP address Note 4 Click Apply m S amp S By default no static route or default gateway is defined Se Note You can create or modify the IP Route and Default Gateway from the Route section of the Quick Configuration screen or the System screen To add or change a Route 1 Click Add The Add Route window opens aae et Index Destination Prefix Length Next Hop Figure 3 7 Add Route Window 2 Inthe Index field select the index of the IP for which you want to add or change a route a If you are using a single IP and want to change its route select 1 idx number 1 to 10 dest ip address in the form X X X X where X is a decimal number from 0 to 255 for example 10 0 15 74 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 43 Performing Basic Configuration Using the Web EMS Chapter 3 prefix len ip prefix a number from 0 to 32 next hop ip address in the form X X X X where X is a decimal number from 0 to 255 for example 10 0 15 74 All IP addresses in the table must be different 3 Click Apply The following example shows a single IP configuration with a default gateway ODU with IP 192 168 0 17 mask 255 255 255 0 and default gateway 192 168 0 254 ODU config IP screen e Index
268. t layer operation administration and management OAM protocol designed to monitor and troubleshoot networks Link OAM enables you to detect verify and isolate connectivity failures in point to point connections Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 117 Performing Advanced Configuration Enabling Link OAM Link OAM can be enabled on one of the link interfaces Eth1 Eth2 Eth3 and Eth4 or the radio interface EthO To enable Link OAM set link oam lt eth list gt lt eth list gt admin lt value Enabled disabled gt admin lt value gt ethl eth2 default gt set link oam ethO admin enabled To view Link OAM configuration and status default gt show link oam link oam link oam link oam link oam link oam link oam link oam link oam link oam link oam link oam link oam link oam link oam link oam link oam link oam link oam etho etho etho etho etho etho ethl ethl ethl ethl ethl ethl eth2 eth2 eth2 eth2 eth2 eth2 admin status mode pdu size revision functions admin status mode pdu size revision functions admin status mode pdu size revision functions Link OAM Discovery Once enabled the Link OAM will perform discovery of the peer Ethernet port Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual enabled operational active 1518 0 loopback disabled disabled active 1518 0 loopback disabled disabled active 1518 0 loopback Perf
269. tection based on CCM s CLI gt set ring 1 cw mep none lt md idx gt ma idx lt mep id gt lt peer mep id gt ERP Administrative Commands The NetBeam provides two commands for blocking a particular ring port Forced Switch FS Can be used even if there is an existing condition Multiple F5 commands are supported per ring F5 commands can be used to enable immediate maintenance operations Manual Switch MS Not effective if there is an existing FS or SF condition Also MS commands are overridden by new FS and SF conditions New MS commands are ignored Additionally a Clear command can be used to cancel an existing F5 or MS command on the ring port The Clear command can also be used at an RPL owner node to trigger reversion The following examples illustrate how to use the administrative commands to control manual switching to the backup and block a particular ring port Left Slave set ring 3 action cw ms acw ms cw fs acw fs clear Left Slave set ring 3 action Right Master set ring 3 action acw fs Set done ring 3 Right Master show log Aug 4 21 09 39 sw cad local Forced switch at 200 CW unblocked ACW blocked Right Master show ring all state ring 3 state fs Right Master Right Master set ring 3 action clear Set done ring 3 Right Master show log Aug 4 21 09 39 sw cad local Forced switch at 200 CW unblocked ACW blocked Aug 4 21 10 46 sw cad ERP 200is ready Role acw rpl
270. tem Manual 204 NetBeam Diagnostics Chapter 11 Indication Classification Explanation Probable Corrective and Severity Cause Actions List CFM Fault Event All MEP defects have N A N A Recovery Trap Log been cleared and the alarm has been cleared from the Active Alarm List Synthesizer Event The synthesizer has N A N A Locked Trap Log been locked Synthesizer Alarm The synthesizer has N A N A Unlocked been unlocked High Trap Log Active Alarm List POE Status Alarm The power level being Problematic 1 Check voltage Low drawn by the ODU PoE ODU or and current TES from the Ethernet is connection supply to the PoE Ig low 2 Check cable Trap Log Active Alarm 3 Replace PoE List 4 Replace ODU POE Status Event The power level being N A N A Normal Trap Log drawn by the ODU from the Ethernet is normal ERP Ready Event ERP is ready for N A N A Trap Log operation Forced Switch Event ERP event N A N A Trap Log Manual Switch Event ERP event N A N A Trap Log Signal Fail Event ERP event N A N A Trap Log Invalid version Event ERP event N A N A Trap Log Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 205 NetBeam Diagnostics Chapter 11 Indication Classification Explanation Probable Corrective and Severity Cause Actions Loopback Alarm User enabled User action N A Enabled Low loopback Trap Log Active Alarm List Lo
271. th Directions Both Backward and Forward alarm propagation is performed Table 12 35 Read Only Ethernet Interface Attributes Attribute CLI Description SNMP Object ID Value Attribute Name Description A text string describing the ifDescr Variable text Netronics description interface This value generally 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 NB 1G1 includes the manufacturer s name 2 Host the product name and the Netronics interface hardware and software NB 1G1 Eth versions 0 Netronics NB 1G1 Eth 1 Netronics NB 1G1 Eth 2 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 273 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 Attribute CLI Description SNMP Object ID Value Attribute Name MTU Size mtu The size of the largest packet ifMtu 9216 9216 which can be sent received on the 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 interface specified in octets 4 For interfaces that are used for transmitting network datagrams this is the size of the largest network datagram that can be sent on the interface MAC Address The address of the interface at its ifPhysAddress hostO NN NN NN mac addr protocol sub layer 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 mac base NN NN NN 6 address read from hardware rfo mac base where NN is a hexadecimal number for example 00 address 1 AF DD 1E 2D eth1 A3 mac base address gt 2 eth2 lt mac_base_ address gt 3 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 274 Using the NetBea
272. the VLAN ID 1 is removed on egress Please note that this default configuration provides transparent connection for all untagged C VLAN tagged and S VLAN tagged packets Basic Configuration Example Transparent VLAN Management The default configuration provides transparent connection for all untagged C VLAN tagged and S VLAN tagged packets This includes data and management traffic going to the Host In order to manage the ODU including in band management to remote ODUs it is sufficient to define the management VLAN in the IP configuration You do not need to configure it in the VLAN table For example VLAN and IP configuration for Transparent Bridge with management over VLAN 100 vlan configuring Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 76 NetBeam Networking Configuration Chapter 6 set vlan s1 1 egress host ethO ethl eth2 eth3 eth4 untagged host ethO ethl eth2 eth3 eth4 history disable set vlan sl undef egress host ethO ethl eth2 eth3 eth4 untagged none history disable ip configuring set ip 1 ip addr static 192 168 24 111 prefix len 24 vlan 100 VLAN Configuration with Network Type Customer NNI Use the C VLANs Registration table to Configure C VLANs and map them to S VLANs Controlling the forwarding of specific C VLANs requires mapping them on S VLANs as only S VLANs may be defined cvlan reg configuration set cvlan reg lt component id gt lt bridge port list gt lt cvid gt svid lt value gt
273. the VLAN Table Table 12 44 For example if the Component ID is c4 then the port must be external port 4 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 287 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 Attribute CLI Description SNMP Object ID Value Access Default Attribute Name C VID The C VID of this C VLAN ieee8021PbCVid 1 4094 N A N A Registration entry RegistrationCVid The VID must be defined in the 1 3 111 2 802 1 VLAN Table Table 12 44 1 5 1 2 1 1 The bridge component port specified in the command must match the Component ID in the VLAN Table For example if the Component ID is c4 then the port must be external4 S VID svlan The S VID of this C VLAN ieee8021PbCVid 1 4094 RC N A Registration entry This value RegistrationSVid will be added to the C tagged 1 3 111 2 802 1 frames of the C VID 1 5 1 2 1 2 The VID must be defined in the VLAN Table Table 12 44 for an S component Untagged CEP untag A flag indicating whether this ieee8021PbCVid Yes The C VID RC No cep C VID should be carried RegistrationUnta will be untagged untagged at the CEP gged No The C VID Cep will be tagged 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 5 1 2 1 4 Untagged PEP untag A flag indicating if this C VID ieee8021PbCVid Yes The C VID RC No pep should be carried untagged at the PEP RegistrationUnta gged Pep 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 5 1 2 1 3 will be untagged No The C VID will be tagged
274. ther MIPs are created can be on one of two settings e Default Creates MIPs on all ports e Explicit Creates MIPS only on ports that have MEPs on their lower level Configuring the Remote ODU The first step in configuring CFM parameters is to enable the OAM license Without an enabled OAM license the necessary CFM commands are not available set license oam status enable The next step in this configuration is to configure an MD at level 0 set cfm md 1 name string Link level O0 The following command creates an MA set cfm ma 1 1 name string Link interval 300hz The following command creates a Component MA and assigns VLAN 200 as its Service Selector set cfm ma comp c2 1 1 vlan 200 The following command creates a Maintenance End Point MEP set cfm mep 1 1 2 interface ethO dir down cci enabled Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 111 Performing Advanced Configuration Chapter 7 The following command creates a Peer MEP set cfm peer mep create 1 1 1 The following command creates an MD at level 2 set cfm md 2 name string Customer level 2 The following command creates an MA set cfm ma 2 2 name string Customer interval 1s The following command creates a Component MA and assigns VLAN 200 as its Service Selector set cfm ma comp c3 2 2 vlan 200 The following command creates a Maintenance End Point MEP set cfm mep 2 2 2 interface ethl dir up cci enabled The following comm
275. this entPhysicalEntry identifies a field replaceable unit For all entPhysicalEntries that represent components permanently contained within a field replaceable unit the value false 2 should be returned for this object Chapter 12 SNMP Object ID SNMP Syntax entPhysicalMfgName 1 3 6 1 2 1 47 1 1 1 1 12 character string entPhysicalModelNa me 1 3 6 1 2 1 47 1 1 1 1 13 character string entPhysicallsFRU true 1 1 3 6 1 2 1 47 1 1 1 1 false 2 16 CLI Syntax character string character string replaceable not replaceable 235 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 Attribute CLI Description SNMP Object ID SNMP Syntax CLI Syntax Attribute Name Last Change The value of sysUpTime at the 1 3 6 1 2 1 47 1 4 1 TimeTicks ddd hh mm s Time last time the configuration of the entLastChangeTime s wherein change entity has changed ddd decimal integer representing days it may include arbitrary number of digits hh two digit decimal integer representing hours of day 0 23 mm two digit decimal integer representing minutes of hour 0 59 ss two digit decimal integer representing seconds of minute 0 59 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 236 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 Physical Inventory Entities Figure 12 2 shows all physical inventory entities and their relationship Overall Product Base Board R
276. tically resets and wakes up with the saved startup configuration Note that the rollback timer resets to zero after each new CLI command The rollback timer expires when it reaches the value specified by lt duration in seconds gt To cancel a rollback use the clear rollback command This command cancels the Rollback function This means that the System does not automatically roll back to any previous configuration You can enter the clear rollback command any time before the end of a Rollback timeout period in order to cancel a rollback timeout Rollback can also be controlled from the Web EMS main screen Configuring Users The NetBeam system supports multiple users and enables you to choose from a selection of user types with different access privileges To add a new user 1 Connect to the ODU Refer to Connecting to the ODU Using the Web EMS on page 39 2 In the Web EMS Main screen click Advanced Settings and click the Users section Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 153 Performing System Administration Chapter 9 Add Delete Commands Figure 9 2 Web EMS Advanced Settings Screen Users Section 3 Click Add The Add User window is displayed User Name Password Figure 9 3 Web EMS Add Users Screen 4 Inthe User Name field enter the user name 5 n the Password field enter a password for the user 6 In the Type field select from a list of user t
277. tion S ir ert ee e e eI ORE ETERNI ee Deo eed ORE EOD Dun 152 Viewing Configurations oct ie iE RE E d hia 152 Restoring the Default Configuration esses eene nennen 152 Rollback Operations eee reote Le tee et eee Et Eee te e ede tup 153 Config ting USES oc ete bases etm en n eee torpe v pee v dude eee 153 Upgrading the ODU SOftWAare ere cer ED evi eeu veces 155 Upgrading the ODU Software Using the Web EMS eeeeennenn 155 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 8 Upgrading the ODU Software Using the CLI eseeseeeeeeeeeeennnnnnnnnnnn 156 Monitoring CLI Sessions eseseeseseseseeeee eene nnne nennen ennemis nsns nans a inia nans 158 Viewing System Inventory eeeeeeseeseseeeeeeeee nennen enne nnnnns nsns nane ini a arare nn nnns 159 Viewing System Inventory Using the Web EMS eene 159 Viewing System Inventory Using the CLI eeseseeeeeeeeeeernn nnns 160 Upgrading the License Key ennemi nnn nennen 160 Performing Address Translation esses nnne nnn nns 162 Netronics File System SFS ccscccccessseccecsessececesesaececcesesaececeesaeeeeceesaaeeecesesaeeeeeseaaes 163 Understanding SFS cccccccessessesseseceeeecsccesseseaeaeeeeceececeuseeseaaaaeaeeeeeseesesssessenaeas 163 Specifying Files Using URLS ccccccccccescessessesseceececceeecesseseaauaeceeeeeseesseessnsaaeess 163 F
278. tion screen to configure the basic ODU parameters To display the Quick Configuration screen click Quick Configuration on the toolbar on the left You can also click specific topics on the toolbar on the left to display and configure more extensive system parameters Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 40 Performing Basic Configuration Using the Web EMS Chapter 3 Configuring and Displaying Basic System Information Using the Web EMS You can view and configure basic system information in the System Information section of the Quick Configuration screen System Information TH MeBeam Date 2011021 Time 09 09 06 Figure 3 3 Web EMS Quick Configuration Screen System Information Section The following are the basic system parameters e Name e Date e Time When you are finished click Apply To view and configure more extensive system information click System on the Web EMS Main screen The System screen is displayed System Information A Description NetBeam Name Local ODU 14 Location undefined Contact undefined Date 2012 02 22 Time 22 01 04 Temperature 44 Voltage 44 dc Figure 3 4 System Screen System Information Section The System Information section of the System screen includes the following system parameters e Description e Name e Location e Contact e Date Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 41 Performing Basic Configuration Using the Web EMS Chapter 3
279. to 255 where 1 is the highest priority One entry for host is always present and cannot be deleted This entry has the fixed priority 255 the lowest priority You cannot configure more than one interface with the same priority If you configure EthO you must give it the highest priority For example set ref clock eth2 5 To clear the reference clock settings use the following command clear ref clock lt clk if list gt all For example clear ref clock eth2 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 121 Performing Advanced Configuration Chapter 7 To display the reference clock settings use the following command show ref clock lt clk if list gt For example Default gt show ref clock ref clock host prio ref clock host status ref clock host ql actual ref clock host ql config ref clock host ql mode ref clock host ssm cvid where status active backup 1 2 3 down all info prio 255 active 11 11 disable none ql actual The current ql of the active interface ql config 0 to 15 Sets the gl of the interface ql mode Can be Enabled enable or Disabled disable ssm cvid the C VLAN ssm messages are sent over default untagged When ql mode is disabled ESMC messages are ignored and the status is determined by the set ql config attribute Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 122 Performing Advanced Configuration Synchronization 192 168 0
280. to support the connectivity between service access points Each of the eight Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 102 Performing Advanced Configuration Chapter 7 hierarchical Maintenance Domain Levels MD Level supports OAM capabilities independently Use the following command to set an MD Note that the name attribute must be unique in the system set cfm md md idx format lt md name format gt name lt md name gt level md level gt mhf creation mhf creation mhfid permission mhf permission gt For example the following command sets the customer domain at level 2 set cfm md 2 name string Customer level 2 Use the following command to display a particular MD or all MDs show cfm md lt md idx list gt all format name level mhf creation mhfid permission info Use the following command to clear a particular MD or all MDs clear cfm md lt md idx list gt all For example the following command clears all the MDs in the system clear cfm md all CFM MD R MD ID Name Level MHF Creation MHF Permission 1 string Link 0 none none 2 string Customer 2 none none Add Figure 7 13 CFM MD Setup Working with Maintenance Associations A Maintenance Association MA is used to monitor connectivity in relation to a specific service instance All CFM entities that support that service instance are configured as MEPs with the same Maintenance Association Identifier MAID and MD Le
281. tronics NetBeam Family System Manual 198 Zero Touch Chapter 10 set net config config file value config error restart delay lt value gt The Show status command shows the status of the net config or the startup config default gt show status startup config net config The following response to the prompt to show the net config status indicates that the Zero Touch configuration is complete default gt show status net config NetConfig was successful Configure Zero Touch in the WEB EMS From the Main page select Advanced Settings Expand the Net Config section From the Config File drop down menu select Enable PW oN oe In the Config Error Restart Delay field enter the desired default delay time between config attempts the system default is 60 seconds Net Config BOOTP Config File enable Config Error Restart Delay s0 5 Click Apply Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 199 NetBeam Diagnostics The NetBeam system s highly reliable and easy to use radio link features a wide range of built in indicators and diagnostic tools designed to enable you to quickly evaluate a link s performance identify operating faults and resolve them The general diagnostics process for an NetBeam link is to identify whether there is a problem that needs to be addressed to isolate the root cause of the problem and to implement the steps that are required to solve the problem The followi
282. ts in discarding older messages Entire groups that use the same sequence number are discarded Use the following command to display LTR database information show cfm ltr db lt md idx list gt all lt ma idx list gt all lt mepid list gt all SN list all J SN stands for the Sequence Number of the LTR message stored This does not refer to the real sequence number stored in the LTR header but rather to the relative SN which is equal to Real SN modulo Maximum Allowed Number of SNs For example if the maximum allowed number of stored LTRs with different SNs is 20 then the Real SN 807 is translated into the Relative SN 7 It is possible to specify more than one SN in the command by designating indexed objects CFM MEP LTR x Forward Relay Action 63 unknown fdb Chassis ID Manag unknown lunknow unknown unknown fdb hit unknown unknown junknow unknow Figure 7 19 Link Trace Status Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual gt 109 Performing Advanced Configuration Chapter 7 Sample CFM Configuration This section provides a sample CFM configuration script Configuring the Local ODU The first step in configuring CFM parameters is to enable the OAM license which is part of the L2 Networking license Without an enabled OAM license the necessary CFM commands are not available set license oam status enable The next step in th
283. ts uini e E one Dern rie esie se eed ies 123 Typical SyncE Scenario esses ennt n ananas EEEE ESen 124 Electrical 10 100 1000 Ports Setting for SyncE sse 128 SyncE Alartris ac crit e rr nee x en oet er eoe Td vedu his sdaddenssadane cess teeeseve 129 IEEE 1588v2 Transparent Clock TC cccceccccecssscececssessceeecsssseeeecesssseeescseeseeesesseeaaess 129 Configuring Ethernet Ring Protection ERP ccc ccccccsssseseccsssseseeessseeeecessaeeeeeseeaes 131 Supported ERP Features ccccccessssssssessssssecessessssececececcesseseauaeceeeeeeeeecesssesseeaeeees 131 ERP Ring COMMANGG c csssecsssssssessecesceeceesesceseessesessseseeseaaececeeecesseeseaaaaeaeeeeeeeeseeses 132 ERP Administrative Commands esses eene nennen nnns 133 ERP MIME S ee ee ee testo ye eives tere Yee saastasthest ease tbh re Puede euer aure ET 134 ERP Configuration Example sees nennen nnn nnns nnne 134 Chapter 8 Monitoring the System Viewing Active Alarms esesssesesseeeeeeeee nnne nnne nennen sn nn nennt rana sanas ases en nn na 137 Viewing Alarm History and System EVentS ccccccssessssssaeeeeeeeecesessseseseaesaeeeeseesensees 138 Events Configuration Masking eessssseesessee eene nnns 139 Viewing Radio Statistics nennen aean k aiani iaa aeieea 140 Viewing Radio Statistics Using the Web EMS cesses 140 Viewing a Statistics Summar
284. ttributes Attribute Description SNMP Object ID SNMP Value Acces Default CLI Syntax s Attribute Name IP Index The index to the IP N A N A 1 4 N A address table IP Address The IP address to which 1 3 6 1 2 1 4 34 InetAddres ip address in RC 0 0 0 0 ip addr this entry s addressing 1 2 S the form information pertains The ipAddressAddr X X X X where address type of this X is a decimal object is specified in number from ipAddressAddrType 0 to 255 for All IP addresses in the example table must be different 10 0 15 74 IP Address The subnet to which the N A not part ip mask inthe RC 255 255 255 Mask mask IP address belongs of the MIB form X X X X 0 where X is a decimal number from 0 to 255 for example 255 255 255 0 IP Default The IP address of the 1 3 6 1 2 1 4 37 InetAddres ip address in NA 0 0 0 0 Router default router 1 2 S the form Address represented by this row ipDefaultRouter X X X X where Address X is a decimal number from 0 to 255 for example 10 0 15 74 VLAN vlan VLAN assigned to the IP N A 0 4094 RC Two different IP addresses cannot be assigned the same VLAN therefore all VIDs in the table must be different Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 284 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 VLAN Common Table Attributes Table 12 43 VLAN Common Attributes Attribute CLI Attribute Description CLI Object ID Access Default Name Component ID Used t
285. tus Tx State RSSI dBm Channel Width MHz Tx Frequency MHz Role Mode Modulation Repetitions Tx Power dBm Loopback Tx Mute Tx Link ID Long Range Mode up normal 50 500 74375 master adaptive 7 disabled disable lv Alignment Status Rx State CINR dB Rx Frequency MHz Role Status Sub Channels FEC Rate Loopback Timeout sec Tx Mute Timeout sec Rx Link ID inactive normal 23 84375 master 60 60 0 Figure 3 9 Web EMS System Screen Radio Section NetBeam 2G e Tx Frequency MHz Select a frequency channel on NetBeam 2G systems the Rx Frequency is updated automatically The default values are 74375 84375 e Channel Width MHz 250 MHz or 500 MHz The default value is 500 e Role Determines whether the ODU functions as a master or slave In a link one side must be set to Master and the other side must be set to Slave required for link synchronization Default value is Auto meaning the role is set automatically by the link You can check the current set role in the Role Status field Manually setting the Role is necessary only for asymmetric configurations TDD systems only e Transmit Asymmetry Default value is symmetric configuration 5096 for Tx and Rx bOtx 50rx For an asymmetric configuration 7596 2596 or 9096 1096 you have to Netronics NetBeam Fami
286. ual file in the NE storage or it can be used to generate a temporary file fileSessionCommand copySwFromRemote 1 copyLicenseFromRemote 2 copyFileFromRemoteToLocal 3 copyEventLog 9 copyInventory 12 copyStatisticsHistory 13 filesessionRowStatus The standard SNMP RowStatus use the createAndGo 4 value to activate the process SNMP PDU Monitoring You can use the following SNMP GET request commands to monitor a FTP SFTP or TFTP session and get the following items Table 9 4 SNMP GET Commands fileSessionState running 1 terminated ok 2 terminated error 3 fileSessionResult String This is useful if an error occurs during the command execution fileSessionState is terminated error fileSessionRowStatus SNMP Activation Request The following are examples of available activation request commands e fileSessionCommand copyStatisticsHistory 13 e fileSessionLocalParams Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 168 Performing System Administration Chapter 9 string mo mo id from time to time e mo id mandatory parameter in cli format rf eth host ethO eth1 eth2 eth3 eth4 vlan cl c2 c3 c4 c5 c6 sl undef 4094 e from request for history from time in the format 2013 05 22 09 45 00 optional parameter if missing then starting from the oldest entry e to request for history until the time in the format 2013 05 22 09 45 00 optional
287. uration Using the CLI eth ethl eth ethl eth ethl eth ethl eth ethl eth eth1 eth ethl eth ethl eth ethl eth ethl eth eth1 eth eth1 eth eth1 eth ethl eth ethl eth ethl eth ethl eth eth1 eth eth1 eth ethl mtu mac addr admin operational last change name alias eth type eth act type auto neg loopback mode loopback timeout alarm propagation clock connector type network type pcp write profile id classifier mode pfc mode alarm suppression Default VLAN Setting Chapter 4 16384 00 24 a4 01 4a 88 up up 0000 03 13 46 Eth1 1000fd 1000fd enabled disabled 60 disabled auto rj45 customer nni none pcp dscp disable disable NetBeam s Undefined VLAN feature enables transparent forwarding of both tagged and untagged traffic by default No configuration or license is necessary for this feature which gives you the flexibility to change your VLANs with no additional configuration necessary in the NetBeam system For VLAN configuration options including the ability to define or block specific VLANs refer to Configuring VLANs on page 70 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 61 Commissioning and Acceptance Procedure This chapter presents the recommended commissioning and acceptance procedure to be performed following the installation of each NetBeam ODU The commissioning and acceptance procedure verifies the correct installation and the proper safe and robust operation of the NetBeam
288. ure wherein mod Modulation type QPSK QAM 16 QAM64 scnum The number of subchannels 1 4 rep Repetition 1 2 4 fec FEC 0 5 0 67 0 8 frame The frame number to be used for the execution of the new modulation only in static mode The mode must be present in the Modulation Table Table 12 20 Static Mode Sub Parameters Argument Description Values SNMP Reference modu modulation QPSK QAM16 rfModulationType QAM64 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 2 1 1 7 num subch Number of 1 4 rfNumOfSubchannels subchannels 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 2 1 1 8 repeat Repetitions 1 2 4 rfNumOfRepetitions 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 2 1 1 9 fec FEC rate 0 5 0 67 0 8 rfFecRate 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 2 1 1 10 Table 12 21 Read Only RF Attributes Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 244 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 Attribute CLI Description SNMP Object ID Value Default Attribute Name Channel Width The channel width rfChannelWidth 250 N A channel width expressed in MHz 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 2 1 1 3 RX State The current state of the RF rfRxState 1 Sync N A rx state receive link 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 2 1 5 Search countdown 1 25 3 Found countdown 4 Normal TX State tx The current state of the RF rfTxState 1 Sync N A state transmit link 1 3 6 1 4 1 31926 2 1 2 Search countdown 1 24 3 Found countdown 4 Normal Operational The current operating state rfOperat
289. ure enables among other things discovery of third party network elements connected to the NetBeam so that they can be managed LLDP performs periodic transmissions of an ODU s capabilities to the adjacent connected stations LLDP frames are not forwarded but are constrained to a single link The information distributed by the protocol is stored in a topology xxxx This information can be retrieved by the user or network element using CLI in order to describe the network s physical topology and its associated stations LLDP enables the discovery of accurate physical network topologies meaning which devices are neighbors and through which ports they connect The user can use this information especially the retrieved management IP addresses in order to manage these discovered nodes This information can be sent over a VID or Untagged The following objects are available from a remote ODU e chassis id IP address e chassis id subtype e port id MAC address e port id subtype mac addr port descr e sys name e sys descr NetBeam 1G1 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 186 Performing System Administration Chapter 9 iP f LLOP 921681151 ES A i Netronics LLDP Info A WEE TOL Syl disabled eth3 disabled none eth4 disabled none Index ff Chassis ID B Chassis ID Port ID Subt Port Descrip Sys Name Sys Descri 192 168 1 152 z 00 24 a4 00
290. vantages over the existing lower frequency bands Taking advantage of the new spectrum the NetBeam enables easy migration to support Gigabit throughput enabling operators to enhance bandwidth capacity on a pay as you grow basis Supporting point to point daisy chain ring and mesh configurations NetBeam system offers carrier class availability and services The following are some of the main features of the NetBeam availability of features depends on platform All Outdoor Packet E band Radio e Operates in the licensed 71 76 81 86 GHz E band e Upto 1 Gbps throughput e Asymmetric capacity configuration TDD version e High gain narrow beam width directional antenna e Low latency Highest Spectral Efficiency in E band Spectrum e 250 MHz 500 MHz channel bandwidth e Advanced hitless errorless Adaptive Bandwidth Coding and Modulation ABCM for a large dynamic range e Configurable center frequency across the entire band Carrier Ethernet Inside e Integrated Gigabit Ethernet switch e Advanced bandwidth aware QoS capabilities e MEF compliant services and QoS e Advanced service management and OAM e SyncE optimized transport of IEEE 1588 and IEEE 1588TC e Ring mesh and Link Aggregation 1 1 240 for carrier class availability and resiliency e Standard based for seamless integration into existing networks and multi vendor interoperability e Seamless software upgrades to MPLS IP and beyond Carrier Grade e CLI SNMP or we
291. ved in the last CCM Peer Interface An enumerated value of the 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 3 1 7 none up RO Status if status Interface status TLV dotlagCfmMepDbinterface down testing received in the last CCM StatusTlv unknown from the remote MEP or dormant not the default value present isNolnterfaceStatus TLV lower layer indicating either no CCM down has been received or that no interface status TLV was received in the last CCM Peer Chassis ID This object specifies the 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 3 1 8 chassis comp RO Subtype format of the Chassis ID dotlagCfmMepDbChassisld if alias port chassis id received in the last CCM Subtype comp mac subtype net addr if name Peer Chassis ID The Chassis ID The format 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 3 1 9 Hexadecimal RO chassis id of this object is determined dotlagCfmMepDbChassisld string by the value of the dotliagCfmLtrChassisldSubt ype object Management The TDomain that identifies 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 1 7 3 1 10 snmp udp RO Address Domain the type and format of the dotlagCfmMepDbMan Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 264 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 Attribute CLI Description SNMP Object ID Syntax Access Attribute Name mng addr related AddressDomain snmp ieee802 domain dotiagCfmMepDbManAddr ess object used to access the SNMP agent of the system transmitting the CCM Received in the CCM
292. vel Use the following command to set an MA Note that the ma name attribute is mandatory and must be unique in the system set cfm ma lt md idx gt lt ma idx gt format lt ma name format gt name lt ma name gt interval lt ccm interval gt Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 103 Performing Advanced Configuration Chapter 7 Use the following command to display a particular MA or all MAs show cfm ma lt md idx list gt all lt ma idx list gt all name component interval info Use the following command to clear a particular MA or all MAs clear cfm ma lt md idx list gt all lt ma idx list gt all Add CAM MA CFM MA R MAIO MOIO Name Interval 1 1 string Link 300hz 2 string Customer is k Figure 7 14 CFM MA Setup Working with Component Maintenance Associations Use the following command to set a Component MA set cfm ma comp lt comp id gt lt md idx gt lt ma idx gt vlan lt vid gt mhf creation lt mhf creation gt mhfid permission lt mhf permission Use the following command to display a particular Component MA or all Component MAs show cfm ma comp lt comp id list all lt md idx list gt all lt ma idx list gt all vlan mhf creation mhfid permission info Use the following command to clear a particular Component MA or all Component MAs clear cfm ma comp lt comp id list all lt md idx list gt all lt ma idx list
293. voking the CLI e CLI Command Syntax e Viewing the CLI Command History e Invoking CLI Help and Autocompletion e CLI Error Messages e Viewing the EtherHaul Statistics History e CLI Managed Object Reference e Management Object Attributes e Radio Object Attributes e Encryption Object Attributes e Connectivity Fault Management CFM Object Attributes e Network Object Attributes Invoking the CLI 1 Runa standard SSH client You can use a common open source SSH client programs such as PuTTY Netronics NetPoint Pro Family System Manual 211 Using the NetBeam CLI Chapter 12 2 Enter the ODU s IP address and open the connection The default IP address is 192 168 0 1 3 Login as user admin 4 Enterthe password admin When a successful connection is established the ODU responds as follows Netronics OS gt Default gt NetBeam CLI commands should only be entered at the above prompt CLI Command Syntax After invoking the CLI you can input commands Each CLI command is submitted to the NetBeam device for execution after which a response is typically returned Each command line submitted to the CLI consists of 1 A unique command that specifies the action s to be performed 2 The object type on which action s are performed 3 The identifier s for the object s on which action s are performed 4 Zero or more object attributes that typically specify the value or characteristics for each action A CLI comma
294. w the available modulation profiles 1 Onthe Web EMS Main screen click Radio 2 Onthe Radio screen click the Modulations section Note that different modulation tables may apply according to product and according to the frequency channel used Modulations A Frequency Modulation Sub Channels Repetitions ___ FEC Rate CINR Low CINR High li Backoff any lapsk any qpsk any lapsk any qam16 any qam64 0 5 128 15 0 5 11 16 0 5 12 jis 05 17 22 lo 5 21 127 Be el ajajana co co oo co o Figure 3 10 WEB EMS Radio Screen Modulations Section CINR Low Lower threshold for stepping down in modulation profile Adaptive Mode CINR High Upper threshold for stepping up in modulation profile Adaptive Mode Configuring Ethernet Interfaces Using the Web EMS 1 The NetBeam system includes four Ethernet interfaces e Host Management interface e Eth0 Radio interface e Eth1 ODU interface port 1 Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 47 Performing Basic Configuration Using the Web EMS Chapter 3 e Eth2 ODU interface port 2 e Eth3 ODU interface port 3 NetBeam 2G only e Eth4 ODU interface port4 NetBeam 2G only You can configure Ethernet port parameters in the Port sections of the Quick Configuration screen Some NetBeam Ethernet port parameters are preset and cannot be modified This section lists and describes those parameters that can be modified Port Eth
295. y Using the Web EMS ccccccccccssssssesssseceesaeseseneaes 141 Viewing Radio Statistics Using the CLI esses 142 Viewing Radio Statistics Summary Using the CLl c ccccccccecesesssessssteseeeeeeessess 143 Viewing VLAN StatiStics ccccccsesseccssesssecsscsssesecesseccecececececesuescoesesaesssesaesssaeserseersesaeesaes 143 Viewing Queue StatiStiCS cccecscssecsscescessesssseseeeseeeeeeceeceseesssesaesesaeseescoeseseeseseseesssasesaeeas 144 Viewing Outgoing Queue StatiStiCs ccccscesssesssssessseseeseeececeeseseesereceesssaeeseeasens 144 Incoming QUEUES Commands eene nntn nennen neta nas tanta nnn 145 Viewing Ethernet Statistics eese ennt nennt nnn nnn nn nnns nn train sensit aa 146 Ethernet Statistics Attributes eerte eene nennen ntn 146 Viewing Ethernet Statistics Using the Web EMS cccscssssssssssssceeeeseessessaeees 147 Viewing Ethernet Statistics Using the CLI seesseeseeeeeeee nennen 148 Viewing Bandwidth Utilization Statistics sess nennen 148 Chapter 9 Performing System Administration Config ring EnctryptlOris ice cere ee E eterne oben tab aene OUR geo teg duto 151 Loading Encryption License Key seeeeeesseeseeeeenenennnen enne 151 Setting up a Static Key ue e tte nies eoe te eee Or tae eue YER EEEREN 151 Working with Configuration Files ceessseseseseeeee eene nennen nnns 151 Saving Configura
296. y using the SET command After the script termination script parameters variables disappear and the global variables created by SET with similar names are visible again CLI Example NB2G1 gt set var ManagmentVID 5 NB2G1 gt NB2G1 gt set vlan s1 ManagmentVID egress eth0 ethl untagged eth0O eth1 Substituted set vlan sl 5 egress eth0 eth1l untagged eth0 ethl Set done vlan sl 5 NB2G1 gt NB2G1 gt NB2G1 gt set var Contact Netronics NB2G1 gt NB2G1 gt NB2G1 gt show var Locals Globals Contact Netronics Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 181 Performing System Administration Chapter 9 NB2G1 gt set system name Contact Substituted set system name Netronics Set done system Netronics gt MAC Table Limitations You can limit the number of learned MAC addresses per PORT VLAN to the system limitation of 4000 learned MAC addresses based on the configured value A smaller table of secure MAC addresses is maintained in addition to and as a subset of the traditional MAC address table This feature is supported on NetBeam 2G1 systems only MAC Table Limitation Setting Procedure 1 Configure the FDB Quota index and size 2 Configure the Classifier EVC VID Port 3 Associate the FDB Quota and the Classifier EVC 4 Define the FDB drop flood mode e Drop Prevents the registration of new MAC addresses according to the FDB Quota size e Flood New MAC addresses are registered and one of the
297. ypes The user type defines the user s access privileges User Read only access but cannot view user names passwords and other security settings Tech Read only access to configuration settings Can clear statistics alarms and log lists and run diagnostics Super Read write access but no access to user names passwords and other security settings Admin Full access except for access to debugging tools A default admin user is built into the system with the user name admin and the password admin Only one admin type user can be defined 7 Click Apply to save the changes Netronics NetBeam Family System Manual 154 Performing System Administration Chapter 9 Upgrading the ODU Software The NetBeam system supports switching in real time between two software versions NetBeam maintains an active running and a standby software version simultaneously This enables you to upgrade the software with minimal interruption of service An external FTP SFTP or TFTP server is required for software download When you download a software version the downloaded version replaces the standby version Figure 9 4 shows the relationship between flash banks and software images in the NetBeam system Software Image Y Flash Bank 1 _ Running flash bank Flash Bank 2 _ Not Running flash bank Software Image X Figure 9 4 Flash Banks and Software Images You can download and activate a new software version using

NetPointPro Family System Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents